100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views

Codecalc - 2013 Manual

giude

Uploaded by

Thiruppathi Rajan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views

Codecalc - 2013 Manual

giude

Uploaded by

Thiruppathi Rajan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 484

CodeCalc

User's Guide

Version 2013 (V15.0) November 2012 DICAS-PE-200109C

Copyright
Copyright 1985-2012 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite, CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc

Below are the new features for Version 2013 (V15.0) of PV Elite and CodeCalc. New features and improvements come directly from your comments as well as updates to the previous version.

Code Updates and Analysis changes:

PD 5500 2012 added PD 5500 jackets and limpet coils added TEMA 9th edition added API 579 -1/ FFS-1 (2007 edition), Part 4: General Metal Loss added to PV Elite Upgrade ASME VIII, Div 1 Fatigue Analysis using Div 2 (2007, 2011a version) MDMT for UHA 51 stainless steels EN-13445: expansion joint calculations (bellows) added (2012 R1) ASME Tubesheet MDMT calculations available Differential pressures on tubes for differential pressure design A number of user requested EN-13445 enhancements have been added

Internationalization
Australian/ New Zealand 2011 Wind Code update Vertical acceleration component for Indian seismic calculation Update to European Wind Code to 2011 version European Nozzle load table is now available (2012 R1) Inclusion of European shapes in structural database (2012 R1) Rounded metric defaults in basering and nozzle dialogs and tools configuration(2012 R1) Multiple languages (French, Portuguese, Spanish, and Italian)

Performs internal and external pressure design of vessels and exchangers using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Components include cylinders, conical sections, elliptical heads, torispherical heads, flat heads, spherical shells, and spherical heads. This module calculates required thickness and maximum allowable internal pressure for the given component. It also calculates the minimum design metal temperature according to UCS-66, and evaluates stiffening rings for external pressure design. Jackets covering the shell can also be analyzed. These jackets are addressed in Appendix 9 of the ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1. The module implements API-579 Fitness For Service evaluations (FFS) Sec. 4, Local Thinning, Sec. 5, General Metal Loss and Sec. 6 Pitting Corrosion. For more information, see Shells and Heads (on page 49).

Nozzles
Calculates required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, including tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The module checks weld sizes, calculates the strength of reinforcement, and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle. Hillside, tangential and Y-angle nozzles can also be evaluated. For more information, see Nozzles (on page 87).

CodeCalc User's Guide

CodeCalc Overview Conical Sections

Performs internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Complete area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the cone under both internal and external pressure are included. For more information, see Conical Sections (on page 109).

Floating Heads
Performs internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1 rules. The module also provides the additional Soehren's calculation technique allowed by the code. MAWP and MAPnc are also calculated. For more information, see Floating Heads (on page 117).

Flanges
Performs stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. This module designs and analyzes the following types of flanges: All integral flange types Slip-on flanges and all loose flange types with hubs Ring-type flanges and all loose flange types without hubs Blind flanges, both circular and non-circular TEMA channel covers Reverse geometry weld neck flanges Flat faced flanges with full face gaskets You can input the external forces and moments acting on the flange and alternate mating flange loads. For more information, see Flanges (on page 135).

TEMA Tubesheets (TEMA and PD 5500)

Performs an analysis of all types of tubesheets using the 8th Edition of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association and PD 5500. The module takes full account of the effects of tubesheets extended as flanges. For fixed tubesheets, the module includes the effects of differential thermal expansion and the presence of an expansion joint. Expansion joints can also be designed. For a fixed tubesheet exchanger the module analyzes multiple load cases for both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. If an expansion joint is added, then run the corresponding expansion joint load cases. For more information, see TEMA Tubesheets (on page 151).

ASME Tubesheets
Determines the required thickness of tubesheets for fixed, floating, or U-tube exchangers according to the ASME Code Section VIII division 1 section UHX. Analyzes multiple loads cases for corroded and uncorroded conditions. MAWP and MAPnc for the shellside and tubeside are determined. For more information, see ASME Tubesheets (on page 183).

Horizontal Vessels
Performs stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the L.P. Zick method. Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads. Stiffening

CodeCalc User's Guide

CodeCalc Overview
rings used in the design of the vessel are evaluated. Additionally, the saddle, webs, and baseplate are checked for external seismic and wind loads. You can also specify friction and additional longitudinal forces on the vessel. For more information, see Horizontal Vessels (on page 213).

Rectangular Vessels
Analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 and Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are analyzed for internal pressure, including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a diametral staying plate. All membrane and bending stresses are calculated and compared to the appropriate allowables. For more information, see Rectangular Vessels (App. 13) (on page 229).

Legs & Lugs

Performs analysis of vessel support legs, support lugs, trunnions, and lifting lugs based on industry standard calculation techniques. The resulting stresses are compared to the AISC Handbook of Steel Construction or the ASME Code. A full table of 929 AISC beams, channels, and angles is included in the software. WRC 107 analysis to check local vessel stresses around the trunnion and the support lug is also available. Various wind and seismic codes are available for leg and lug supported vessels. For more information, see Legs and Lugs (on page 265).

Pipes & Pads

Calculates the required wall thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for two pipes, and branch reinforcement requirements for the same two pipes considered as a branch and a header. Based on ANSI B31.3 rules, this module includes tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. For more information, see Pipes and Pads (on page 291).

WRC 107/FEA
Calculates stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the method of P.P. Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, including a stress comparison to VIII Div. 2 allowables for three different loading conditions. This module also contains an interface to the finite element analysis software Nozzle Pro from The Paulin Research Group. For more information, see WRC 107/537 FEA (on page 301).

Baserings
Performs stress and thickness evaluation for skirts and baserings. Results from both the neutral axis shift and simplified method for basering required thickness are reported. Required skirt thickness due to weight loads and bending moments are also displayed. Tailing lugs attached to the basering are analyzed. For more information, see Base Rings (on page 327).

Thin Joints (Bellows)

Performs stress and life cycle evaluations for thin walled expansion joints (bellows kind) according to ASME VIII Div. 1 appendix 26. MAWP and MAPnc are also calculated. For more information, see Thin Joints (on page 341).

CodeCalc User's Guide

CodeCalc Overview Thick Joints

Performs stress, life cycle, and spring-rate calculations for flanged and fluid expansion joints according to with ASME VIII Div. 1 appendix 5. The spring rate computation is according to TEMA eighth edition. For more information, see Thick Joints (on page 349).

CodeCalc Workflows
8. Type 100 (assuming that you are using English units) in the Design Internal Pressure box. 9. Type 700 in the Design Temperature for Internal Pressure box. When you press Tab, the software pauses momentarily to check whether the material specified has an allowable stress greater than zero at the temperature entered. 10. Click the button to view the allowable stress. The allowable stress for SA516-70 material is 18,100 psi at this temperature. This is precisely the value that CodeCalc extracted from the material database. 11. Type 15 in the Design External Pressure box. 12. Type 650 in the Design Temperature for External Pressure box. 13. Type SA-516-70 in the Material box. The software checks the database and updates the allowable stresses. 14. Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this list, click to display the materials list.

Each major material classification is divided into columns.

Tabs

Home Tab
The Home tab contains the following commands for editing elements in the file. New - Creates a new file. If you have a file open with unsaved changes when you click this command, you receive a message asking if you would like to save the changes. Open - Opens an existing file. Files of type *.cci are displayed in the Open dialog box. If you have a file open with unsaved changes when you click this command, you receive a message asking if you would like to save the changes. Save - Saves a .cci file with its currently defined data. If you are saving the file for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears, so you can specify the location, which could be a local or network drive or a UNC path, and the name of the file. Print - Prints the contents of the active window. Save Analysis as Text - Save the analysis results out to a .txt file that you specify. Delete Selected Item - Deletes the current element. Shells and Heads - Inserts a shell or head element. For more information, see Shells and Heads (on page 49). Nozzles - Inserts a nozzle element. For more information, see Nozzles (on page 87). Conical Sections - Inserts a cone element. For more information, see Conical Sections (on page 109). Floating Heads - Inserts a floating head element. For more information, see Floating Heads (on page 117). Flanges - Inserts a flange element. For more information, see Flanges (on page 135). TEMA Tubesheet - Inserts a TEMA tubsheet element. For more information, see TEMA Tubesheets (on page 151). ASME Tubesheet - Inserts a ASME tubesheet element. For more information, see ASME Tubesheets (on page 183). Horizontal Vessels - Inserts a horizontal vessel element. For more information, see Horizontal Vessels (on page 213). Rectangular Vessels - Inserts a rectangular vessel element. For more information, see Rectangular Vessels (App. 13) (on page 229). Legs and Lugs - Inserts a leg or lug element. For more information, see Legs and Lugs (on page 265). Pipes and Pads - Inserts a pipe or pad element. For more information, see Pipes and Pads (on page 291). WRC 107/537 - Inserts a WRC 107/537 nozzle. For more information, see WRC 107/537 FEA (on page 301). Base Rings - Inserts a base ring element. For more information, see Base Rings (on page 327).

CodeCalc User's Guide

Tabs
Thin Joints - Inserts a thin joint element. For more information, see Thin Joints (on page 341). Thick Joints - Inserts a thick joint element. For more information, see Thick Joints (on page 349). Half Pipes - Inserts a half pipe element. For more information, see Half Pipes (on page 357). Large Openings - Inserts a large opening element. For more information, see Large Openings (on page 363). WRC 297 - Inserts a WRC 297 nozzle element. For more information, see WRC 297/Annex G (on page 367). Appendix Y Flanges - Inserts an Appendix Y flange element. For more information, see Appendix Y Flanges (on page 375). Title Page - Opens a blank report title page. You can type report titles for this group of reports. Click Insert Default Title Page to use the title page template text that you define in the TITLE.HED file in the defined System folder. Project Data - Opens the Project Data dialog box. You can type title lines for Company, Vessel, and Engineer. These lines appear at the top of each page of the printed reports. Cascade Windows - Arranges all open windows from the top-left to bottom-right. Horizontal Tile - Arranges all open windows stacking them on top of each other. Vertical Tile - Arranges all open windows side-by-side. Analyze File - Performs the analysis on all components in the file. Analyze Selected Items - Performs calculations for selected analysis types. Review Result - Opens the Output Processor to view the analysis results. Append Result - Adds the analysis results to the end of the previous analysis results.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Tabs

Tools Tab
The Tools tab contains the following utility commands: Configuration - Specifies software parameters. For more information, see Configuration Dialog Box (on page 29). Select Units - Specifies a .fil units file. Select the needed file in the Open dialog box. The software internally uses conventional American units. Choose another .fil file, such as SI, to display values in other units. Create/Review Units - Creates a new .fil units file or edits an existing .fil file. For more information, see Make Unit (see "Create/Edit Units File" on page 32). Units Conversion Viewer - Converts a value in one set of units to a value in another set of units. Each tab of the Units Conversion Utility dialog box contains a category of conversions, such as length, area, pressure, or force. Edit/Add Materials - Creates and edits user-defined materials in the CodeCalc material database. For more information, see Material Database Editor (on page 34). Calculator - Opens the Windows calculator. You can calculate a value, select the value, and use Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste to transfer the value into a CodeCalc field.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Tabs

Configuration Dialog Box

Sets options for software parameters. Computation Control Tab (Configuration Dialog Box) (on page 29) Miscellaneous Tab (Configuration Dialog Box) (on page 30)

Computation Control Tab (Configuration Dialog Box)

This module calculates the required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) for cylindrical shells and heads under internal or external pressure. The program is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2010 Edition 2004 A-06. Under internal pressure, the program analyzes six types of heads or shells, using applicable code formulae as follows: Shell or Head Type Cylinder Elliptical ID Basis UG-27 (c) (1) OD Basis App 1-1 (a) (1)

App 1-4 (c) (1), App 1-4 (f) App 1-4 (c) (2), App 1-4 (f)

Torispherical Spherical Head or Shell Conical Head or Shell Flat Head

App 1-4 (d) (3), App 1-4 (f) App 1-4 (d) (4), App 1-4 (f) UG-27 (d) (3) UG-32 (g) UG-34 (1)and (3) App 1-1 (a) (2) App 1-4 (e) (1)

Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed. Torispherical heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be analyzed. The thin, large diameter elliptical or torispherical head is also checked using App. 1-4 (f). Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the CONICAL program. Welded flat heads, circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this program. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the FLANGE program. Bolted dished heads under internal or external pressure are analyzed in the FLOHEAD program. Under external pressure program analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applicable code formula as follows: Shell or Head Type Cylinder Code Paragraph UG-28 (c)

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Elliptical Torispherical Spherical Head or Shell Conical Shell or Head UG-33 (d) UG-33 (e) UG-33 (c) and UG-28 (d) UG-33 (f)

All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than 10. Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed. Torispherical heads with any crown radius may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of conical heads or sections is analyzed in the CONICAL program.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

The SHELL program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition. Geometry is shown below. In addition, this module also accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be used for UCS-66 calculations.

Figure 1: Shell Geometry

Figure 2: Head Geometry

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

API 579 Introduction

Fitness For Service (FFS) assessments using API Recommended Practice 579 (API RP 579) are performed to assess the operation safety and reliability of process plant equipment, such as pressure vessels, piping, and/or tanks - for some desired future period. The assessment procedure provides an estimate of the remaining strength of the equipment in its current state, which may become degraded while in-use from its original condition. Typical FFS assessments entail: Identifying the flaw type and damage mechanism. Considering the applicability and limitations of the specific flaw type procedure. Reviewing data requirement and gathering the data. Applying the assessment techniques and comparing the result to the acceptance criteria. Estimating the remaining life for the inspection interval. Applying remediation as appropriate. Applying in-service monitoring as appropriate. Documenting the results. Common degradation mechanisms include general corrosion, localized corrosion, pitting corrosion, blister, mechanical distortion, and so on. The procedures on how to assess these common degradations or flaws are discussed in the sections described in the Table of Contents for API RP 579 and listed below: Section 1 Introduction Section 2 Fitness-For-Service Engineering Assessment Procedure Section 3 Assessment of Equipment for Brittle Fracture Section 4 Assessment of General Metal Loss Section 5 Assessment of Local Metal Loss Section 6 Assessment of Pitting Corrosion Section 7 Assessment of Blisters and Laminations Section 8 Assessment of Weld Misalignment and Shell Distortions Section 9 Assessment of Crack-Like Flaws Section 10 Assessment of Component Operating in the Creep Regimes Section 11 Assessment of Fire Damage

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis

CodeCalc supports the following flaw assessments for cylindrical shells, simple cones, and formed heads: Section 4, General Metal Loss. Section 5, Local Metal Loss. Section 6, Pitting Corrosion. There are three levels of assessments available for each flaw type. Level 1 - Typically involves a simplified method using charts, simple formulae, and conservative assumptions. Level 2 - Generally requires a more detailed evaluation and produce more accurate results Level 3 - Allows flaw assessments using a more sophisticated method such as FEA. CodeCalc provides only Level 1 and Level 2 assessments. In each assessment level, the respective remaining life or the de-rate value of MAWP is calculated depending on passing or failing acceptance criteria.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Section 4 covers flaw assessment procedures for components subject to general metal loss resulting from corrosion and/or erosion. Meanwhile Section 5 covers the analysis of local metal loss or Local Thin Areas (LTAs), which include groove-like flaws or gouges. In general, flaw assessments using Section 4 criteria produce more conservative results. The differences between Section 4 and 5 when applied to LTAs are as follows: Section 4 - Rules for all Level 1 and 2 assessments are based on the Average Thickness Averaging approach, which is combined with the ASME Code rules to determine the acceptability for continued operation. Section 5 - Rules for all Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are based on establishing a Remaining Strength Factor (RSF), which is used to determine the acceptability for continued operation. The Assessment of General Metal Loss described in Section 4 can be performed using either point thickness (random type readings) or profile thickness (grid type readings) measurement data. API RP 579 requires a minimum of 15 data measurement points be used for the analysis. The localized metal loss assessment (described in Section 5), can only be performed using profile thickness data according to a grid setup as shown in Figure 10.3. Two data entry types are provided in the Profile Type selection list; Grid and Critical Thickness Profile (CTP). The number of rows and columns are set by entering the number of points in both the circumferential and longitudinal directions. The total number of data inputs provided are 256 for both point and profile thickness data measurements.

Figure 3: Profile Thickness Inspection Planes

For most evaluations, it is recommended to first perform the assessment using Section 4, then perform Section 5 if necessary. The rules in Section 4 have been structured to provide consistent results with Section 5. However, it is the responsibility of the user to review the Assessment Applicability and Limitation whenever the assessment changes. API 579 Section 4 limitations for Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are as follows: The original design is in accordance with a recognized code or standard.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Height of Liquid Column (Operating) - Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest. Height of Liquid Column (Hydrotest) - Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid when the vessel is being hydrotested. If this is shop hydrotest, and the vessel is laying on its side, then the height of the liquid column should be equal to the inside diameter of the vessel. In the case of a vertical hydrotest, this liquid height can be greater than the vessel diameter.

Geometry Tab (Shell/Head)

Specifies parameters for shell and head geometry. Type of Shell - Enter the type of shell for this shell section: Cylindrical Elliptical Torispherical Hemispherical Head or Spherical Shell Conical Flat Head Specific parameters for the selected shell type display. Design Length of Section - Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one-third the depth of the heads or, alternately, the distance between stiffening rings. For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/6. For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/3. For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/9. When analyzing a head, enter zero for the length. Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations - Enter the distance that you want CodeCalc to use for the liquid volume computation. Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections - Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half apex angle for cones under internal pressure and without toriconical transitions or discontinuity stress check is 30 degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections or discontinuity stress check is 60 degrees. Typically the largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning. In that case the user is encouraged to use the CONICAL module for a more detailed analysis. Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads - Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0. Inside Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads - Enter the crown radius for torispherical heads. The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as the dimension "L", in the ASME VIII Div. 1 Code. This dimension is usually referred to as "DR" in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being "OD" heads, the crown radius is given on the inside diameter basis. See the illustration in the catalog and where the arrows for "DR" and "IKR" point to (the inside of the head). For more information, see Appendix 1-4 in the Code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Inside Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads - Enter the knuckle radius r for torispherical heads, according to ASME Section VIII Div. 1. This dimension is usually referred to as IKR in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being OD heads, the knuckle radius is given on the inside diameter basis. See the illustration in the catalog and where the arrows for DR and IKR point to (the inside of the head). For more information, see Appendix 1-4 in the Code. Length of Straight Flange - The straight flange is the cylindrical portion of a torispherical (dished) or elliptical head. This dimension is used to compute the overall volume of the head in the new, cold, and corroded condition, as well as the weight of the head. This dimension does not affect the required thickness calculation. Attachment Factor for Flat Head - Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors display below, however consult Paragraph UG-34 before using these values: 0.17 (b-1) 0.20 (b-2) 0.20 (c) 0.13 (d) 0.20 (e f g) 0.33 (h) 0.20 (I) 0.30 (j k) Head welded to vessel with generous radius Head welded to vessel with small radius Lap welded or brazed construction Integral flat circular heads Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m) Plate welded to end of shell Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment). To compute the required thickness of the bolted flat heads (type j and k), use the Flange module and model it as a blind flange. Bolted flat head with full face gasket Plate screwed into small diameter vessel Plate held in place by beveled edge

0.30 (m n o) Plate held in place by screwed ring 0.25 (p) 0.75 (q) 0.33 (r s)

Large Diameter for Noncircular Flat Heads - If you have a noncircular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and enter the small dimension as the component diameter above. This value is used to compute the factor Z for noncircular heads. If the head is circular, enter the diameter here. Diameter Basis - Select the type of diameter from the list. ID - Inside diameter OD - Outside diameter Torispherical heads should always be specified on the inside diameter basis. Even though the head catalogs refer to these as OD heads, inspection of the catalog nomenclature reveals that the dimensions listed are inside dimensions. Because of this, the inside dimensions from the catalog can be entered directly when the ID basis is specified. Normally, for a torispherical head the inside crown radius is equal to the vessel outside diameter. For flat heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head. Diameter of Shell/Head - Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For cones, enter the largest diameter of the cone. For flat heads, use the appropriate diameter per the figure UG-34 in the

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

ASME Code. The diameter of the head is usually taken as the inside diameter of the cylindrical shell to which it is attached. The program allows you to use either an inside diameter (ID) or an outside diameter (OD). Click to select a pipe by nominal pipe diameter and pipe schedule. Pipe Selection Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate - Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a minimum specified wall thickness, which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should enter the minimum thickness. Some commonly used thicknesses are: 0.0625 - 1/16 " 0.1250 - 1/8 " 0.2500 - 14 " 0.3750 - 3/8 " 0.4375 - 7/16 " 0.5000 - 1/2 " 0.6250 - 5/8 " 0.7500 - 3/4 " 0.8750 - 7/8 " 1.0000 - 1 " Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate - (Optional) Enter the NOMINAL or AVERAGE thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to construct the vessel. This thickness is used to calculate the volume and weight of the metal ONLY if it is between 1 and 1.5 times the minimum thickness. If this value is left blank or 0, the program will use the minimum thickness to compute the weight and volume of this shell element. Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance that you enter. Type of Reinforcing Ring - Enter the index for the type of reinforcing ring on the cylindrical or conical section. Three options are available: None - No additional input required. Bar - Displays the Reinforcing Ring - Bar dialog box. You must enter the width and thickness of the bar. For more information, see Bar Options (on page 62). Section - Displays the Reinforcing Ring - Section dialog box. You must enter the moment of inertia, cross sectional area, and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam. In all cases CodeCalc includes the shell in the calculation of the moment of inertia for the stiffening ring. You can only perform this calculation for external pressure calculations. Also, the detailed analysis for the required moment of inertia and cross section area for cones is contained in the separate CONICAL program. For more information, see Section Options (on page 64). Minimum Design Metal Temperature - If this component is a carbon or low alloy steel shell or head, the program will compute its Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT). The value to be entered in this field is the user-defined MDMT. This value is for reference only and will not be used by the program. If this material is not a carbon steel then enter a zero (0) in this field. If a value of zero is entered, the program will not echo this value out during runtime. Skip UG-16(b) Minimum Thickness Calculation? - Select this option to skip the UG-16(b) calculation. Section UG-16(b) states the minimum thickness for pressure retaining components as 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). There are certain exemptions from this requirement such as in the case of heat exchanger tubes. Refer to the ASME Section VIII, Division -1, UG-16(b) for more details.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Is a Jacket Present (App. 9)? - Check this box if a jacket is present and to activate the Jacket tab. The program will analyze jackets according to Appendix-9 of the ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1. For more information, see Jacket Tab (on page 69). The following jacket types are addressed:

Is the Ring attached to both inner shell and Outer Jacket? - Specifies whether the ring is attached to both the inner shell and the outer jacket.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Bar Options
Specifies the parameters for bar reinforcement rings. Width of Reinforcing Ring - Enter the width of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is the dimension that is perpendicular to the surface of the shell. Thickness of Reinforcing Ring - Enter the thickness of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is the dimension that is parallel to the surface of the shell.

Figure 4: Thickness of Reinforcing Ring

Stiffening Ring Material Name - Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking Database while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, you can select its specification and properties by selecting Tools > Edit > Add Materials from the Main Menu. If you type in the name, CodeCalc retrieves the first material it finds with a matching name. EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C Some typical material names (standard ASME material name): Plates & Bolting SA-516 55 SA-516 60 SA-516 65 SA-516 70 SA-193 B7 SA-182-F1 SA-182 F1 SA-182 F11 SA-182 F12 SA-182 F22 SA-105 SA-36 SA-106 B Stainless Steel SA-240 304 SA-240 304L SA-240 316 SA-240 316L SA-193 B8

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Aluminum SB-209 SB-234 Titanium SB-265 1 Nickel SB-409 SB-424 If you used old CodeCalc material names with previous versions, you may refer to the CodeCalc User's Guide Appendix 22.6 for name comparisons with ASME Code Names. Size of Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell - Enter the dimension of the weld leg, which connects the stiffening ring to the shell section. This value is used in the weld shear flow calculations if a simple bar stiffener has been selected as the type of reinforcing ring. Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements -Entering a structural ring type here causes CodeCalc to search the structural database for a suitable member that meest the inertia requirements for the ring. The valid types of structural shapes are: EQUAL ANGLE - Equal Leg Angles UNEQUAL ANGLE - Unequal Angle DBL LARGE ANGLE - Double Angles Large Legs back to back DBL SMALL ANGLE - Double Angles Small Legs back to back CHANNEL - Channel Sections I-BEAM - Wide Flange Sections WT SECTION - Wide Flange Sections (T type ) MT SECTION - Miscellaneous Tee ST SECTION - Structural Tee MC SECTION - Miscellaneous Channel Weld Ring Attachment Style - Enter the style of the weld that attaches the stiffening ring to the shell section. Per UG-29 of the Code, there are three styles: INTERMITTENT CONTINUOUS BOTH This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for the computation of the maximum spacing between weld segments. Location of Ring - There are two possibilities for the location of the stiffening ring. INTERNAL - Attached to the inside of the shell. EXTERNAL - On the outer surface of the shell.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Is the ring rolled the hard way? - If you have selected an angle type ring to satisfy the inertia requirements above, this box is meaningful; otherwise it is ignored. When this option is used, CodeCalc computes the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid based on information in the AISC Steel handbook.

Figure 5: Hard Way or Easy Way

Section Options
Specifies the parameters for reinforcing rings for sections. Stiffening Ring Material Name - Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking Database while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, you can select its specification and properties by selecting Tools > Edit > Add Materials from the Main Menu. If you type in the name, CodeCalc retrieves the first material it finds with a matching name. EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C Some typical material names (standard ASME material name): Plates & Bolting SA-516 55 SA-516 60 SA-516 65 SA-516 70 SA-193 B7 SA-182-F1 SA-182 F1 SA-182 F11 SA-182 F12 SA-182 F22 SA-105 SA-36 SA-106 B Stainless Steel SA-240 304

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

SA-240 304L SA-240 316 SA-240 316L SA-193 B8 Aluminum SB-209 SB-234 Titanium SB-265 1 Nickel SB-409 SB-424 If you used old CodeCalc material names with previous versions, you may refer to the CodeCalc User's Guide Appendix 22.6 for name comparisons with ASME Code Names. Size of Fillet Weld Connecting Ring to Shell - Enter the dimension of the weld leg, which connects the stiffening ring to the shell section. This value is used in the weld shear flow calculations if a simple bar stiffener has been selected as the type of reinforcing ring. Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Ring - Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section, which is being used as a reinforcing ring, in the direction parallel to the surface of the shell. Cross Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring - Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing ring. Distance from Ring Centroid to shell Surface - Enter the distance from the surface of the shell to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This distance should be measured normal to the shell surface. Ring Type to Satisfy Inertial and Area Requirements - Entering a structural ring type here causes CodeCalc to search the structural database for a suitable member that meest the inertia requirements for the ring. The valid types of structural shapes are: EQUAL ANGLE - Equal Leg Angles UNEQUAL ANGLE - Unequal Angle DBL LARGE ANGLE - Double Angles Large Legs back to back DBL SMALL ANGLE - Double Angles Small Legs back to back CHANNEL - Channel Sections I-BEAM - Wide Flange Sections WT SECTION - Wide Flange Sections (T type ) MT SECTION - Miscellaneous Tee ST SECTION - Structural Tee MC SECTION - Miscellaneous Channel Weld Ring Attachment Style - Enter the style of the weld that attaches the stiffening ring to the shell section. Per UG-29 of the Code, there are three styles: INTERMITTENT CONTINUOUS BOTH This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for the computation of the maximum spacing between weld segments. Location of Ring - There are two possibilities for the location of the stiffening ring. INTERNAL - Attached to the inside of the shell.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

EXTERNAL - On the outer surface of the shell. Is the ring angle rolled the hard way? - If you have selected an angle type ring to satisfy the inertia requirements above, this box is meaningful; otherwise it is ignored. When this option is used, CodeCalc computes the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid based on information in the AISC Steel handbook.

Figure 6: Hard Way or Easy Way

Optional Data Tab

Specifies parameters for overriding the values generated by the software. User MAWP - (Maximum Allowable Working Pressure) Enter the design MAWP. If this value is provided, the calculated MAWP based on the input nominal thickness will be overridden and used to compute the de-rated MAWP in Section 5 and Section 6 analysis. The de-rating of the vessel element will be shown automatically when the results indicate failure for continuing operation. However, when the results meet the passing criteria, a remaining life of the equipment using thickness approach methodology will be presented. Longitudinal Minimum Required Thickness, TMINL - Enter the TMINL thickness. If either the TMINL or the TMINC value is greater than 0.0, then the calculated TMIN value based on the ASME Section VIII will be overridden. Circumerential Minimum Required Thickness, TMINC - Enter the TMINC thickness. If either the TMINL or the TMINC value is greater than 0.0, then the calculated TMIN value based on the ASME Section VIII will be overridden. Longitudinal Membrane Stress, SigmaML - Enter the SigmaML stress value. If either the TMINL or the TMINC value is greater than 0.0, then the calculated SigmaML value based on the ASME Section VIII will be overridden. Circumferential Membrane Stress, SigmaMC - Enter the SigmaMC stress value. If either the TMINL or the TMINC value is greater than 0.0, then the calculated SigmaML value based on the ASME Section VIII will be overridden. RSFA (Remaining Strength Factor Allowable) - This value is defined as RSF = LDC / LUC Where: LDC = Limit or plastic collapse load of the damaged component LUC = Limit of plastic collapse load of the undamaged component. The default value as currently set in the API Recommended Practice 579 is 0.9

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Supplemental Loads
Specifies the parameters for supplemental loads.

Figure 7: Direction of Supplemental Loads

Axial Force, F - Enter the net-section axial force from supplemental loads excluding the pressure trust for the Sustained Case and Expansion Case, if any. Shear Force, V - Enter the net-section shear force from supplemental loads for the Sustained Case and Expansion Case, if any. Bending Moment, Mx - Enter the component of the net-section bending moment from supplemental loads in the X direction for the Sustained Case and Expansion Case, if any. Bending Moment, My - Enter the component of the net-section bending moment from supplemental loads in the Y direction for the Sustained Case and Expansion Case, if any. Torsional Moment, Mt - Enter the net-section torsion moment from supplemental loads in the Z direction for the Sustained Case and Expansion Case, if any. Joint Efficiency, Circumferential Seams - Enter the joint efficiency in the circumferential direction.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Shell Orientation - Select the orientation of installed vessel. This input will be used to get horizontal input data for the thickness calculation due to supplemental load. If you select Horizontal, more options display.

Figure 8: Shell Orientation Directions

Depth of Head - Enter the head depth of the horizontal vessel. Saddle Contact Angle - Enter the contact angle of the saddle with the shell. Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent - Enter the length from the tangent line of the horizontal vessel to the centerline of a saddle support. Maximum Saddle Reaction Force - Enter the saddle reaction force resulting from the weight of the vessel and vessel content. Flaw Location Along Vessel - Select from the option the nearest point where the flaw located.

Compute Remaining Life

Specifies that the software performs the remaining life calculation when the assessments have met the passing criteria.

Section 4 and 5
Corrosion Rate per year - Enter the corrosion rate per year in both directions, circumferential and longitudinal directions. These corrosion rates are also required for the localized pitting analyzed using Section 5.

Section 6 PPR Mode Settings

Pit Size - Activates the pit grow in Increasing In Pit Size mode. This mode will simulate the increase of the pit size, diameter and depth. This check box will enable the Diameter and Depth Pit Propagation Rate (PPR) boxes. Region Size - Activates the pit grow in Increasing In Pit Region Size mode. This mode will simulate the increase of the LTA size. This check box will enable the C dim and S dim fields.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Density - Activate the pit grow in Increasing In Pit Density mode. This mode will simulate the increase the pit density by decreasing the pit spacing. This check box will enable the Couple Spacing field.

Pit Propagation Rate per year

Diameter - Enter the diameter pit propagation rate. Depth - Enter the depth pit propagation rate. S dim - Enter the S dimension (longitudinal direction) pit propagation rate. C dim - Enter the C dimension (circumferential) pit propagation rate. Couple Spacing - Enter the pit couple spacing pit propagation rate.

RLife Computation Approach - Specifies how you want to compute the remaining life. You can select Thickness or MAWP. Print Intermediate RLife Results - Prints the table of the intermediate results of the RLife iterations. These intermediate results are printed in every 100 iterations.

Jacket Tab
Specifies parameters for jacket and closure bars. Select Jacket (fig. 9-2) - Select the jacket type that you are analyzing from the list. If you cannot decide the type that best suits your model, then select Type 2. If this is not appropriate, then the software gives you a warning message. The software calculates the required thickness of the jacket, closure bar, and the internal chamber (cylindrical / conical shell, or head covered by the jacket). The code gives weld sizes, which must be adhered to because they ensure full integrity of the jacket attachment to the vessel. ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix 9 sets out 5 basic jacket configurations. For more information, see Figure 9-2 in the Code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

In a type 3 jacket arrangement, there is no closure bar, however the welding is critical, and the notes set out in the Code must be adhered to. Typically, the jacket is attached by means of a closure bar as shown here:

Figure 9: Inner Vessel with Jacket and Closure Bar

The closure bar can be a simple rectangular section ring as displayed above, or it can be more elaborate as displayed in Appendix 9 of the Code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Verify the inner shell/head for external pressure using (any) vacuum plus the Jacket Pressure and consider the Design Length of the Jacket section L. Select Closure (fig. 9-5) - Select the closure bar type most resembling your design:

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

CodeCalc User's Guide

Closure Bar Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Thickness - Enter the thickness of the closure bar. Total Corr. Allow - Enter the corrosion allowance of the closure bar. if the closure is subject to corrosion both outside and inside, then enter the combined corrosion allowance.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

API 579 (FFS) Tab

Specifies damage and flaw description options for shells and heads.

Figure 11: Zones for Thickness Averaging

Damage Description
Flaw Type - Select the flaw type from the list. General Metal Loss Assess the flaw using API 579 Section 4 analysis Local Metal Loss Assess the flaw using API 579 Section 5 analysis. Pitting Corrosion Assess the flaw using API 579 Section 6 analysis. You must review the assessment applicability and limitation whenever the assessment changes.

Flaw Description
Flaw Location - Select the location of the flaw: Inside Located on the inner diameter surface. Outside Located on the outer diameter surface. Inside and Outside Located on both inner and outer diameter surfaces in Section 6 (Multiple Layer Analysis).

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads Section 4 and 5

Near Axisymmetric Discontinuity - Select the available option if the flaw is near the axisymmetric structural discontinuity such as seam weld, stiffening ring, or knuckle area of the head. Cylinder - Near stiffening ring or skirt weld seam or cone weld seam or circumferential weld seam. Cylinder provides the following options: None User specified Near a stiffening ring Skirt weld seam Cone weld seam Formed Head - Beyond the spherical portion or circumferential weld seam. Formed head provides the following options: None User specified Beyond the spherical portion Cone - Near the large end or the small end junction. Cone provides the following options: None User specified Near the large end or the small end junction

Figure 12: Zones for Thickness Averaging - Axisymmetric Discontinuity

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Distance of 1st Data Point from Discontinuity - Enter the nearest distance of the first data point along the longitudinal or meridional direction to the axisymmetric structural discontinuity. This value will be used to determine the location of each thickness profile data in reference to the axisymmetric structural discontinuity location. Refer to a dimension in the above sketch. Distance of Head Tangent from Skirt Weld Seam - Enter the distance of head tangent from skirt weld seam. Refer to b dimension in Figure E. For more information, see Near Axisymmetric Structural Discontinuity on the API 579 (FFS) Tab (on page 78). User Specified, Lv - Enter the user specified Zone Thickness Averaging length, Lv. The value that you enter will override the calculated value described in the API579. If you leave this box blank, the software interprets that as a zero value. Proximity to Cone End - Select the cone end nearest the discontinuity. Cone Diameter At That End - Specifies the cone diameter at the selected end.

Section 6
Widespread Pitting - Specifies that pitting occurs over a significant region of the component. Localized Pitting - Specifies that pitting occurs over a localized region of the component LTA in Region of Widespread Pitting - Specifies that a region of LTA is located in an area of widespread pitting. Pitting Confined in LTA - Specifies that pitting is confined within the LTA.

LTA Dimensions
Enter the s and c dimensions. These dimensions are required for the following pitting damage types: Localized pitting Region of LTA located in an area of widespread pitting Pitting confined within a region of localized metal loss

Figure 13: LTA Dimensions in Pitting Damage

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Long/Merid. Dir. (s) - Enter the total number of measurement points along the Longitudinal/Meridional Direction for Profile Thickness measurement method.

Figure 14: Longitudinal and Meridional Directions

Circ. Dir. (c) - Enter the total number of measurement points along the Circumferential Direction for Profile Thickness measurement method.

Data Measurement Tab

Uniform Metal Loss - Enter the metal loss prior to the assessment. LMSD - Enter the shortest distance from the edge of the local metal loss region under investigation to the nearest major structural discontinuity such as weld seam and stiffening ring. This parameter is used to check the limiting flaw size in Section 5 analysis. Measurement Type - Select the measurement type to use. You can select: Point - Specifies that the point thickness measurement method is used. Profile - Specifies that the profile thickness measurement method is used. Groove - Specifies that the groove measurement method is used. For more information, see Groove Options (on page 83). Pitting - Specifies that the software is analyzing pitting flaws. Profile Type - Select the profile thickness measurement data type, CTP (Critical Thickness Profile) or Grid type (raw data). This value sets the data entry table accordingly.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads Data Size

Circumfer. Dir. - Enter the total number of measurement points along the Circumferential Direction for Profile Thickness measurement method. Long./Merid. Dir. - Enter the total number of measurement points along the Longitudinal/Meridional Direction for Profile Thickness measurement method.

Figure 15: Longitudinal and Meridional Directions

Grid Size
Circumfer. Dir - Enter the grid size of the thickness profile in the circumferential direction. Long./Merid. Dir - Enter the grid size in the thickness profile in the longitudinal or meridional direction. Measurement Data - Displays a dialog box that specifies the parameters for measurement data. For more information, see the following: Point Measurement Data Dialog Box (on page 83) Enter CTPs Dialog Box (on page 83) Groove Options (on page 83) Enter Pitting Information Dialog Box (on page 84)

Optional Data
Overriding Values (MAWP, TMINL, TMINC, RFSA, etc.) - Select this check box to specify that the software uses the MAWP, TMINL, TMINC, SigmaML, SigmaMC, and RSFA override values. Supplemental Loads - Specifies that the software uses the supplemental loads values.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Compute Remaining Life - Specifies that the software performs the remaining life calculation when the assessments have met the passing criteria. Specifies parameters for profile measurements. Circumferential Planes - Type the distance between the planes. Longitudinal Planes - Type the distance between the planes.

Point Measurement Data Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for point measurements. Thk - Enter the measured thickness for each point.

Enter CTPs Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for critical thickness profiles. Longitudinal Plane CTP - Enter the critical thickness profile in the longitudinal direction. Circumferential Plane CTP - Enter the critical thickness profile in the circumferential direction.

Groove Options
Specifies the parameters for measuring grooves.

Figure 16: Groove Measurement Dimensions

Radius, gr - Enter the groove radius. Length, gl - Enter the groove length.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Depth, gd - Enter the groove depth. Width, gw - Enter the groove width. Orientation, Beta - Enter the groove orientation (Beta) in degrees. Critical Exposure Temperature - Enter the lowest metal temperature derived from either the operating or atmospheric conditions.

Enter Pitting Information Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for pitting.

Figure 17: Pitting Dimensions

P_k - Enter the pit-couple spacing in pit-couple k. Theta_k - Enter the pit-couple orientation in degree. d_ik - Enter the diameter of the pit i in pit-couple k. w_ik - Enter the depth of the pit i in pit-couple k. d_jk - Enter the diameter of the pit j in pit-couple k. w_jk - Enter the depth of the pit j in pit-couple k.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads

Results
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure
The appropriate formula from ASME Section VIII is referenced, and the formula and substitutions are shown. The diameter or crown radius is adjusted to take into account the corrosion allowance. If your shell design includes hydrostatic head components, the additional pressure due to the height of the liquid column and the operating liquid density will be included with the basic design pressure. The hydrostatic head will be subtracted in order to properly determine the MAWP for the vessel part that is being analyzed. Remember, when pressures are being read from the pressure gauge, the gauge is usually at the high point of the vessel. The pressure registered by the gauge would be different if were at the bottom of the liquid filled vessel. For elliptical heads, the K factor is (2 + Ar * Ar) / 6, per App. 1-4 (c). For torispherical heads, the factor M is (1/4) * (3 + SQRT (L / R)), where "L" (the crown radius) and "R" (the knuckle radius) were entered by the user. CodeCalc does not replace the given thickness with this calculated minimum. If you are choosing the thickness for a component, compare the values shown under "Summary of Internal Pressure Results" (required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up or down accordingly.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness

This value is calculated as described above, using the given thickness minus corrosion allowance and the operating allowable stress. The hydrostatic head component is subtracted from this value. The pressure gauge is assumed to be at the top of the vessel.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold

This value is calculated as described above, using the uncorroded thickness and the ambient allowable stress.

Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness

Note that the joint efficiency is included in this value, so this can be considered as the stress at the welded joint rather than in the base metal.

Summary of Internal Pressure Results

Either of two conditions can indicate a problem in your design. First, if the required thickness plus corrosion allowance is greater than the given thickness, then you must increase the given thickness. Second, if the MAWP is less than the design pressure, then you must either decrease the design pressure or increase the given thickness to achieve an acceptable design. The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure times 1.5 or 1.3 (depending on the material database selection) times the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature to the allowable stress at design temperature. The hydrotest pressure may not be appropriate for the entire vessel for three reasons. First, some other component may have a lower maximum allowable working pressure, which may govern the hydrotest pressure. Second, you may choose to base hydrotest pressure on design pressure rather than maximum allowable working pressure. Third, if the vessel is tested in the vertical position you may have to adjust the hydrotest pressure for the head of water in the vessel. For the UG99-C hydrotest, the liquid head is subtracted from the basic result.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shells and Heads Minimum Metal Temperatures

For carbon steels, these temperatures represent the minimum design metal temperature for the given thickness and, in the second case, the given pressure. The first temperature is interpolated directly from chart UCS-66. The second temperature is reduced if the actual stress is lower than the allowable stress, using figure UCS-66.1. The program also checks for materials, which qualify for the -20 minimum design temperature per UG-20 and prints it in the output. See the input notes above to enter normalized or non-normalized materials.

Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance

CodeCalc computes the volume and weight of the shell component. Additionally, the inside volume for a 2.00 inch straight flange is computed and used in the computation of the total volume for the head and the flange. The dimensions used in the volume and weight calculations are non-corroded dimensions.

Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure

For the given diameter, thickness, and length, the maximum allowable external pressure is computed per UG--28.

Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure

Required thickness results are calculated iteratively using the rules of UG-28. Items such as the length and outside diameter are held constant, and the software calculates the required thickness based on the entered value for external pressure.

Summary of External Pressure Results

Summary listing displaying external pressure results for the user-entered thickness and the calculated required thickness.

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 5

Nozzles

Home tab: Components > Add New Nozzle Calculates the required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs failure path calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. You can also orientate the nozzle in directions such as hillside, lateral, and radial.

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Nozzles)........................... 87 Nozzle Tab ..................................................................................... 88 Geometry Tab ................................................................................ 91 Miscellaneous Tab ......................................................................... 95 Shell/Head Tab .............................................................................. 101 Results ........................................................................................... 105

In This Section

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Nozzles)

Nozzles calculates the required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and optional reinforcing pad. The software also calculates the strength of failure paths for a nozzle. Nozzles is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, 2007 Edition. The calculation procedure is based on Figure UG-37.1. The software calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on inside or outside diameter for the following vessel components: Component Cylinder Elliptical Head Torispherical Head Conical Paragraph UG-27 (c) (1) UG-32 (d) (1) UG-32 (e) (1) UG-27 (g) Limitations Per UW-37 None Nozzle concentric within 0.8D Nozzle in spherical portion None None

Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3)

The software evaluates nozzles at any reasonable angle from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle, hillside, or tangential nozzles.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Nozzles account for the internal corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the software adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition. Nozzles also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.

Figure 18: Nozzle Dimensions

Nozzle Tab
Specifies design parameters for nozzles. Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the item. This entry is optional but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Design Internal Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure. This is a non-zero positive value and is usually obtained from the design drawings or vessel design specification. Required information such as the required thickness tr and trn are determined from the design internal pressure. Design Temperature for Internal Pressure - The software automatically updates material properties for built-in materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to update them for the given temperature. Design External Pressure - Enter the external design pressure. CodeCalc will compute the required thickness of the given geometry for the external pressure entered. If you are designing for a full vacuum, you would enter a value of 14.7 psig (or rounded off to 15 psig) or 1.0133 bars. CodeCalc will compute the required thickness for both external and internal pressure. It will the choose the greatest required thickness, tr, and proceed with the calculations. If external pressure governs, the program will automatically reduce the required area of reinforcement by 50 percent. Shell Design Length for External Pressure - Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one third the depth of the heads or, alternately, the distance between stiffening rings. For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent to tangent length plus the shell diameter / 6. For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/3. For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/9.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
When analyzing a conical head enter the length along the axis of the cone, from the small end to the point where the nozzle center line penetrates the cone. If any other head types are being analyzed, enter a 0 here and you must enter the required thickness of the component in the required field. Print Intermediate Calculations For External Pressure - Indicates that CodeCalc will print out the parameters used for external pressure design. Design Temperature for External Pressure - The CodeCalc software will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to update them for the given temperature. Maximum Allowable Pressure for New Cold - Some design specifications require that nozzle reinforcement calculations are performed for the maximum allowable pressure, new and cold condition, MAPnc. MAPnc for the nozzles is the minimum of the MAPs determined from analyzing the vessel elements using the Shell/Head part of the software. The software will then check to see if the nozzle is reinforced adequately using the user entered MAPnc. When the area of replacement calculations are made for this case, cold allowable stresses are used and the corrosion allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for this case helps the vessel to comply with UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your design requirements to see if this case is required by your client. Nozzle Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Include Hydrostatic Head Components - If your nozzle design needs to account for hydrostatic liquid head, select this box. CodeCalc adds the hydrostatic pressure head to the internal design pressure for the required thickness calculation. Operating Liquid Density - Enter the density of the operating fluid. This value is multiplied by the height of the liquid column in order to compute the static head pressure. You can enter a number of specific gravity units and CodeCalc converts the number to the current set of units. To do this, enter a number followed by the letters sg. Typical specific gravities and densities are shown below in lbs/ft^3. Convert the densities to your units. Name Ethane Propane N-butane Specific Gravity 0.3564 0.5077 0.5844 Density (lb/ft^3) 22.23 31.66 36.44

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Iso-butane N-Pentane Iso-Pentane N-hexane 2-methypentane 3-methylpentane 2,2-dimethylbutane 2,3-dimethylbutane N-heptane 2-methylheptane 3-methylheptane 2,2-dimethylpentane 2,4-dimethylpentane 1,1-dimethylcyclopentane N-octane Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Alcohol Ammonia Benzine Gasoline Kerosene Mineral Oil Petroleum Oil Water 0.5631 0.6310 0.6247 0.6640 0.6579 0.6689 0.6540 0.6664 0.6882 0.6830 0.6917 0.6782 0.6773 0.7592 0.7068 0.7504 0.7536 0.7834 0.7740 0.8844 0.8718 0.7900 0.8900 0.6900 0.7000 0.8000 0.9200 0.8200 1.0 35.11 39.35 38.96 41.41 41.03 41.71 40.78 41.56 42.92 42.59 43.13 42.29 42.24 47.34 44.08 46.79 46.99 48.85 48.27 55.15 54.37 49.26 55.50 43.03 43.65 49.89 57.37 51.14 62.4

Height of Liquid Column - Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest.

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles

Geometry Tab
Specifies nozzle geometry parameters. Nozzle Diameter Basis - Specifies the diameter basis. ID - Inside diameter OD - Outside diameter Nozzle Size Thickness Basis - Select the value from the list. Actual - Actual diameter and thickness. The software uses the actual diameter entered in the Nominal Diameter of Nozzle box and the actual thickness entered in the Actual Thickness of Nozzle (0 if Nominal) box. Nominal - Nominal diameter and thickness. The software looks up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the Nominal Diameter of Nozzle box, and looks up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the Nominal Schedule of Nozzle field. Minimum - Minimum diameter and thickness. The software looks up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the Nominal Diameter of Nozzle box, and looks up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the Nominal Schedule of Nozzle field. It will then multiply the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875. Nominal Diameter of Nozzle - Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size and thickness basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field. Valid nominal diameters are:

0.1250 - 1/8 " 0.2500 - 1/4 " 0.3750 - 3/8 " 0.5000 - 1/2 " 0.7500 - 3/4 " 1.0000 - 1 " 1.2500 - 1.25 " 1.5000 - 1.5 " 2.0000 - 2 " 2.5000 - 2.5 " 3.0000 - 3 " 3.5000 - 3.5 " 0.1250 - 1/8 " 0.2500 - 1/4 " 0.3750 - 3/8 " 0.5000 - 1/2 " 0.7500 - 3/4 " 1.0000 - 1 "

1.2500 - 1.25 " 1.5000 - 1.5 " 2.0000 - 2 " 2.5000 - 2.5 " 3.0000 - 3 " 3.5000 - 3.5 " 4.0000 - 4 " 5.0000 - 5 " 6.0000 - 6 " 8.0000 - 8 " 10.000 - 10 " 12.000 - 12 " 14.000 - 14 " 16.000 - 16 " 18.000 - 18 " 20.000 - 20 " 24.000 - 24 " 30.000 - 30 "

Nozzles

Miscellaneous Tab
Specifies miscellaneous nozzle parameters. Is the Nozzle Outside the 80% Diameter Limit? - If the nozzle is outside of the spherical portion of the elliptical or torispherical head, select this option. The software uses the standard internal pressure equation from UG-27 instead of the equation from UG-37. When a nozzle is within the 80% diameter limit, the required thickness of the head is equal to that of a seamless sphere of radius K1*D (D is the shell diameter and K1 is given by Table UG-37). Do you want to modify the reinforcement limit? - You can enter any physical limitation that exists on the thickness or the diameter available for reinforcement. An example of a thickness limitation is a studding pad or nozzle stub that does not extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation. An example of a diameter limitation is two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you did not want to take an available area reduction. Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit - Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a diameter limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you did not want to take an available area reduction. A hillside or Y- angle nozzle makes a non-circular hole in the vessel. So, the diameter limit in the longitudinal and the circumferential planes is different. For this type of nozzle, enter the smaller diameter limit. Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit - Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation. Neglect Areas - Frequently in the analysis of openings in heads or shells, you do not want to account for the area in the shell and sometimes in the nozzle. If this is what your design specification calls out for then enter one of the following in this field. A1 - No area available in the shell or head A2 - No area available in the nozzle wall A1 A2 - No area available in the shell or nozzle wall If the input has A2 there will be no area contributed by the nozzle wall for either the pad case (A2WP) or the case when there is no pad (A2NP). ASME Large Nozzle Calc. Option - Select the large nozzle calculation option from the list. Do you want to rate the attached flange? - Specifies that the software asks you the class and grade of the attached flange. The software will used these two items along with the temperature to rate the flange using the tables in ANSI B16.5. Class for Attached B16.5 Flange - The attached flange often limits the MAWP of a pressure vessel. If your geometry has an attached flange, select the class from the list. The following flange classes are available: CL 150 - Class 150 CL 300 - Class 300 CL 400 - Class 400 CL 600 - Class 600 CL 900 - Class 900 CL 1500 - Class 1500

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
CL 2500 - Class 2500

Grade of Attached B16.5 Flange - Select the nozzle flange material grade (group). Please note that there are certain advisories on the use of certain material grades. Please review those cautionary notes in the ANSI B16.5 code. The following flange grades are available:

Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-2003)

Material Nominal Designation Group 1.1 C-Si C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 3 Ni C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 2Ni 3Ni C-Si C-Mn-Si C-Mo 2 Ni 3 Ni C-Si C-Mn-Si C-1/2Mo C-Mo Ni-Cr-Mo Ni-Cr-1Mo 1Cr-Mo 1Cr-Mo-Si 2Cr-1Mo Cr-Mo 5Cr-Mo 9Cr-1Mo 9Cr-1Mo-V 1Cr-Mo 5Cr-Mo 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F5a A 182 Gr. F9 A 182 Gr. F91 A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F5 A 182 Gr. F304 A 351 Gr. CF3 A 240 Gr. 304 A 217 Gr. C5 A 217 Gr. C12 A 217 Gr. C12A A 387 Gr. 91 Cl.2 A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 182 Gr. F1 A 182 Gr. F2 Forgings A 105 A 350 Gr. LF2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 350 Gr. LF3 Castings A 216 Gr. WCB Plates A 515 Gr. 70 A 516 Gr. 70 A 537 Cl. 1

1.2

A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2

A 216 Gr. WCC A 352 Gr. LCC A 352 Gr. LC2 A 352 Gr. LC3

A 203 Gr. B A 203 Gr. E A 515 Gr. 65 A 516 Gr. 65 A 203 Gr. A A 203 Gr. D A 515 Gr. 60 A 516 Gr. 60 A 204 Gr. A A 204 Gr. B

1.3

A 352 Gr. LCB A 217 Gr. WC1 A 352 Gr. LC1

1.4 1.5 1.7 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.17 2.1

A 217 Gr. WC4 A 217 Gr. WC5 A 217 Gr. WC6 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2 A 204 Gr. C

A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Material Nominal Designation Group Forgings A 182 Gr. F304H 2.2 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 19Cr-10Ni-3Mo 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F316 A 182 Gr. F316H A 182 Gr. F317 A 182 Gr. F304L A 182 Gr. F316L A 182 Gr. F321 A 182 Gr. F321H A 182 Gr. F347 A 182 Gr. F347H A 182 Gr. F348 A 182 Gr. F348H A 182 Gr. F310 A 351 Gr. CK3McuN A 351 Gr. CE8MN A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN Castings A 351 Gr. CF8 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 351 Gr. CF8M A 351 Gr. CG8M Plates A 240 Gr. 304H A 240 Gr. 316 A 240 Gr. 316H A 240 Gr. 317 A 240 Gr. 304L A 240 Gr. 316L A 240 Gr. 321 A 240 Gr. 321H A 240 Gr. 347 A 240 Gr. 347H A 240 Gr. 348 A 240 Gr. 348H A 240 Gr. 309H A 240 Gr. 310H A 240 Gr. S31254 A 240 Gr. S31803 A 240 Gr. S32750 A 240 Gr. S32760 A 240 Gr. 309S A 240 Gr. 310S A 351 Gr. CH8 A 351 Gr. CH20 A 351 Gr. CF8C A 351 Gr. CK20 B 462 Gr. N08020 B 160 Gr. N02200 B 160 Gr. N02201 B 564 Gr. N04400 B 164 Gr. N04405 B 564 Gr. N06600 B 564 Gr. N08800 B 463 Gr. N08020 B 162 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02201 B 127 Gr. N04400 B 168 Gr. N06600 B 409 Gr. N08800 B 333 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10675

2.3 2.4 2.5

2.6 2.7

23Cr-12Ni 25Cr-20Ni

2.8

20Cr-18Ni-6Mo A 182 Gr. F44 22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N A 182 Gr. F51 25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N A 182 Gr. F53 24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V 25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W 23Cr-12Ni 25Cr-20Ni 25Cr-12Ni 18Cr-10Ni-Cb 25Cr-20Ni 35Ni-35Fe-10Cr-Cb 99.0Ni 99.0Ni-Low C 67Ni-30Cu 67Ni-30Cu-S 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr

2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 462 Gr. N10665 64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-M B 462 Gr. N10675 n-W

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Material Nominal Designation Group 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr 60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb 62Ni-28Mo-5Fe 70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe 61Ni-16Mo-16Cr 42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu 55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo 55Ni-23Cr-16Mo-1.6Cu 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe 25Ni-46Fe-21Cr-5Mo 44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo Forgings B 564 Gr. N10276 B 564 Gr. N06625 B 335 Gr. N10001 B 573 Gr. N10003 B 574 Gr. N06455 B 564 Gr. N08825 B 462 Gr. N06022 B 462 Gr. N06200 B 572 Gr. N06002 B 672 Gr. N08700 B 649 Gr. N08904 Castings Plates B 575 Gr. N10276 B 443 Gr. N06625 B 333 Gr. N10001 B 434 Gr. N10003 B 575 Gr. N06455 B 424 Gr. N08825 B 575 Gr. N06022 B 575 Gr. N06200 B 435 Gr. N06002 B 599 Gr. N08700 B 625 Gr. N08904 B 620 Gr. N08320 B 582 Gr. N06985 B 688 Gr. N08367 B 582 Gr. N06975 B 625 Gr. N08031 B 582 Gr. N06007 B 582 Gr. N06030 B 409 Gr. N08810 B 536 Gr. N08330 A 351 Gr. CN7M

3.8

3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12

26Ni-43Fe-22Cr-5Mo B 621 Gr. N08320 47Ni-22Cr-20Fe-7Mo B 581 Gr. N06985 46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu B 462 Gr. N08367 -N 49Ni-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C 47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo 40Ni-29Cr-15Fe-5Mo 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr 35Ni-19Cr-1Si 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5M o B 581 Gr. N06975 B 462 Gr. N08031 B 581 Gr. N06007 B 462 Gr. N06030 B 564 Gr. N08810 B 511 Gr. N08330

A 351 Gr. CN3MN

3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17

Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-1996)

Material Nominal Designation Group 1.1 C-Si C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 21/2Ni 31/2Ni C-Si C-Mn-Si 21/2Ni 31/2Ni Forgings A 105 A 350 Gr. LF2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 A 350 Gr. LF3 Castings A 216 Gr. WCB A 216 Gr. WCC A 352 Gr. LCC A 352 Gr. LC2 A 352 Gr. LC3 A 352 Gr. LCB Plates A 515 Gr. 70 A 516 Gr. 70 A 537 Cl. 1 A 203 Gr. B A 203 Gr. E A 515 Gr. 65 A 516 Gr. 65 A 203 Gr. A A 203 Gr. D

1.2

1.3

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Material Nominal Designation Group 1.4 1.5 C-Si C-Mn-Si C-1/2Mo C-1/2Mo 1/2Cr-1/2Mo Ni-1/2Cr-1/2Mo 3/4Ni-3/4Cr-1Mo 1Cr-1/2Mo 11/4Cr-1/2Mo 11/4Cr-1/2Mo-Si 21/4Cr-1Mo 5Cr-1/2Mo 9Cr-1Mo 9Cr-1Mo-V 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 19Cr-10Ni-3Mo 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 18Cr-10Ni-Cb Forgings A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 182 Gr. F1 A 217 Gr. WC1 A 352 Gr. LC1 A 217 Gr. WC4 A 217 Gr. WC5 Castings Plates A 515 Gr. 60 A 516 Gr. 60 A 204 Gr. A A 204 Gr. B A 204 Gr. C

1.7

A 182 Gr. F2

1.9 1.10 1.13 1.14 1.15 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5

A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 182 Gr. F5 A 182 Gr. F5a A 182 Gr. F9 A 182 Gr. F91 A 182 Gr. F304 A 182 Gr. F304H A 182 Gr. F316 A 182 Gr. F316H A 182 Gr. F304L A 182 Gr. F316L A 182 Gr. F321 A 182 Gr. F321H A 182 Gr. F347 A 182 Gr. F347H A 182 Gr. F348 A 182 Gr. F348H

A 217 Gr. WC6 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 217 Gr. C5 A 217 Gr. C12 A 217 Gr. C12A A 351 Gr. CF3 A 351 Gr. CF8 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 351 Gr. CF8M A 351 Gr. CG8M

A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2

A 387 Gr. 91 Cl.2 A 240 Gr. 304 A 240 Gr. 304H A 240 Gr. 316 A 240 Gr. 316H A 240 Gr. 317 A 240 Gr. 304L A 240 Gr. 316L A 240 Gr. 321 A 240 Gr. 321H

A 351 Gr. CF8C

A 240 Gr. 347 A 240 Gr. 347H A 240 Gr. 348 A 240 Gr. 348H A 240 Gr. 309S A 240 Gr. 309H A 240 Gr. 310S A 240 Gr. 310H A 240 Gr. S31254 A 240 Gr. S31803 A 240 Gr. S32750 A 240 Gr. S32760

2.6 2.7

25Cr-12Ni 23Cr-12Ni 25Cr-20Ni 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N 25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N 24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V 25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb A 182 Gr. F310 A 182 Gr. F44 A 182 Gr. F51 A 182 Gr. F53 A 182 Gr. F55

A 351 Gr. CH8 A 351 Gr. CH20 A 351 Gr. CK20 A 351 Gr. CK3McuN A 351 Gr. CE8MN A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN

2.8

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Material Nominal Designation Group 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-CuW 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb 99.0Ni 99.0Ni-Low C 67Ni-30Cu 67Ni-30Cu-S 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr 65Ni-28Mo-2Fe 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr 60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb 62Ni-28Mo-5Fe 70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe 61Ni-16Mo-16Cr 42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3C u B 462 Gr. N08020 B 160 Gr. N02200 B 160 Gr. N02201 B 564 Gr. N04400 B 164 Gr. N04405 B 564 Gr. N06600 B 564 Gr. N08800 B 335 Gr. N10665 B 564 Gr. N10276 B 564 Gr. N06625 B 335 Gr. N10001 B 573 Gr. N10003 B 574 Gr. N06455 B 564 Gr. N08825 B 463 Gr. N08020 B 162 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02201 B 127 Gr. N04400 B 168 Gr. N06600 B 409 Gr. N08800 B 333 Gr. N10665 B 575 Gr. N10276 B 443 Gr. N06625 B 333 Gr. N10001 B 434 Gr. N10003 B 575 Gr. N06455 B 424 Gr. N08825 Forgings Castings Plates

ASME Code Weld Type - Select the type of weld connecting the nozzle to the shell or head. The type of weld can optionally be entered in this field. If it is a type A, B, C, D, E, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, G, X-1, Y-1, OR Z-1 weld, then CodeCalc will not perform the weld strength calculations. The code exempts these calculations per paragraph UW-15 when one of the above weld classifications such as A is used. If it is a type I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, then CodeCalc will perform the additional weld size calculations per UW-16(d)(1). Select None if you want the software to perform the weld strength calculations regardless of the type of welded geometry. Is this a manway or access/inspection opening? - UG 45 states that if the opening is a manway or access opening, the minimum thickness requirement per UG-45 is not required. Checking this box will cause the software to bypass the UG-45 minimum nozzle neck thickness requirement. Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles? - Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement calculations when small nozzles are involved. The code states: Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions : 3.5" finished opening in a shell or head with minimum required thk. of .375 inches or less 2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than minimum required thk. of .375 inches If your geometry meets this criteria and this checkbox is NOT checked, then no area of reinforcement calculations will be performed on this nozzle item.

100

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Is this compressed air, water, or steam service? - Select if the vessel s under compressed air, steam, or water service. This causes the software to use a value of 3/32 instead of the 1/16 inch default per UG 16(b). By default for UG45 the program uses the value of 1/16 of an inch for minimum thickness considerations. Is this welded pipe? - If the pipe is not seamless, then check this box. Note that this value is only used for documentation purposes and is not used for any computations. Do not skip iterative failure thickness calcs.? - If this box is checked then the software iteratively computes the maximum corrosion allowance and minimum wall thickness at which the failure occurs. ASME Large Nozzle Calculation Option - Select the large nozzle calculation option from the list.

Shell/Head Tab
Specifies parameters for shells and heads. Shell/Head Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Type of Shell - Select the type of shell for this shell section. The thickness of an elliptical head is analyzed as an equivalent spherical head, as specified in the Code, paragraph UG-37 (a). Similarly, the thickness of the spherical portion of a torispherical head is analyzed using the same paragraph. You must enter the required thickness (below) under the following circumstances: Bolted Flat Heads - Calculate the required thickness using the FLANGE module and enter it in. Additionally, the software automatically reduces the required area of reinforcement if you specify a flat head per UG-39(b)(1). Any other geometry not covered by the program. Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads - Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0. Inside Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads - Enter the crown radius for torispherical heads. The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as the dimension "L", in the ASME VIII Div. 1 Code. This dimension is usually referred to as "DR" in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being "OD" heads, the crown radius is given on the inside diameter basis. See the illustration in the catalog and where the arrows for "DR" and "IKR" point to (the inside of the head). For more information, see Appendix 1-4 in the Code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

101

Nozzles
Inside Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads - Enter the knuckle radius r for torispherical heads, according to ASME Section VIII Div. 1. This dimension is usually referred to as IKR in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being OD heads, the knuckle radius is given on the inside diameter basis. See the illustration in the catalog and where the arrows for DR and IKR point to (the inside of the head). For more information, see Appendix 1-4 in the Code. Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections - Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half apex angle for cones under internal pressure and without toriconical transitions or discontinuity stress check is 30 degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections or discontinuity stress check is 60 degrees. Typically the largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning. In that case the user is encouraged to use the CONICAL module for a more detailed analysis. Attachment Factor for Flat Head - Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors display below, however consult Paragraph UG-34 before using these values: 0.17 (b-1) 0.20 (b-2) 0.20 (c) 0.13 (d) 0.20 (e f g) 0.33 (h) 0.20 (I) 0.30 (j k) Head welded to vessel with generous radius Head welded to vessel with small radius Lap welded or brazed construction Integral flat circular heads Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m) Plate welded to end of shell Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment). To compute the required thickness of the bolted flat heads (type j and k), use the Flange module and model it as a blind flange. Bolted flat head with full face gasket Plate screwed into small diameter vessel Plate held in place by beveled edge

0.30 (m n o) Plate held in place by screwed ring 0.25 (p) 0.75 (q) 0.33 (r s)

102

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
Is this a Lateral Nozzle (Y-angle)? - Y-angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections, by turning on this option. In this case, only the vessel-nozzle centerline angle needs to be specified. The following figure shows an example.

Figure 20: Vessel-Nozzle Angle

For users of versions prior to 6.40, the input specification for non radial and non hillside nozzles has changed. The current requirement is the angle between the centerline of the nozzle and the centerline of the vessel. Is this a Radial Nozzle? - Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and nozzle centerlines, and the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle can vary from 0 to a limiting value depending upon specific geometry. The following figure illustrates these dimensions. In this case the input for the offset dimension and vessel-nozzle centerline angle are optional, only required for the graphic and not for the analysis.

Figure 21: Radial Nozzle Angle

Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area requirements in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases CodeCalc automatically checks the area requirements in both the planes, using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle opening. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be applied in the

CodeCalc User's Guide

103

Nozzles
hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one half of the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and conical sections.

Figure 22: Hillside Nozzle Angle

Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1) - Enter the offset between the nozzle and the center of the shell. Angle Between Nozzle and Shell Centerlines - Enter the angle between the nozzle and shell. Shell Diameter Basis - Select ID for shell sections based on the inside diameter. Select OD for shell sections based on the outside diameter. Normally, for a flanged & dished torispherical head, the inside crown or radius is equal to the vessel outside diameter. For flat heads, this value is ignored. Refer to Fig. UG-34 for equivalent diameter of the head. For example, in case of most welded heads this is the diameter over which the pressure acts. For bolted heads with narrow faced gasket this is the diameter of the gasket reaction. For cones, the program expects the diameter of the cone at the point where the nozzle intersects the shell. Diameter of Shell/Head (not crown radius) - Enter the diameter of the shell or head. Torispherical heads - Diameter of the shell to which the head is attached. Flat heads - Refer to Fig. UG-34 for equivalent diameter of the head. For example, in case of most welded heads this is the diameter over which the pressure acts. Bolted heads with narrow faced gasket - Diameter of the gasket reaction. Cones- Diameter of the cone at the point where the nozzle intersects the shell. Actual Thickness of Shell - Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the shell, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a minimum specified wall thickness which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should enter the minimum thickness. Shell Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter. Enter Required Thicknesses? - The only time the required thickness must be entered is if the component being analyzed is a bolted flat head. Otherwise, the required thickness of the shell/head will be computed by the program. For hillside nozzles, as of Version 5.40, several changes have been made relating to the use of the required thickness. They are as follows: If you want to enter an offset and allow CodeCalc to compute the nozzle angle, the required thickness must be left blank. If an angle less than 90 has been entered, or computed via the entered offset values, and you would like to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required thickness must be entered in and multiplied by the F factor.

104

CodeCalc User's Guide

Nozzles
If an angle less than 90 has been entered and you do not want to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required thickness should be entered. Required Shell Thickness for Int. P - Specifies the required shell thickness for internal pressure. Required Shell Thickness for Ext. P - Specifies the required shell thickness for external pressure. Required Shell Thickness for Hydro - Specifies the required shell thickness for hydro.

Results
Topics
Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness ................................................ 105 Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle ....................................... 105 UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness ...................................... 106 Required and Available Areas ....................................................... 106 Selection of Reinforcing Pad ......................................................... 106 Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations ............................................. 106 Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits ......................... 106 Minimum Design Metal Temperature ............................................ 107 Weld Size Calculations .................................................................. 107 Weld Strength Calculations ........................................................... 107 Failure Path Calculations ............................................................... 107 Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area, And UG-45 ......................... 107

Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness

If you specified an actual basis for nozzle diameter and thickness, the diameter and thickness shown will be the same as those which you entered. If you specified nominal, these values will be the nominal diameter and thickness found in the software pipe size tables. If you entered minimum, the software will have looked up the diameter and thickness in the pipe size tables and then multiplied the thickness by 0.875.

Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle

The software calculates the required thickness for the shell and nozzle as follows: Cylindrical (and the nozzle wall) Hemisphere Torispherical Elliptical Conical Flat Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user. Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user. Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user. Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user. Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user. Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.

The joint efficiency used in this calculation is always 1.0. In 1989 we submitted a request for interpretation to the ASME Code in order to show that the use of 1.0 under all circumstances

CodeCalc User's Guide

105

Nozzles
was justified. The reply was published in the A-90 Addenda as Interpretation VIII-1-89-171. The question and reply were as follows: Question: In reinforcement calculations, is the joint efficiency used in calculating the required thickness of the vessel wall tr and the required thickness of the wall trn 1.0 regardless of the joint efficiency determined for the vessel wall and nozzle wall from the rules in UW-12, provided the nozzle does not pass through a weld? Reply: Yes. Note also that the program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.

UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness

The software uses the design rules from paragraph UG-45 for minimum nozzle neck thickness. If the thickness used by CodeCalc for your nozzle calculation is less than required by UG-45, your Code Vessel is in violation of this paragraph.

Required and Available Areas

The area required is calculated per UG-37(c). For all vessel types under external pressure and for flat heads, this value is multiplied by 0.5. The required areas are calculated per Fig. UG-37.1. The software uses dl - d, (Diameter limit minus inside hole radius) in the calculations for the area available in the shell. This is because the code incorrectly assumes that dl-d is always equal to d, which is only true when the natural diameter limit is used. Because you can enter a reduced diameter limit, the software does not use the pure code equation.

Selection of Reinforcing Pad

The program gives up to three possible reinforcing pad selections. Pad thickness based on the given pad diameter. Pad diameter based on the given pad thickness. Thickness based on the thinner of the shell and nozzle walls, calculating a required diameter. If this exceeds the diameter limit, the software selects a thickness based on a pad at the diameter limit. All thickness results are rounded up to the nearest sixteenth, while all diameter results are rounded up to the nearest eighth of an inch.

Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations

For large diameter nozzles, the rules of Appendix 1-7 require that two-thirds of the reinforcement be within 0.75 of the natural diameter limit for the nozzle. If the calculated value of the percent within this limit is greater than 66%, the nozzle is adequately reinforced for the large diameter rules. For a large nozzle geometry to meet Code requirements both sets of area calculations must meet their respective area requirements.

Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits

The MAWP for reinforcement is an estimate, typically accurate to within 1 or 2 psi. Enter the given MAWP as the design pressure to check its accuracy. The MAP for the flange is based on ANSI B16.5 tables for the given grade and class of flange.

SECTION 6

Internal Pressure Results

The first section of results shows the required thicknesses and Maximum Allowable Working Pressures for the cone and for the upper and lower cylinders under internal pressure. Note that this section is shown even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum Allowable Working Pressures will be meaningful. The software summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allowances as necessary.

External Pressure Results

The External Pressure module calculates materials properties and required thicknesses under external pressure. Because the software uses Young's modulus values in both the internal and external reinforcement calculation, this module is called even when the external design pressure is zero. However, in this case the required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure calculations for external pressure are skipped. The required thickness under external pressure is calculated using the interactive method outlined in Paragraph UG-33 of the ASME Code. The effective length for toriconical sections is adjusted to include a fraction of the knuckle in the design length.

CodeCalc User's Guide

115

Conical Sections

Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure

The software calculates the required reinforcement for cone/cylinder junctions at both the large and the small ends. This calculation is performed whenever the internal pressure is greater than zero, and the reinforcing material is defined. If a knuckle is specified instead of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle calculation will be performed and the required area calculation will not. When a knuckle calculation is performed, the software calculates both the required thickness and the maximum allowable working pressure for the toroidal portion of the knuckle, using the rules in Appendix 1-4(d). When there is no knuckle, the software calculates the required area of reinforcement at the intersection of the cylinder and the two cones. Cones are required to have reinforcement at the large and small ends under internal pressure (Appendix 1-5) because of the tendency of the cone/cylinder junction to buckle under the radial load developed in the cone. The Code calculates the maximum angle below which buckling will not occur as a function of the design pressure and allowable stress. This ratio is used because it is a pretty good indication of the diameter thickness ratio for the cylinder, and takes into account the strength of the material. This approach has the odd effect that when you increase the allowable stress you decrease the allowable cone angle. However, you will normally find that for a given thickness this effect is offset by the increase of area available in the cone for reinforcement. Given that reinforcement is required, the area required is a function of the pressure and the square of the radius. Area available in the shell within one decay length may be included in the area available for stiffening. CodeCalc will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the allowed apex angle is higher than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is greater than the area required.

Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure

The software calculates the required reinforcement and moment of inertia for the cone/cylinder junctions at both the large and the small ends. This calculation is performed whenever the external pressure is greater than zero, the cone is taken as a line of support and the reinforcing material is defined. If a knuckle is specified instead of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle calculation will be performed and the area of reinforcement calculation will not. If the user specifies that the cone/cylinder junctions are not to be taken as a line of support, then the area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations will not be performed. Cones are required to have reinforcement at the large and small ends under external pressure (Appendix 1-7) because of the tendency to buckle under axial external loads. At both the large and small ends there are requirements for the area of reinforcement and moment of inertia of the reinforcement. The area of reinforcement is based on considerations similar to those described for internal pressure. The required moment of inertia of the reinforcement is a function of the strain in the ring at the cone/shell junction, which is in turn calculated using the Code materials chart from the stress in the ring. See the comments on stiffening rings in the external pressure section for further insight. The maximum apex angle is taken from Tables 1-8.1 in Appendix 1 of the ASME Code. The software calculates the ratio P/SE. Note that this angle applies only to the large end of the cone - the small end always requires at least a little reinforcement. The area required in the reinforcing ring will be set to zero if either the cone angle is less than the maximum angle (large end only), or the area of reinforcement available in the shell is greater than the area required.

116

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 7

Floating Heads
Home tab: Components > Add New Floating Head Calculates the required thickness of spherically dished covers (bolted heads) according to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 analysis rules found in Appendix 1, Paragraph 1-6. A more detailed analysis of bolted dished heads is included, based on Soehren's analysis, The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-Exchangers, ASME 57-A-7-47. The more detailed analysis may be used for the design of floating heads, as specifically mentioned in the ASME Code, Paragraph 1-6 (h). The software calculates required thickness for the dished part of the head under both internal and external pressure. Also calculated are the required thickness of the flange and the backing ring. Three types of heads, as defined in the code and shown below, are included. Soehren's analysis applies only to the most common type of head, type d.

Figure 24: Floating Head Types

Floating Heads
1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Inside Crown Radius of Head - Enter the inside crown radius of the head. This value may be any dimension greater than the inside radius of the flange. However, values roughly equal to the flange ID are more typical. Actual Thickness of Head - Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate used to build the floating head or spherical cap, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing floating head or spherical cap. Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance on the concave side of the head. The shell side and tube side corrosion allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses and diameters are adjusted by the software for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They are also added to the required thicknesses. Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance on the convex side of the head. The shellside and tubeside corrosion allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses and diameters are adjusted by the software for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They are also added to the required thicknesses.

Flange/Bolts Tab
Flange Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

123

Floating Heads
Gasket Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. Gasket Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. Gasket Factor m - The values of m and y shown in the following table are listed in ASME Section VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y, please contact your gasket manufacturer.
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Facing Column II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II Gasket Material

Self energizing types (O rings, elastomer, other gasket types considered as self-sealing) Elastomers without fabric or high percent of mineral fiber Below 75A Shore Durometer 75A Shore Durometer or higher Mineral fiber with suitable binder for operating conditions 1/8 inch thick 1/16 inch thick 1/32 inch thick Elastomer with cotton fabric insertion Elastomer with mineral fiber fabric insertion (with or without wire reinforcment) 3 ply 2 ply 1 ply Vegetable Fiber Spiral-wound metal, mineral fiber filled Carbon Steel Stainless Steel, Monel, and nickel-base alloys Corrugated metal, mineral fiber inserted or Corrugated metal, jacketed, mineral fiber filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless - steels and nickel-base alloys Corrugated metal, not filled Soft aluminum

0.00

0.50 1.00

0 200 (1.4)

2.00 2.75 3.50 1.25

1600 (11) 3700 (26) 6500 (45) 400 (2.8)

2.25 2.50 2.75 1.75

2200 (15) 2900 (20) 3700 (26) 1100 (7.6)

2.50 3.00

10000 (69) 10000 (69)

2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50

2900 (20) 3700 (26) 4500 (31) 5500 (38) 6500 (45)

2.75

3700 (26)

124

CodeCalc User's Guide

Floating Heads
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Gasket Material

Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steel Flat metal, jacketed, mineral fiber filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Ring Joint Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steel

3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75

4500 (31) 5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52)

II II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 8000 (55) 9000 (62) 9000 (62)

II II II II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 9000 (62) 10100 (70)

II II II II II

4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50

8800 (61) 13000 (90) 18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I I I

5.50 6.00 6.50

18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I

Gasket Design Seating Stress y - Enter the gasket design seating stress Y.

Flange Face Facing Sketch - Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME Code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations: FACING SKETCH 1a 1b 1c DESCRIPTION flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish

CodeCalc User's Guide

Facing Column

125

Floating Heads
1d 2 3 4 5 6 raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket

Column for Gasket Seating (I, II) - Enter the gasket column for gasket seating. Gasket Thickness - Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d. Nubbin Width - If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. For sketch 9, however, this is not a nubbin width. Instead, it is the contact width of the metallic ring. Length - Enter the length of the partition gasket. Width - Enter the width of the partition gasket. Gasket Factor m - The values of m and y shown in the following table are listed in ASME Section VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y, please contact your gasket manufacturer.
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Facing Column II II II II II II II II II II II II Gasket Material

0.00

0.50 1.00

0 200 (1.4)

2.00 2.75 3.50 1.25

1600 (11) 3700 (26) 6500 (45) 400 (2.8)

2.25 2.50 2.75 1.75

2200 (15) 2900 (20) 3700 (26) 1100 (7.6)

2.50

10000 (69)

126

CodeCalc User's Guide

Floating Heads
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Gasket Material

Stainless Steel, Monel, and nickel-base alloys Corrugated metal, mineral fiber inserted or Corrugated metal, jacketed, mineral fiber filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless - steels and nickel-base alloys Corrugated metal, not filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steel Flat metal, jacketed, mineral fiber filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Ring Joint

Facing Column

127

Floating Heads
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Gasket Material

Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steel

5.50 6.00 6.50

18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I

Flange Face Facing Sketch - Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME Code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations: FACING SKETCH 1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6 DESCRIPTION flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket

Column for Partition Gasket Seating - Enter the gasket column for gasket seating.

Gasket Thickness - Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d. Nubbin Width - If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. For sketch 9, however, this is not a nubbin width. Instead, it is the contact width of the metallic ring.

Miscellaneous Tab
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline, hr - Enter the distance from the flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and the flange. This distance is known as the hr dimension and should be entered in the corroded condition. The hr dimension is positive if it is above the flange centroid and is negative if it is below the flange centroid. If the Distance from Flange Top to Flange/Head Intersection is known, you can enter it in the un-corroded condition and click Compute. The software will calculate the hr dimension in corroded condition and place its value in the input.

128

131

Floating Heads
If a flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits), using 0.75 times the design moment. The software automatically considers this. The flange thickness in the input, as well as the required value, is the thickness of the quarter piece. As a result, the thickness of the total ring is twice this value. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90-degrees from the splits of the other. The following illustration shows a flange with two splits:

Figure 29: Flange Thickness

TEMA RCB-5.141 shows different styles of backing devices, though the Styles A and D have a split ring, but the moment used to design them is not increased. When you have one of these styles, set the number of splits to 0 in CodeCalc to get the same effect. Mating Flange Loads - Check this box if loads from the mating flange are to be considered. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if it is greater than the standard bolt loads computed using the ASME formulas. Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating - Specify the alternate operating bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is greater than the operating bolt load computed by the software. Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating - Specify the alternate seating flange bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is greater than the seating bolt load computed by the software. Mating Design Bolt Load - Specify the alternate flange design bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the software.

Results
Topics
Internal Pressure Results for the Head: ........................................ 133 External Pressure Results for Heads: ........................................... 133 Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head ................. 133 Required Thickness Calculations .................................................. 133 Soehren's Calculations: ................................................................. 134

132

CodeCalc User's Guide

Floating Heads

Internal Pressure Results for the Head:

The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the head under internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads: t=5PL/6S The software solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working pressure, and actual stress, and displays the results. These results are also displayed in the thickness summary at the end of the printout.

External Pressure Results for Heads:

The required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each head type is based on the external pressure requirements for an equivalent sphere.

Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head

Three separate bending moments are calculated for each head: The bolt up moment The moment due to external pressure The moment due to internal pressure In each case, the moment is calculated per the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2. However, in the case of the type d head the moment is further modified to take into account the force imposed on the flange by the pressure on the head. This force is shown in the printout as MH. The sign of this force will be negative if the head is attached above the centroid of the flange, and positive if the head is attached below the centroid.

Required Thickness Calculations

The required thickness formula for each flange type and loading condition are printed by the software. These formulas are taken from Appendix 1-6, paragraphs (e)(2) and (3), (f)(2) through (5) and (g)(2). The required thickness calculations for the backing ring are also shown. The backing ring is taken as a ring flange and calculated per Appendix 2. The analysis is corrected for the number of splits in the backing ring, and shows the required thickness for each piece of the split ring. The thickness calculations for the main flange and backing ring involve the factor F that is directly proportional to the design pressure. Thus when the pressure is 0 for the bolt-up condition, the factor F is theoretically equal to 0. Some however interpret the Code to mean that F should be computed using the design pressure even for the bolt-up cases. There is a setup file directive that allows you to toggle this to work one way or the other. To keep the software results consistent with older versions, this setup file parameter is set to compute F with 0 pressure for the bolt-up conditions. After the required thicknesses are calculated, a summary table is printed.

CodeCalc User's Guide

133

Floating Heads

Soehren's Calculations:
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states: These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between the flange ring and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis, which takes this into account may be used if it meets the requirements of U-2. The analysis referred to in this paragraph is Soehren's calculation, based on the paper The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-Exchangers, ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate results and calculated stresses are shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not shown in the printout, but bending stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress, while membrane stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.

134

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 8

Flanges

Home tab: Components > Add New Flange Calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The software uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the 2010 Edition.

In This Section

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Flanges)........................... 135 Flange Data Tab ............................................................................ 138 Hub/Bolts Tab ................................................................................ 142 Gasket Data Tab ............................................................................ 144 Results (Flanges) ........................................................................... 148

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Flanges)

The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by Waters, Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by Taylor Forge in 1937, and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical purposes they have been unchanged since that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently republished, is also still available, and is one of the most useful tools for flange analysis. The input and results for the FLANGE software are roughly modeled on the Taylor Forge flange design sheets. The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the flange and hub) and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compresses the gasket. This load needs to be high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be high enough to seal even when pressure is applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt load and unloads the gasket. Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps: 1. Identify operating conditions and materials. Determine the allowable stresses for the flange material and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the Code tables of allowable stress. 2. Identify the gasket material and the flange facing type. Determine the effective width, the effective diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts (Tables 2-5.1 and 2-5.2). 3. Calculate the required area of the bolts, from the design pressure and the gasket information. Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the required area. Based on the bolt areas and the allowable stresses, calculate the flange design bolt loads. 4. Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the product of a load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to the point of application of the load. The final result is one bending moment for operating conditions and a second for gasket seating conditions. The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., counterclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.

CodeCalc User's Guide

135

Flanges
5. Calculate the hub factors and other geometry factors for the flange based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4). The factors are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5, and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer software can consistently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix. These formulae are implemented in the Flanges. 6. Calculate the stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and the flange thickness. 7. Calculate the flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material. The form of the stress equations is: S = k(geometry) * M / t2 That is, a constant dependent on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub. The calculation procedures and format of results are similar to those given in "Modern Flange Design", Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge. Flanges includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed by a mating flange. The software also takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter uncorroded thicknesses and diameters, which the software adjusts before performing the calculations. Corrosion in treated in a special manner if indicated. The command can also be used for two levels of flange design. The Partial option forces the software to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The Design option forces the software to select all of the relevant flange geometry including bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter, thickness, and hub geometry.

Flange Design
The defined geometry is the basis for the design performed by the software. The inside diameter, materials, pressure, gasket geometry and gasket properties remain fixed throughout the design. Beginning from this point, the software uses the following approach to design the rest of the flange: 1. For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the thickness required for the design pressure 2. For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as the small end of the hub plus 1/16th (for small end thickness less than one inch) or 1/8th (for small end thickness greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub length equal to the small end thickness plus the minimum slope (3:1) for the hub. The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared with standardized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diameters (of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light. Finally, the selection of a small hub keeps the amount of machining required for the flange to a minimum. 3. Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diameter of the flange. The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts than would be found on standard flanges. This also has the effect of minimizing the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange. 4. Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts. 5. Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on: The area required divided by the area available per bolt -ORThe maximum allowed spacing between bolts of this size. 6. Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle based on: The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -OR-

136

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
The OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -ORThe minimum spacing distance between the bolts -ORFor reverse flanges, the vessel OD plus the bolt ID spacing. 7. Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the minimum edge spacing for the bolt size chosen. 8. For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for the values chosen, and recalculate the moment arms for the flange. 9. Select a thickness for the flange and calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allowable, adjust the thickness based on the difference between the actual and allowable stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. Repeat until the actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable stress. This step also applies to partial design of the flange.

Figure 30: Flange Dimensions

CodeCalc User's Guide

137

Flanges

Flange Data Tab

Integral Weld Neck Integral Slip On Integral Ring Loose Slip On

Loose Ring Lap Joint Blind Reverse

There are essentially only two categories of flanges for the purposes of analysis. These are integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions. Weld Neck Flanges - These have a hub that is butt welded to the vessel. Slip-on Flanges - These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral type flanges they require a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel. Ring Flanges - These do not have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange. They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is used between the flange and the vessel. Lap Joint Flanges - These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected from the vessel, bearing only on a vessel 'lap'. They are always analyzed as loose. Reverse Geometry Flange - Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use integral flange rules, which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See Appendix 2-13. Loose Type Flanges - Especially lap joints, may be split. A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in the other. Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets - A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included in the Code sketches, or in the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that extends from the ID of the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of flange are usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation sheets.

138

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
Number of Splits in the Ring - Enter the number of splits in the ring, if any, for loose type flanges. This value must be either 0, 1, or 2. Typically split flanges are ring-type flanges. A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange - without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in the other.

Figure 31: Single Split Ring

If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. Above diagram shows a ring with a single split.

Figure 32: Double Split Ring

If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The software automatically considers this. The flange thickness in the input (and the required value) is the thickness of the quarter piece. So, the thickness of the total ring is twice this value. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 from the splits in the other. The above diagram shows a flange with two splits. Weld Leg at Back of Ring - Enter the length of the weld leg at the back of the ring. This value is added to the inside diameter during the design of ring type flanges to determine the minimum bolt circle when the design option is turned on. If you are performing a partial or regular analysis, CodeCalc will check to see if there is interference between the wrench and the weld. CodeCalc will print a brief message letting you know there is a potential problem. Type of Analysis - Enter the analysis type for the computations to be performed on this flange.

CodeCalc User's Guide

139

Flanges
Do not leave any fields blank. CodeCalc uses these values as initial guesses. Zeroes do not make good starting guesses. Analyze - For this analysis type, users must give the complete flange definition. The software computes the resulting stresses. Partial - For this analysis type, all information except for the flange thickness must be specified. The software selects a flange thickness such that the resulting flange stress equals the allowable stress. Design - For this analysis type, only the flange diameter and thickness, gasket and flange face geometry, and gasket properties are specified. The software computes all other flange dimensions and stresses. Print Final Results for Given Thickness? - When Partial is selected and this option is selected, the results display using the given thickness. If this option is cleared, the results display using the calculated required thickness. Design Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure. If the value entered in this field is negative, it will be treated as external pressure. Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature for the flange. This temperature will be used to interpolate the material allowable tables and external pressure curves. Flange Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Flange Thickness - Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. CodeCalc will not automatically subtract the corrosion allowance off of the flange thickness. If you enter a corrosion allowance, you will be prompted whether or not you wish to corrode the flange thickness for the flange factor and stress computation. Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted from the flange and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the computations. Flange Inside Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user. See the figure in Flange Diameters. For blind flanges the Flange ID is 0.0. For Reverse flanges this is the B` dimension as shown in appendix 2 of the ASME Code.

140

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
Flange Outside Diameter - Enter the outer diameter A of the flange, as defined in the ASME code. If the flange is corroded from the outside, use a corroded dimension.

Shell Material - Select the shell material name. This is used for computing the longitudinal hub allowable stress for optional type flanges, which are analyzed as integral. Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Are the Hub and Attached Shell Material the Same? - Select to indicate that the flange material is same as the attached shell material for an integral weld neck or reverse type flange. The larger of the shell allowable and the flange allowable are used to compute the required small end hub thickness for the integral flanges. Otherwise only the flange allowable will be used. For some materials with relatively low yield strength (e.g. stainless steels), the ASME code has established higher stress values. These higher stress values (indicated by the presence of the note g5) can lead to higher deformation. These material allowables are not used for applications where deformation can cause failure such as flanges. There could be a case where the flange allowables are lower as compared to the attached shell, for the same material. But, the small end hub thickness is checked as a cylinder so the allowable stresses of the attached shell should be used. Otherwise, the hub required thickness may be more than that of the attached cylinder. If you want the (higher) shell allowables to be used then check this box.

CodeCalc User's Guide

141

Flanges

Hub/Bolts Tab
Flange Face Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. If there is no raise flange face, please enter gasket OD. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Flange Face Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. If there is no raise flange face, please enter the gasket ID. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Gasket Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Gasket Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The soaftware uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Hub Thickness, Large End - Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as "g1" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. It is permissible for the hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Hub Thickness, Small End - Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as "g0" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Hub Length - Enter the hub length h, as defined in the ASME code. For flange geometries without hubs, this length can be zero. When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When you analyze a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange, or a lap joint flange, enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However, when you design a ring flange as a loose flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This ensures that the software designs the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the nuts. For more information, see Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Diameter of Bolt Circle - Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the software range from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. This value is used to determine the bolt space correction factor. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field. Also, enter the root area of one bolt in the Root Area cell. Thread Series - The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table

142

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads. Bolt Root Area - If your bolted geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types, you must enter the root area of a single bolt in this field. This option is used only if bolt root area is greater than 0.0. Number of Bolts - Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number. The number of bolts is almost always a multiple of four. Use Full Flange Design Bolt Load (S*Ab)? - If this box is un-checked then flange design bolt load for the gasket seating condition is computed as: W = Sa * ( Am + Ab ) / 2 Otherwise it is computed as follows according to note 2 of App. 2-5 of the ASME code: W = Sa * Ab This equation can be used when additional safety against abuse is desired. Where, Sa = bolt ambient allowable stress Am = total required bolt area Ab = total available bolt area

145

Flanges
2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See, Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Gasket Design Seating Stress - Specifies the stress on the gasket necessary to form to the face of the flange. The value of y is listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See, Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Partition Gasket Facing Sketch - Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations: Facing Sketch 1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6 Description flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket

Column for Gasket Seating (I, II) - The facing columns are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m, y, and their relative facing columns please contact your gasket manufacturer. See, Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Gasket Thickness - Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d. Nubbin Width - If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring. Specify External Loads? - For leakage computations to be performed, the external loads acting on the flange must be specified. Select this option to enter the loading data. The loading data is typically from pipe stress analysis software, such as CAESAR II. Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pressure. The software calculates a roughly equivalent pressure for flanges loaded axially and/or in bending using the following formula: Peq = Pdes + 4 * F / 3.14 G2 + 16 * M / 3.14 * G3 Where: Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi Pdes = Design pressure, psi F = Axial force, lbs M = Bending moment, in-lbs G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in.

146

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
The software then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure. Node Number - Enter the node number of this flange. This entry represents the node point in a stress analysis model from which the loads are obtained. Axial Force - Enter the magnitude of the external axial force, which acts, on this flange. Bending Moment - Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment, which acts, on this flange. Mating Flange Loads? - If loads from the mating flange are to be considered, check this field. A pop-up spreadsheet will appear for additional data entry. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if it is greater than the standard bolt loads computed using the ASME formulas. The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will result in incorrect MAWP calculations. Do not calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values, but instead based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure. Do not do a design when you have a mating flange, because the software selects a different values (such as bolt circle) from the one chosen for the other flange. You can however, do a partial thickness design. Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating, WM1 - Enter the bolt load from the mating flange in the operating case. Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating, WM2 - Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for seating conditions. Mating Flange Bolt Load, Design W - Enter the design bolt load for the mating flange. Apply Corrosion to the Flange Thickness? - If you check this field, the software uses the corrosion allowance as it always has when computing the final stresses on the flange. If you say no, when the stresses are computed, the corrosion is not subtracted from the flange thickness. Saying no here will typically produce a thinner flange that is not as highly stressed. Also the MAWP of the flange will usually be slightly higher. Since this is not directly addressed by any code, agreement on this subject is usually between the client and the manufacturer. The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states that every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the flange thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off of the thickness for the stress calculations. Compute Thickness Based on Flange Rigidity? - Select this option to compute thickness so that corresponding rigidity index is 1.0. Appendix 2 contains equations that attempt to determine whether or not a given flange geometry will leak. If the computed rigidity factor is > 1.0, then leakage is predicted. Appendix 2 calculations are mandatory as of Addenda-2005 and flange designs must satisfy these calculations. These rigidity factor calculations are not mandatory for Pre-1999 Addenda users Appendix S is non-mandatory appendix and that these calculations are also non-mandatory.

CodeCalc User's Guide

147

Flanges

Results (Flanges)
Flanges with Different Bending Moments:
The flange design moments differ from the norm for external pressure, reverse flanges, and flat flanges. Under external pressure only the end load and flange pressure are included in the design, and their signs are reversed. For reverse flanges all the moments are present, but the moment arm hd is negative, making MD negative. The load HT is negative, and the moment arm ht may be either positive or negative. The absolute value of the moment is used in the calculations. For flat faced flanges an alternate value of hg (h''g) is used to calculate a reverse moment at the bolt circle. No calculations for seating conditions for full faced flanges are required.

Blind Flanges and Channel Covers:

The ASME Code formula for a circular blind flange is: t = d * SQRT( C * P / S * E + 1.9 * W * Hg / S * E * d3 )

The first term in this formula is the bending of a flat plate under pressure. The second term is the bending of the plate due to an edge moment. The stress is limited to 1.5 times the allowable stress, but the 1.5 factor is already built into the equation. For seating conditions the first term is zero - the thickness of the flange depends only on the edge bending. For non-circular blind flanges the term Z is added to the first term in the square root. Once again, Z is a simple function of the ratio of the large dimension to the small dimension of the flange. It is interesting to note that the Code covers non-circular blind flanges, but no other type of non-circular flanges (not even in the rectangular vessel appendix). Channel covers designed to TEMA must meet at least the minimum thickness requirements of the Code. In addition, if there is a pass partition groove, the cover deflection is limited. The formula for flange deflection limitation is found in paragraph 9.21 of TEMA. The deflection is, of course, a function of t3 and G3. Thus, a very small increase in flange thickness will decrease the deflection significantly. The Seventh Edition of TEMA also gives recommended deflections as a function of flange size. The previous editions hid the actual deflection you were working toward in a thickness equation.

Allowable Flange Stresses:

Allowable flange stresses are based on the ASME Code Allowable Stress for the flange material at the Ambient and Operating design temperatures. In the case of bending stresses, these allowable are multiplied by 1.5. This takes into account the higher maximum strain required to yield a section in bending versus pure tension. The stresses calculated and the allowable stresses are as follows: Operating Longitudinal Hub Stress (bending) Radial Flange Stress Tangential Flange Stress Maximum Average Stress Stress in Bolts 1.5 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sbo Ambient 1.5 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sba

148

CodeCalc User's Guide

Flanges
Stress in Reverse Flanges Stress in Full Faced Gasket Flanges Where: 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa

Sfo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at operating temperature. Sfa = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature. Sb = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at o ambient temperature. Sb = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at a ambient temperature.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure:

The following graph shows conceptually how the software extrapolates for the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure:

1. For Operating Pressure MAWP

The software calculates the stresses at the pressure given and calculates the slope between the stress at zero pressure and the stress at the given pressure.

CodeCalc User's Guide

149

Flanges
The software extrapolates the slope out to the point where the stress is equal to the allowable stress. The pressure at this point is the maximum allowable working pressure.

2. For Gasket Seating MAWP

Note that at low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design pressure. At higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP can be calculated as described above, except that the extrapolation is from the point where pressure comes into the calculation of the seating stress. The software calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on the input geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the input pressure. However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the MAWP may depend on the pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please note that in Partial or Design mode, the software calculates MAWP based on the required flange thickness.

Flange Rigidity Calculations

Appendix 2 also contains equations that attempt to determine whether or not a given flange geometry will leak. The cases considered are ambient and operating. If the computed rigidity factor is > 1.0, then leakage is predicted. Appendix 2 calculations are mandatory as of Addenda-2005.

150

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 9

TEMA Tubesheets
Home tab: Components > Add New TEMA Tubesheet Performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet exchangers, based on the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association, 8th Edition, 1999 or PD 5500, 2004 (British standard). Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet is also analyzed per TEMA and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.

In This Section

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (TubeSheets) .................... 151 Shell Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) ...................................................... 155 Channel Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) ................................................. 156 Tubes Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) .................................................... 157 Tubesheet Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) ............................................. 161 Expansion Joint Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) ..................................... 166 Tubesheet Extended as Flange Dialog (TEMA Tubesheets) ........ 169 Outer Cylinder Dialog Box ............................................................. 171 Shell Band Properties Dialog Box ................................................. 172 Multiple Load Cases Dialog Box (TEMA Tubesheets) .................. 173 Tubesheet Gasket Dialog Box ....................................................... 173 Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger Dialog Box ....................................... 176 Kettle Tubesheet Dialog Box ......................................................... 177 Results (Tubesheets) ..................................................................... 177

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (TubeSheets)

TUBESHEETS calculates required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure of tubesheets for all of the exchanger types described in the 8th Edition of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA) and PD 5500. It also calculates thermal stresses and forces in the shell and tubes of fixed tubesheet exchangers. Load on the Tube-Tubesheet joint is also checked per the method provided in the ASME and PD 5500 codes respectively. This program will analyze the following tubesheet types: Stationary tubesheets, gasketed between the shell and the channel. Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell and the channel. Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell only. Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel only. U-tube exchangers, tubesheet gasketed between shell and channel U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with channel only. U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with shell only. U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with both shell and channel. Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head (P). Floating tubesheets, floating head with backing device (S). Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head (T).

CodeCalc User's Guide

151

TEMA Tubesheets
Floating tubesheets, externally sealed floating head (W). Floating tubesheets, divided floating head. Fixed tubesheets, stationary tubesheet at both ends. The program does the required calculations for the thickness of a tubesheet that has been extended as a flange. It also calculates the required thickness of the extension. You must enter the geometry of the flange extension, including the gasket and bolting for the flange. TUBESHEETS takes into account the following additional loadings for fixed tubesheet exchangers: Expansion joints - thin walled, thick walled, or none. Tubesheets - integral, gasketed, or extended as flanges. Pressure and thermal loads - on shell, tubesheet, tubes and tube-to-tubesheet joints. Differential pressure designs. It is possible to analyze multiple load cases (startup, shut-down etc) for fixed tubesheets, in both the corroded and uncorroded condition.

152

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
Program can also analyze a thick expansion joint attached to a fixed tubesheet. The expansion joint spring rate and stresses are computed per TEMA standard. The actual stresses are then compared with the allowables provided in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, Appendix 5 to check the joint's adequacy.

Figure 33: TEMA Tubesheet Module Geometry

Tubes Tab (TEMA Tubesheets)

Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Tube Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable stress values for the tube material from the material tables.

CodeCalc User's Guide

157

TEMA Tubesheets
Tube Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Wall Thickness - This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness. The following table gives thickness for some common tube gauges: B.W.G. Gauge Thickness (in) 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 27 0.180 0.165 0.134 0.120 0.109 0.095 0.083 0.072 0.065 0.058 0.049 0.042 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.018 0.016

Corrosion Allowance. - Enter the tube corrosion allowance. Number of Holes - Enter the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness.

158

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
For U-tube exchangers, the number of tube holes in the tubesheet is normally equal to two times the number of tubes. Pattern - Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. In the ASME code square patterns have a 90 layout angle and triangular patterns have a 60 angle. Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75, .875, 1.0, or 1.25 (inches). The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular, square, rotated triangular and rotated square layouts. Pitch - Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term "eta" in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. Is this a Welded Tube (not Seamless)? - Check this box if the tube has a longitudinal weld seam or in other words it (not seamless). For computing allowable Tube-Tubesheet Joints loads and the longitudinal tube stress, the allowable stress of a seamless tube is needed. If the user selected a welded tube and clicks on this checkbox, then the tube allowable stress is divided by 0.85 to get an equivalent allowable of a seamless tube. This is per note in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 UW-20.3 and App. A. The reason for this is that the longitudinal stress does act across the longitudinal seam. So, the joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam is not used in the calculation. Tube to Tubesheet Joint Information? - Check this box to input information about the Tube-Tubesheet joint (weld, classification). This information will be used to determine the minimum acceptable fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet and the allowable tube-to-tubesheet load. Differential Design Pressure - Enter the differential design pressure if you wish the program to use the differential design rules. The differential pressure is used as the design pressure on both the tubeside and the shellside, except for fixed tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero serves as a flag to tell the program to turn on the special differential design pressure rules for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and tube side design pressures for fixed tubesheet exchangers.

PD 550 or TEMA Tubesheet Input

Straight Length of Tubes between - Specify the tube length from either the inner tubesheet faces or outside tubesheet faces (total straight length), this is indicated using the corresponding input on this screen. Straight Length of Tubes - Enter the length of the tubes. For U-tubesheet exchangers this is the straight length of the tube. For fixed tubesheet exchanger this is the overall length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of the tubes. This input is only needed for British tubesheets and TEMA fixed tubesheets. You can specify the tube length from either the inner tubesheet faces or outside tubesheet faces (total straight length). This is indicated using the corresponding input on this screen. End Condition k, - For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where,

CodeCalc User's Guide

159

TEMA Tubesheets
SL = Unsupported Span of the tube k = Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below lists the values of k. k 0.60 0.80 1.0 Condition For unsupported spans between two tubesheets. For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support. For unsupported spans between two tube supports.

For the worst case scenario, enter the values of k and SL that give the maximum combination of k * SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two support baffles. F1 calls different IDs in the two books, but content is the same. Maximun Unsupported Length SL - For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where, SL = Unsupported Span of the tube k = Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below lists the values of k. k 0.60 0.80 1.0 Condition For unsupported spans between two tubesheets. For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support. For unsupported spans between two tube supports.

For the worst case scenario, enter the values of k and SL that give the maximum combination of k * SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two support baffles. F1 calls different IDs in the two books, but content is the same. Length of Expanded Portion of Tube - The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward within the tube hole. When the tube is expanded, it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Some tubes are welded into place and this value may be zero. The maximum this value can be is the thickness of the tubesheet. A fully expanded tube-tubesheet joint can reduce the tubesheet-required thickness.

TEMA Additional Input

Perimeter of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the length of a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. This can be calculated by counting the number of tubes on the outside of the layout and multiplying that number by the tube pitch. When a tubesheet might be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. An error message displays when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter. This input is only needed for TEMA tubesheets. Area of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the area enclosed by a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. When a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. An error message displays

160

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter.

PD 5500 Additional Input

Diameter of Outer Tube Limit Circle - Enter the diameter of outer tube limit circle, denoted as Do in PD:5500. This input is only needed for British tubesheets (PD:5500). Area of Untubed Lanes (S) - Enter the total area of all the untubed lanes on the tubesheet. If there is no pass partition lane then this area is zero. See the figure below for a single pass exchanger, this area is UL1 * Do.

Figure 36: Area of Untubed Lanes

The maximum limiting value of AL is 4*Do*p. Where, Do = Equivalent diameter of outer limit circle. p = tube pitch UL1 = Distance between innermost tube hole centers (width of pass partition lane) Number of Grooves in Tube Hole - Enter number of grooves in the tube hole.

Tubesheet Tab (TEMA Tubesheets)

Type of Tubesheet - The program analyzes the following tubesheet types. When one tubesheet is stationary and the other tubesheet is a floating type, then analyze the stationary tubesheet as one of the stationary types (listed below) and analyze the floating tubesheet as one of the tubesheet types (listed below). Examples include: AEP, AKT, AJW, NET, and so forth. If both tubesheets (front and rear) are stationary, then select the fixed tubesheet type. This can include any of the stationary tubesheet types as the front or rear tubesheet type. Choosing this geometry assures the differential thermal expansion (between the shell and the tubes) is properly accounted. Examples of some fixed configurations are BEM, NGN, AEL, and so forth. Use the table below to determine the correct tubesheet type.

CodeCalc User's Guide

161

TEMA Tubesheets
Stationary tubesheet, gasketed on both sides (A)

Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell (B)

Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel (C)

Stationary tubesheets, integral on both sides (N)

U-tube tubesheets gasketed on both sides (U)

162

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
U-tube tubesheets integral with the channel (V)

U-tube tubesheets integral with the shell

Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head (P) Floating tubesheets, head with backing device (S) Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head (T) Floating head, externally sealed floating tubesheet (W) Divided floating tubesheet (D)

See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2

165

TEMA Tubesheets

Expansion Joint Tab (TEMA Tubesheets)

Expansion Joint Type - Select the appropriate expansion joint type. The following options are available: None - Select this option when there is no expansion joint in the heat exchanger. Thin Expansion Joint - Select this option if the expansion joint is a bellows type expansion joint. The figure below shows an unreinforced bellows type expansion joint. In this case you should use the Thin Joint module to design the bellows type expansion joints (both reinforced and unreinforced). Then specify the computed spring rate.

Figure 37: Thin Expansion Joint

Thick Expansion Joint - Select this option if the expansion joint is: Flanged and flue Flanged only No flanged or no flue. Design Option - The following options are available: Existing - Select this option if you already know the spring rate of the flanged/flued expansion joint. Analyze - Select this option if you want the program to compute the spring rate of the expansion joint and stresses induced in the expansion joint. Expansion Joint Calculation Method - Enter the expansion joint calculation method. User input Sprint Rate Corroded/Uncorroded - Enter the spring rate for the thin walled (bellows) expansion joint or a thick walled (flanged/flued) expansion joint. If there is no expansion joint, this input should be disabled. The spring rate of the thin walled expansion joint (bellows kind) can be computed using the Thin Joint module of the program, which is based on ASME appendix 26. The spring rate of the thick walled expansion joint (flanged/flued kind) can be computed within the tubesheet modules when the user specifies the expansion joint design option as Analyze, and enters the expansion joint geometry. This calculation is per TEMA RCB-8. Alternatively, the user can also use the Thick joint module to compute the spring rate, but this is not a preferred way as it involves manual transfer of data between the tubesheet and Thick joint modules. The uncorroded and corroded spring rates will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and corroded condition.

166

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as ID in the figure below. This value is used by the program to calculate the force on the cylinder and the equivalent pressure of thermal expansion.

Figure 38: Expansion Joint

Expansion Joint Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as OD in Figure D in Expansion Joint Inside Diameter. Expansion Joint Flange Wall Thickness, (te) - Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming. This is usually thinner than the unformed metal. This value is shown as te in Expansion Joint Inside Diameter. Expansion Joint Flange Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint. This value will be subtracted from the minimum thickness of the flange or web for the joint. Some common corrosion allowances are listed below: 0.0625 inches (2 mm) 0.125 inches (3 mm) 0.25 inches (6 mm) 1/16" 1/8" 1/4"

Expansion Joint Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Expansion Joint Knuckle Offset Inside - Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle. Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner. In both cases this distance is frequently zero and, for an expansion joint with an outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance is the distance from the end of the knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.

CodeCalc User's Guide

167

TEMA Tubesheets
Flange Design Bolt Load (W) - Specify the alternate flange design bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the program.

Outer Cylinder Dialog Box

Topics
Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint ................................ 171 Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance ............................ 171 Outer Cylindrical Element Length (Lo) .......................................... 171

Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint

Check this field if there is a cylindrical section attached to the expansion joint at the OD. This will always be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolution (1 FSE). It may also be true when there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutions, as in the case of certain inlet nozzle geometries for heat exchangers.

Figure 40: Expansion Joint

Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance for the outer cylindrical element.

Outer Cylindrical Element Length (Lo)

Enter the length of the outer cylinder to the nearest body flange or head, or to the centerline of the convolute. TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 includes the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero. Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if less than the cylinder length.

CodeCalc User's Guide

171

TEMA Tubesheets
This value is shown in the figure below as 'lo'.

Figure 41: Expansion Joint

Shell Band Properties Dialog Box

Topics
Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet ........................................ 173 Shell Band Corrosion Allowance ................................................... 173 Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, front end L1 ... 173 Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, rear L1 ........... 173

172

CodeCalc User's Guide

Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet

Enter the thickness of the shell bands ts1.

Shell Band Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell band.

Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, front end L1

Enter the front end length l1 for the shell band.

Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, rear L1

Enter the rear end length l1' for the shell band.

Multiple Load Cases Dialog Box (TEMA Tubesheets)

Tubesheet Gasket Dialog Box

Flange Face Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. If there is no raise flange face, please enter the gasket ID. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Flange Face Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. If there is no raise flange face, please enter gasket OD. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143).

CodeCalc User's Guide

173

TEMA Tubesheets
Gasket Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Gasket Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The soaftware uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Mating Flange Hub Thickness, Small End - Enter the flange hub thickness. Mating Flange Hub Thickness, Large End - Enter the flange hub thickness. Gasket Factors m/y - These values of m and y are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Flange Face Facing Sketch - Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations: Facing Sketch 1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6 Description flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket

174

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
analysis and the design formulae to account for the full face gasket. There are 3 Full Face Gasket Flanges options: Program Selects - Select to automatically make the determination if this is a full face gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. See the figure below.

Not a Full Face - Select if this is not a full face gasket flange. Length of Partition Gasket - This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated with this flange. Width of Partition Gasket - Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using the gasket properties specified and the known width, CodeCalc will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket loads contributed by the partition gasket.

CodeCalc User's Guide

175

TEMA Tubesheets

Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger Dialog Box

Tubesheet Mean Metal Temperature - Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet under a realistic operating condition. This value does not affect the thermal expansion design, but it is used to determine the elastic modulus of the tubesheet. Refer to TEMA standard, section T-4 (8th Ed.) for guidance to compute the Mean Metal Temperatures. Is This a Kettle Type Tubesheet - Check this option if the shell is shaped like a Kettle. Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in TEMA standard Eighth Edition. Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet - Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the TEMA standard. Load Case # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Load Case Description Corroded Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Uncorroded Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca

Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0 Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance

176

180

CodeCalc User's Guide

TEMA Tubesheets
compressive stress and the shell is under tensile stress, this indicates that the tube is trying to expand more than the shell. In this case an expansion joint can be used to relieve this axial stress. You can either put a thin expansion joint by checking the appropriate box (designed using the Thin Joint module) or a thick expansion joint (which can be designed the Tubesheet module or the Thick Joint module).

Display of Results on Status Bar

As the user enters the data, program performs the calculation and displays the important results on the status bar. Any error messages are also displayed. This allows a quick design of the tubesheet and makes it easier to try various configurations to select the best one. Any failures are indicated in red. Here is a sample:

Designing a Thick Expansion Joint in the Tubesheet Module: After you input the thick expansion joint geometry in the Tubesheet module, the program uses the following process to design the expansion joint: 1. Compute the expansion joint spring rate 2. Use the expansion joint spring rate in the fixed tubesheet calculations 3. Use the results of the tubesheet calculation, along with the prime pressures (Ps, Pt, Pd) to compute the expansion joint stresses. 4. Run a corresponding expansion joint calculation for each tubesheet load case. The program displays the results for the worst case. (detailed results are also available). The procedure followed when designing PD:5500 tubesheets is similar to the one shown here.

CodeCalc User's Guide

181

TEMA Tubesheets

182

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 10

ASME Tubesheets
Home tab: Components > Add New ASME Tubesheet Calculates the required thickness for tubesheets and shell/channel/tube stresses according to the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 part UHX, 2007 Edition. Tubesheet types that are addressed are U-tube, fully fixed and floating. CodeCalc also computes the allowable Tube-Tubesheet joint load per ASME Sec. VIII Appendix A. Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet is also analyzed per TEMA standard, 8th edition and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.

In This Section

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis ........................................... 183 Shell Tab ........................................................................................ 185 Channel Tab .................................................................................. 186 Tubes Tab ...................................................................................... 187 Tubesheet Tab ............................................................................... 192 Expansion Joint Tab ...................................................................... 205 Tubesheet Extended As Flange Dialog Box .................................. 209 Additional Input U-tube Tubesheets Dialog Box ............................ 209 Results (ASME Tubesheets) ......................................................... 211

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis

The ASME TUBESHEETS module is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 part UHX. This module will also compute loads on the tubes and compare them to their allowable loads per the appropriate equation in Appendix A. Gasketed geometries for both fixed, floating and U-tube exchangers are also analyzed as well as the thickness of the flanged extension (the TEMA equation has been used). This module is good for both square or rectangular tube patterns. When this module is executed it will display the output including equations for a given input. Afterwards, CodeCalc will iterate for the required thickness of the tubesheet. The shell side and tubeside corrosion allowances will then be added to these final results. CodeCalc also performs the plasticity calculations for fixed tubesheets if high discontinuity stresses exist at the attachment between the tubesheet and shell or channel. CodeCalc contains all of the graphs and functions that appear in section UHX. The software analyzes all the load cases as per the section UHX, which includes various combinations of pressure and temperature, in both the uncorroded and corroded (if specified) conditions. A summary table is provided at the end of the output. User can choose to view the detailed printout of any load case.

CodeCalc User's Guide

183

ASME Tubesheets
The software can also analyze a thick expansion joint attached to a fixed tubesheet. The expansion joint spring rate and stresses are computed per TEMA standard. The actual stresses are then compared with the allowables provided in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, Appendix 5 to check the joint's adequacy.

184

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets

Shell Tab
Item Number - Type an ID number for the tubesheet. This might be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. More than one pressure or temperature case can be run. Press the + key, enter a new tubesheet number and change the relevant input items. Merge Shell - Use this option to import data from the Shells and Heads module. Select the shell you want to add to the model, and press enter, all the appropriate data for that shell is copied in automatically. Description - Type an alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a description will help you keep up with each item when reviewing the output. Shell Design Pressure - Type the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external pressure, enter a negative pressure. The program will add this pressure with the positive pressure on the tube (channel) side. Merge TEMA Tubesheets - Select to merge the TEMA tubesheets. Shell Wall Thickness - Type the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. The program uses this value to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets. It is used in the computation of Beta as well as the spring rate and other factors. Shell Corrosion Allowance - Type the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded thickness of the shell. Shell Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the software to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets and the longitudinal shell stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers. Shell Design Temperature - Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature. Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Shell Circumferential Joint Efficiency, Esw - Enter the joint efficiency of the circumferential joint in the shell. This is used in the calculation of the allowable for the shell axial stress in the case of fixed tubesheet exchangers.

CodeCalc User's Guide

185

ASME Tubesheets

Channel Tab
Channel Type - Select Cylinder, Hemispherical head, or Floating Head as the channel type. Merge - Use this option to import data from the Shells and Heads module. Select the shell you want to add to the model, and press enter, all the appropriate data for that shell is copied in automatically. Channel Design Pressure - Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum design condition, enter a negative pressure. The software correctly combines this pressure with the positive pressure on the other side. For TEMA tubesheet calculation: If you specify a differential pressure in the differential pressure input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside will usually be ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the differential pressure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate calculations for differential pressure should be performed. For ASME tubesheet calculation: To run a differential pressure case, click Use Differential Pressure Design in the Multiple Load Case dialog box. Channel Wall Thickness - Type the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. The program uses this value to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types. An example of such a parameter is the Beta dimension for fixed tubesheet exchangers. Channel Corrosion Allowance - Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded thickness of the channel. Channel Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets. Channel Design Temperature - Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature. Channel Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

186

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets

Tubes Tab
Tube Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable stress values for the tube material from the material tables. Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Wall Thickness - Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness. The following table displays thicknesses for some common tube gauges: B.W.G. Gauge 7 8 10 11 13 14 15 16 Thickness (Inches) .180 .165 .134 .109 .095 .083 .072 .065 B.W.G. Gauge 17 18 19 22 24 26 27 Thickness (Inches) .058 .049 .042 .028 .022 .018 .016

Corrosion Allowance - Enter the tube corrosion allowance. Number of Holes - Enter the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness. For U-tube exchangers, the number of tube holes in the tubesheet is normally equal to two times the number of tubes. Pattern - Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. In the ASME code square patterns have a 90 layout angle and triangular patterns have a 60 angle. Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75, .875, 1.0, or 1.25 (inches). The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to

CodeCalc User's Guide

187

ASME Tubesheets
calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular, square, rotated triangular and rotated square layouts. Pitch - Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term "eta" in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. Does this Tube have a Longitudinal Weld? - Click this box if you are using a welded tube (longitudinal seam) and not a seamless one. When selecting the tube material you can encounter allowables in two forms: Material specification is for the welded material - The material allowable in this case includes a weld Joint Efficiency of 0.85. When checking the longitudinal tube stress as in part UHX the tube allowable without the Joint efficiency is used. To calculate the pressure stress (hoop stress) the allowable including the joint efficiency is used. Material specification is for the Seamless or Seamless/Welded material - In this case the Joint efficiency is not applied to the allowables listed in the code. Hence the part UHX uses tube allowables as it is, while the pressure calculation applies the efficiency of 0.85. Refer to the notes for the material specification. Tube to Tubesheet Joint Information - Check this box to input information about the Tube-Tubesheet joint (weld, classification). This information will be used to determine the minimum acceptable fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet and the allowable tube-to-tubesheet load. Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center - Enter the distance from the centerline of the exchanger to the centerline of the outermost tube. Distance between Innermost Tube Centers (UL) - The ASME defines this input also as the largest center-to-center distance between adjacent tube rows. This could also be the width of the pass partition lane. This is not the tube pitch. If there are not pass partitions, then this value must be 0.0. Length of Expanded Portion of Tube - The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward within the tube hole. When the tube is expanded, it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Some tubes are welded into place and this value may be zero. The maximum this value can be is the thickness of the tubesheet. A fully expanded tube-tubesheet joint can reduce the tubesheet-required thickness. Pass Partition Groove Depth (hg) - Enter the tube side pass partition groove depth. Perimeter of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the length of a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. This can be calculated by counting the number of tubes on the outside of the layout and multiplying that number by the tube pitch. When a tubesheet might be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. An error message displays when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter. This input is only needed for TEMA tubesheets. Area of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the area enclosed by a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. When a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. An error message displays when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter. Straight Length of Tubes - Enter the length of the tubes. For U-tubesheet exchangers this is the straight length of the tube. For fixed tubesheet exchanger this is the overall length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to

188

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets
determine the thermal expansion of the tubes. This input is only needed for British tubesheets and TEMA fixed tubesheets. You can specify the tube length from either the inner tubesheet faces or outside tubesheet faces (total straight length). This is indicated using the corresponding input on this screen. Straight Tube Length measured between - Specify the tube length from either the inner tubesheet faces or outside tubesheet faces (total straight length), this is indicated using the corresponding input on this screen. End Condition k - For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where, SL = Unsupported Span of the tube k = Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below lists the values of k. k 0.60 0.80 1.0 Condition For unsupported spans between two tubesheets. For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support. For unsupported spans between two tube supports.

For the worst case scenario, enter the values of k and SL that give the maximum combination of k * SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two support baffles. F1 calls different IDs in the two books, but content is the same. Maximum Unsupported Length SL - For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where, SL = Unsupported Span of the tube k = Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below lists the values of k. k 0.60 0.80 1.0 Condition For unsupported spans between two tubesheets. For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support. For unsupported spans between two tube supports.

CodeCalc User's Guide

189

ASME Tubesheets

Tube to Tubesheet Joint Input Dialog Box

Fillet Weld Length, af - If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or groove weld leg length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld. Sometimes both are used. These values are used to determine the weld strengths and the required weld sizes. Refer to paragraph UW-20 in the ASME Code for more details. Groove Weld Length, ag - If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or groove weld leg length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld. Sometimes both are used. These values are used to determine the weld strengths and the required weld sizes. Refer to paragraph UW-20 in the ASME Code for more details. Tube Joint Strength Type - Following options are available for the connecting tube/tubesheet welds: Full Strength A full strength tube-to-tubesheet weld is one in which the design strength is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial tube strength. In other words the joint is at least as strong as the tube. A partial strength weld can be designed based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial load No calculations are performed in this case.

Partial Strength Seal Weld/No Weld

Stationary Tubesheet configurations allowed Per ASME section UHX:

a - Tubesheet integral with both Shell and Channel b - Tubesheet integral with Shell, gasketed with Channel, with Tubesheet extended as a Flange c - Tubesheet integral with Shell, gasketed with Channel, with Tubesheet not extended as a Flange d - Tubesheet gasketed with both Shell and Channel e - Tubesheet integral with Channel, gasketed with Shell, with Tubesheet extended as a Flange f - Tubesheet integral with Channel, gasketed with Shell, with Tubesheet not extended as a Flange.

Floating Tubesheets configurations allowed Per ASME section UHX:

A - Tubesheet integral B - Tubesheet gasketed and extended as a Flange C - Tubesheet gasketed and not extended as a Flange D - Tubesheet Internally Sealed. Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature - Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature. Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties.

194

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets
3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Tubesheet Thickness - Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable estimate at the thickness if the actual thickness is unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the shell side or the tube side. The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also used in the equivalent thermal pressure calculation. When you have finished your design you should come back and put the actual thickness into this field and make sure the required thickness does not change. Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance (Shell Side) - Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the tubesheet corrosion allowance channel side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet. Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance (Channel Side) - Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the channel side. This value is combined with the tubesheet corrosion allowance shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet. Outside Diameter of Tubesheet - Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet. This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code. For the tubesheet extended as a flange, this will be the diameter of the extended portion of the tubesheet. Tubesheet Gasket - Enter the kind of gasketing associated with this tubesheet. Select None if the tubesheet is not sealed with a gasket on either side. Select Shell if the gasket is only on the shell side of the exchanger. Select Channel if the gasket is only on the channel side of the exchanger. Select Both if the gaskets are on both sides of the exchanger. The program will then evaluate the gasket you specify along with the pressure which causes the largest bending moment on the tubesheet. If the tubesheet has a circular gasket, even if the gasket is not extended as a flange, you must enter the details of the gasket, so that the program can correctly evaluate the mean diameter of the gasket load reaction (G). to open the Tubesheet Gasket/Bolting Input Dialog Box and define the necessary Click properties. Tubesheet Integral With - Select the side to which the Tubesheet is integral. Tubesheet Extended as Flange? - Select if the tubesheet is extended and used as a bolted flange. If the tubesheet is extended but does not experience the bending moments of the bolts, then select Is Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet to allow input echo of the tubesheet extension information without transferring the bolt load to the tubesheet. For example, when the tubesheet is bolted between a pair of identical flanges, it will not experience a bending moment. It is only when the tubesheet replaces one of the flanges that a moment develops. Dimen. G for Backlog Ring - Area of Untubed Lanes (AL) - This input is used for two types of ASME tubesheet geometries: If the tubesheet has a backing ring, then enter the G1 dimension for the backing ring. G1 is the mid point of the contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet. In this case it is a required input. If the tubesheet is gasketed with both the Shell and the Channel, then enter the channel gasket reaction diameter, Gc, in this input. The program computes the Shell gasket reaction

CodeCalc User's Guide

195

ASME Tubesheets
diameter, Gs from the gasket/flange properties specified. In this case, this input is optional, required only if Gc is different from Gs. Is Exchange in Creep Range (skip EP, use 35 for SPS)? - Enter the total area of all the untubed lanes on the tubesheet. If there is no pass partition lane then this area is zero. See the figure below for a single pass exchanger, this area is UL1 * Do.

Figure 42: Area of Untubed Lanes

The maximum limiting value of AL is 4*Do*p. Where, Do = Equivalent diameter of outer limit circle. p = tube pitch UL1 = Distance between innermost tube hole centers (width of pass partition lane) Area of Untubed Lanes (AL) - Select this option if the exchanger is inside the creep range as defined in the ASME code.

196

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets

Tubesheet Exchanger Dialog Box

Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim - Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell at the Tubesheet, under a realistic operating condition. It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design. Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet at Rim - Enter the actual metal temperature for the channel at the Tubesheet, under a realistic operating condition. It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design. Tubesheet Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim - Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet at the rim, under a realistic operating condition. It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design. Modulus of Elasticity - When there is an external pressure value, enter the elastic modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion - The thermal expansion reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of data set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TE-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many materials have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens, you will need to enter in an appropriate value. Thermal expansion coefficients are important especially if you are analyzing a heat exchanger.

CodeCalc User's Guide

197

ASME Tubesheets

Multiple Load Cases Dialog Box

Shell-side Vacuum Pressure - When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric vacuum condition enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified, then zero psi will be used. Channel-side Vacuum Pressure - When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric vacuum condition enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified, then zero psi will be used. Use the Differential Pressure Design - Check this box if design is based on differential pressure case. In this case only certain load cases will be performed, as indicated by the ASME code. Differential Design Pressure (used if >0) - Enter the differential design pressure if you want the program to use the differential design rules. The differential pressure is used as the design pressure on both the tube side and the shell side, except for fixed tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero serves as a flag to tell the program to turn on the special differential design pressure rules for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and tube side design pressures for fixed tubesheet exchangers. Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout - When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate summarized results for all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and intermediate calculations for one or more load cases, select those load cases. The following load cases are performed for TEMA fixed tubesheets: Load Case # Load Case Description Corroded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Uncorroded Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca

For ASME Tubesheets only certain load cases will be run based on type of the tubesheet and the heat exchanger. These following load cases are performed for ASME fixed and floating tubesheet exchangers: Load Case # Load Case Description Corroded 1 2 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Uncorroded Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca

198

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets
3 4 5 6 7 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca

For ASME stationary tubesheet configuration "d" and ASME floating tubesheet configurations "B", "C" and "D", the design is based only on load cases 1, 2 and 3. The following load cases are performed for ASME U-tube tubesheet exchangers. Load Case # Load Case Description Corroded Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Uncorroded Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca

For all ASME exchangers, if vacuum pressures are specified, then an additional load case would be run: 8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca Additionally, if the differential pressure design option is checked, then only certain load cases will be run. Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0. Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures. Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion. Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.

Tubesheet Gasket/Bolting Input Dialog Box

Flanged Portion Inner Diameter - Enter the internal diameter of the shell/channel or floating head to which the tubesheet is gasketed. If this value is blank, the software uses either the shell or channel internal diameter, based on the gasketed side the tubesheet. This input is needed for a floating tubesheet exchanger that is gasketed to the floating head. For tubesheets that are gasketed with both the shell and channel, this input is for the shell side. Flanged Portion Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the flanged portion (shell/channel/floating head) to which the tubesheet is gasketed. If this input is left blank, it is set equal to the tubesheet OD. Specify this input, for cases where flanged portion OD is different from the tubesheet OD. For tubesheets that are gasketed with both the shell and channel, this input is for the shell side. Flange Face Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.

CodeCalc User's Guide

199

ASME Tubesheets
If there is no raise flange face, please enter the gasket ID. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Flange Face Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. If there is no raise flange face, please enter gasket OD. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Gasket Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Gasket Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The soaftware uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. See Flange Face Figure (on page 143). Flange Hub Thickness, Small End - Enter the flange hub thickness. Flange Hub Thickness, Large End - Enter the flange hub thickness. Gasket Factors m - These values of m and y are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Gasket Factors y - These values of m and y are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Flange Face Facing Sketch - Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations: Facing Sketch 1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6 Description flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket

Flange Face Facing Column - These values of m and y are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings

200

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets
Gasket Thickness - Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d. Nubbin Width - If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring. Full Face Gasket Option - ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 does not cover the design of flanges for which the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. Select this option to use a typical method for the design of these types of flanges is from the Taylor Forge Flange Design Bulletin. Gaskets for the full face flanges are usually of soft materials such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the bolt stresses do not go too high during gasket seating. The software adjusts the flange analysis and the design formulae to account for the full face gasket. There are 3 Full Face Gasket Flanges options: Program Selects - Select to automatically make the determination if this is a full face gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. See the figure below.

CodeCalc User's Guide

201

ASME Tubesheets
Full Face Gasket - Select if this is a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. See the figure below:

Not a Full Face - Select if this is not a full face gasket flange.

Partition Gasket for tubeside (if present)

Tubesheet Extended As Flange Dialog Box

Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet - Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will be used in the calculation of the required thickness. The final results should therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five percent. Since the ASME Code does not have a single equation to compute this required thickness, the appropriate formula from TEMA 8th edition was used. Is the Bolt Load transferred to the Tubesheet - Check this box if the bolt load is transferred to the tubesheet, which is extended as the flange. If the tubesheet is gasketed with both the shell and channel flanges, then tubesheet can still be extended but the bolt load is not transferred to the tubesheet extension. In that case, you can uncheck this box. But, carefully consider all the possible cases such the hydrotest. If this box is unchecked then the required thickness of the tubesheet extension is not computed.

Additional Input U-tube Tubesheets Dialog Box

Stress Reduction Options - For U-tube tubesheets which are over-stressed at the tubesheet to integral cylinder junction, one of the following options can be used to overcome the overstress: Increase Tubesheet Thickness Increase Integral Cylinder Thickness Increase Both Cylinder and Tubesheet Perform Elastic Plastic Calculation Analyze as Simply Supported None Shell Band Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only

CodeCalc User's Guide

209

ASME Tubesheets
information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet - Enter the thickness of the shell bands ts1. Shell Band Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell band. Length of Shell Thk. Adjacent to Tubesheet, front end L1 - Enter the front end length l1 for the shell band. Length of Shell Thk. Adjacent to Tubesheet, rear end L1 - Enter the rear end length l1' for the shell band.

These values of m and y are listed in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y please contact your gasket manufacturer. See Table 2-5.1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings

210

CodeCalc User's Guide

ASME Tubesheets

Results (ASME Tubesheets)

Part UHX of the Code is divided into four major sections. The first section discusses u-tube exchangers, the second discusses fixed tubesheet exchangers, the third section discusses floating tubesheet exchangers and the fourth section discusses tube-to-tubesheet joint weld. There is a sequence of steps to follow when performing calculations for each type of exchanger. CodeCalc will perform each step and print the applicable formula substitution and answers for each step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition, the program will iterate for the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed CodeCalc will also perform the second elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. The program can run multiple load cases for the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code. The table below displays the load cases that are considered for a fixed tubesheet exchanger. Load Case # Corroded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fvs+Pt-Th-Ca Ps+Fvt-Th-Ca Ps+Pt-Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th-Ca Fvs+Pt+Th-Ca Ps+Fvt+Th-Ca Ps+Pt+Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca Uncorroded Fvs+Pt-Th Ps+Fvt-Th Ps+Pt-Th Fvs+Fvt+Th Fvs+Pt+Th Ps+Fvt+Th Ps+Pt+Th Fvs+Fvt-Th-Ca

Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0. Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube-side Design Pressures. Th - With or without Thermal Expansion. Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses based on if it is a pressure only load case or pressure + thermal load case. Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. You can enter your own shell/channel vacuum pressures for the multi-case analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the process fluid streams being stopped, while the other stream continues. In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of withstanding the axial forces imposed on them due to differential thermal expansion. These forces must be less than the allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equations (App A or UW-20). Tube stresses are also checked against the criteria in section UHX.. Finally, discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables are exceeded, CodeCalc will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity of the integral component is considered. Typically, when this iteration is performed, the stress values will decrease below their allowable values. If for any reason they do not, the geometry of the unit must be reconsidered. If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the overall tubesheet thickness. Bending stress at the junction of shell/channel and tubesheet can also be reduced by having a local shell band adjacent to the tubesheet.

CodeCalc User's Guide

211

ASME Tubesheets Display of Results on Status Bar

Designing a Thick Expansion Joint in the Tubesheet Module:

After you input the thick expansion joint geometry in the Tubesheet module, the program uses the following process to design the expansion joint: 1. Compute the expansion joint spring rate 2. Use the expansion joint spring rate in the fixed tubesheet calculations 3. Use the results of the tubesheet calculation, along with the prime pressures, Ps, Pt, and Pd (computed using the TEMA standard) to compute the expansion joint stresses. 4. Run a corresponding expansion joint calculation for each tubesheet load case. The program displays the results for the worst case (detailed results are also available).

Tubesheet MAWP and MAPnc

The program will compute the MAWP, maximum allowable working pressure for both the shellside and tubeside. The MAPnc is maximum allowable pressure in the new and cold condition. This is also computed for both sides. If a thick (flanged and flued) expansion joint is specified then MAWP/MAPnc will also be computed for it. Program computes MAWP/MAPnc by setting the pressure on one side to 0 and then iteratively changing the pressure on the other side to find the maximum permissible pressure. The summary table is provided with these maximum pressures and corresponding stress ratios for the various stress conditions.

212

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 11

Horizontal Vessels
Home tab: Components > Add New Horizontal Vessel Calculates stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by the combination of internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings. If included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE-98/02,95 93, UBC-97/94, IBC 2003 and earthquake will be included. The program is based on Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports, The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and subsequent interpretations of that work. This is also called Zick's Analysis.

In This Section

Saddle Wear Plate Design............................................................. 213 Vessel Tab ..................................................................................... 216 Shell/Head Tab .............................................................................. 218 Saddle/Wear Tab ........................................................................... 220 Saddle Webs and Base Plate Dialog Box ..................................... 220 Stiffening Ring Tab (Horizontal Vessels) ....................................... 221 Longitudinal Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) ................................ 222 Seismic Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) ....................................... 223 Wind Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) ........................................... 224 Results ........................................................................................... 226

Saddle Wear Plate Design

The horizontal vessels considered by CodeCalc are assumed to have saddle supports. One of the problems with this type of support is the high localized stress, which exists in the vessel in the region of saddles. Typically, the highest stress is the outside circumferential stress at the saddle horn. The ASME code does not address the details of saddle support design, nor does it offer guidance in the computation of the resulting vessel stresses. Instead, the code directs designers to other references for these methods. To date, the design of saddle supports and their associated stresses are based on past practice and experience, without theoretical analysis. A recent paper published in the Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology addresses the issue of local vessel stresses due to saddle supports. This paper (Effectiveness of Wear Plate at the Saddle Support, Ong Lin Seng, Transactions of the ASME, Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology, Vol 114, February 1992) provides a method for the estimation of the wear plate thickness, extension above the saddle horn, and the amount of stress reduction. (It is interesting to note that this paper suggests some of Zick's recommendations are non-conservative.) This optimum thickness of the wear plate is a function of the mean radius of vessel, the thickness of vessel, and the width of wear plate. The optimum wear plate thickness is determined for both welded and non-welded conditions, with wear plate angular extensions of 5, 10, and 15 degrees. Restrictions of this method: 1. The saddle angle must be greater than 120 degrees. Saddle angles of 120 degrees with an appropriate wear plate can result in a 15 to 40 percent stress reduction at horn of the saddle. Larger saddle angles cause a greater stress reduction for the same wear plate ratios.

CodeCalc User's Guide

213

Horizontal Vessels
2. The value of (r/b) * sqrt(r/t) must be between 10 and 60, when this term is not within this range, no thickness will be selected. (r = mean radius of the vessel, b = width of the wear plate, t = thickness of the vessel) The conclusions drawn in this paper are: 1. The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent when a wear plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and extends at least 5 degrees above the saddle horn. 2. The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate. 3. The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle. 4. A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.

214

CodeCalc User's Guide

Horizontal Vessels Horizontal Vessel Geometry

CodeCalc User's Guide

215

Horizontal Vessels Wear Plate and Saddle Details for a Typical Horizontal Tank

Vessel Tab
Item Number - Type an item number for the horizontal vessel. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional, but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Vessel Design Pressure - Enter the pressure under which the horizontal vessel is operating. A positive entry indicates internal pressure while a negative number indicates external pressure. No external pressure check for adequate wall thickness will be performed. Use the shell program and analyze the geometry before using the HORIZVES module. Vessel Design Temperature - Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly. Corrosion Allowance - Enter the allowance given for corrosion. The corrosion allowance cannot be greater than the vessel wall thickness, but it must be greater than zero (0). Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16"

Horizontal Vessels
Shell Diameter - Enter the shell diameter with respect to the shell and head diameter basis. The diameter must be greater than 0 and greater than 2.0 times the wall thickness. Shell Length, Tangent-to-Tangent - Enter the length of the cylindrical shell from tangent-to-tangent. Shell Thickness - Enter the un-corroded thickness of the shell. The software will automatically corrode the wall thickness as necessary. Some common thickness values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" 0.3750 - 3/8" 0.4375 = 7/16" 0.5000 - 1/2" 0.6250 - 5/8" 0.7500 - 3/4" 0.8750 - 7/8" 1.000 - 1" Shell Joint Efficiency - Enter the seam efficiency of the shell. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.0. This entry is used to compute the required thickness of the shell. Value 1.00 0.85 0.70 Result Full radiography Spot X-Ray No - Radiography

Type of Head - Select the type of head that is used on the vessel ends: Elliptical, Torispherical, Hemispherical, or Flat. If you select Flat, the software presumes the head is round and the same diameter as the shell. Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Head - The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1, elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0. Knuckle Ratio (L/r) for Torisperical Heads - The knuckle ratio for a torispherical head is defined as the crown radius of the head divided by the knuckle radius. This ratio is typically 16.6667:1, which means that you would enter a value of 16.667. Because this is a ratio, this value is unitless. Crown Radius for Torisperical Heads - Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head in this cell. Refer to Shells and Heads (on page 49). Head Thickness - Enter the uncorroded thickness of the head. The value must be greater than 0.0. Effects of corrosion are handled automatically. Head Joint Efficiency - Enter the seam efficiency of the shell. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.0. This entry is used to compute the required thickness of the shell. Value 1.00 Result Full radiography

CodeCalc User's Guide

219

Horizontal Vessels
0.85 0.70 Spot X-Ray No - Radiography

Shell/Head Diameter Basis - Select one of the following: OD (outside diameter) or ID (inside diameter).

Saddle/Wear Tab
Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent - Enter the length from the vessel tangent to the saddle support. This distance must be positive and less than 1/2 of the vessel tangent-to-tangent length. Saddle Width - Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact with the vessel. This dimension is also the width of the side ribs. It is noted as dimension b in most pressure vessel text literature and is shown in the way in the CodeCalc manual. It is also dimension Gb in the rib dimension illustration. Saddle Bearing Angle - Enter the number of degrees that the saddle bears on the shell surface. Valid entries range from 120- to 180-degrees. Wear Pad Thickness - Enter the thickness of the wear pad, if there is one on the vessel. The wear pad is generally a rectangular piece of pipe or plate that is bent to conform to the outside of the vessel. The wear pad fits in between the saddle support and the vessel wall. Its function is to reduce local stresses in the area of the saddle support at the vessel wall. If the distance from the vessel tangent to the saddle location is less than or equal to the shell radius/2.0 and the wear pad extension above the horn of the saddle is greater than the shell radius divided by 10.0, then the thickness of the wear pad will be included. If this is not the case then the shell thickness, ca, will be used. Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle - If the vessel has a wear pad and it extends above the horn of the saddle, enter that extension distance here. For more information on wear pads, see Wear Pad Thickness. Wear Pad Width - Enter the width of the wear pad, if one exists. The width of the wear pad is measured along the long axis of the vessel. The wear pad is usually slightly wider than the saddle support.

Saddle Webs and Base Plate Dialog Box

Baseplate Length - Enter the length of the base plate. This is typically referred to as dimension A. This value is usually close to the diameter of the vessel. Baseplate Thickness - Enter the thickness of the baseplate. If you want to consider any external corrosion or erosion, enter the corroded thickness value, instead of the uncorroded value. The baseplate thickness will be computed using a beam bending type equation found in pressure vessel texts. The baseplate thickness is not a function of the number of ribs. Baseplate Width - Enter the width of the base plate. This is the short dimension. Number of Ribs (including outside ribs) - Enter the number of ribs in your design. This number should include the outside ribs. Rib Thickness - Enter the thickness of the ribs. The ribs run in a direction that is parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Any external corrosion allowance should be taken into account when this value is entered.

220

CodeCalc User's Guide

Horizontal Vessels
Web Thickness - Enter the thickness of the Webs. The webs run in a direction perpendicular to the long axis of the vessel. Any external corrosion should be taken into account when this value is entered. Web Location - Specify the web location. Center webs run through the middle of the base plate, whereas Side webs run along the edge of the base plate. Height of Center Web - Enter the height of the center web as it extends from the bottom of the base to the shell ID (inside diameter). Design Temperature of Saddle/Baseplate - Enter the temperature at which the vessel will be operating. The temperature will be used to determine the allowable stress of the material chosen. If the temperature is changed, the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature will change accordingly. Saddle/Baseplate/Web/Rib Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Stiffening Ring Tab (Horizontal Vessels)

Stiffening Ring Location - Select OD (outside diameter) if the stiffening rings are located on the outside of the vessel; if the rings are located inside the vessel, then select ID (inside diameter). Stiffening Ring Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Stem of Tee Stiffener, Height (Corroded) - Enter the stem height (in inches) of the tee stiffener.

CodeCalc User's Guide

221

Horizontal Vessels
Stem of Tee Stiffener, Thickness (Corroded) - Enter the stem thickness (in inches) of the tee stiffener. Cross of Tee Stiffener, Width (Corroded) -Enter the cross width (in inches) of the tee stiffener. Cross of Tee Stiffener, Thickness (Corroded) - Enter the cross thickness (in inches) of the tee stiffener. Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring - Enter the moment of inertia of the ring about its neutral axis. For typical cross-sections, this property can be calculated or looked up in a handbook--such as the AISC steels handbook-- that lists properties of steel shapes. If the stiffening ring properties cannot be defined in any other way, you can use the options in the Generic Ring Properties section to define the required values. Cross Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring - Enter the user-defined cross-sectional area of the ring. This number can be calculated or "looked up" in a steels handbook, such as the AISC steels handbook. Distance to Ring Centroid from Shell Surface - Enter the distance to the centroid of the beam section--I, T, and so forth--that is used to reinforce the cone/cylinder junction. You can usually find this information in the Manual of Steel Construction for common beam sections. Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface - Do one of the following: If the stiffening ring is on the outside of the vessel, then enter the distance from the outside shell surface to the top most part of the ring. If the ring is on the inside of the vessel, then enter the distance from the inner surface of the shell to the top of the ring.

Longitudinal Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels)

Friction Coefficient Mu - Enter the friction coefficient between the saddle and the foundation. The frictional force is caused by expansions and contraction of the vessel shell if the operating system varies from the atmospheric temperature. The following table shows some values of friction coefficient, taken from Pressure Vessel Design Manual by Dennis R. Moss 2nd edition, page 156. Surfaces Lubricated Steel-to-Concrete Steel-to-Steel Lubrite-to-Steel Temperature over 500-degrees (F) Temperature 500-degrees (F) or less Bearing pressure less than 500 psi Teflon-to-Teflon Bearing pressure 800 psi or more Bearing pressure 300 psi or less Friction Factor (mm) 0.45 0.40 0.15 0.10 0.15 0.06 0.1

User-Defined Longitudinal Force - Enter any additional longitudinal force acting on the horizontal vessel. The largest of the longitudinal forces--user-defined, Wind/Seismic, and due to friction--are used for designing the horizontal vessel. Examples can be prior deflection or turbo bundle pullout load for a heat exchanger.

222

CodeCalc User's Guide

Horizontal Vessels

Seismic Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels)

Seismic Zone Identifier - Select the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in ASCE #7 and reproduced in the accompanying illustration. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. An Identifier of 5 (Zone 4) will produce the highest saddle load reactions. These values are derived from UBC. The basic equation for lateral G force is : Cs = Z I C / Rw : Rw = 3, C = 2.75, I = 1.0
Seismic Zone 0 1 2a 2b 3 4 Cs 0.0 0.069 0.138 0.184 0.275 0.367

The following illustration shows a seismic risk map of the United States from the ASCE code:

User-Entered Seismic Factor Cs - When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or at 0, the software uses the following table of coefficients:
Zone 0 1 Cs 0.0 0.069

CodeCalc User's Guide

Figure 49: Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Vessel Type A2)

230

CodeCalc User's Guide

CodeCalc User's Guide

237

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Figure 57: Circular vessel stayed by single diametral plate (Vessel Type C1)

Vessel Tab ..................................................................................... 239 Short Side Tab ............................................................................... 256 Long Side Tab ............................................................................... 258 Reinforcing Bar Options ................................................................. 260 Reinforcing Section Options .......................................................... 261 Results ........................................................................................... 261

In This Section

238

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Vessel Tab
Item Number - Type an item number for the rectangular vessel. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional, but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Design Internal Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure. For vessel type C1, this is the entry for P1.

Figure 58: Design Internal Pressure for Type C1

If analyzing vessel type C1, be aware that the P1 value is associated with only one of the two chambers. If both chambers are operating at the same pressure, then an equal value must be entered for P2. Design Temperature - Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The software automatically updates the materials properties for built-in materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses manually, you are responsible for updating them for the given temperature. Shell Section Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Vessel Corrosion Allowance - Enter the allowance given for corrosion. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter of the vessel and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of the stay plate/bar.

CodeCalc User's Guide

239

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Figure Number for Type of Vessel - Enter the ID of the type of rectangular vessel to be analyzed. The possible ID types are as follows:
ID Number Figure 13-2 from ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 13

240

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

CodeCalc User's Guide

241

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

242

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Figure 13-2 (a)(7) is of a vessel with single central stay plate. This type can also be used for vessels with unequal compartments as shown in Figures 13-2(a) (9/10), by using the maximum dimension (h) from among the two compartments.

A7-B

Same as item number A7 but with Stay bars.

CodeCalc User's Guide

243

Design External Pressure - Enter the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external pressure calculations performed. When entered, external pressure stress calculations, as well as vessel stability calculations, will be performed. Modulus of Elasticity - When there is an external pressure value, enter the elastic modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature. Length of Vessel - Enter the length dimension of vessel. This entry is required for vessel type C1 and for the external pressure calculations in vessel types A1 and A2.

Figure A2 Dialog Box

Modulus of Elasticity - When there is an external pressure value, enter the elastic modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature. Design External Pressure - Enter the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external pressure calculations performed. When entered, external pressure stress calculations, as well as vessel stability calculations, will be performed. Length of Vessel - Enter the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external pressure calculations performed. When entered, external pressure stress calculations, as well as vessel stability calculations, will be performed. Min. Thick of 2nd Long-Side Plate - Enter either the minimum thickness of the second long-side plate used to build the vessel or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. This option is only used in the analysis of vessel type A2 (Figure B). Appendix 13 allows vessels of this type to have differing long-side thickness. This option is required if you are analyzing vessel type A2. Radius of Corner Section - Type the radius of the corner section for vessels A3 and A5. The software assumes each of the corner sections to have equivalent radii. Stay Plate/Reinforcement Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Pitch Distance Between Reinforcing Members - Type the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be greater than or equal to the width of the reinforcing member. C-Factor (From UG-47) - Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47; the default value is 2.1.

CodeCalc User's Guide

247

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Delta - Type the material parameter used to calculate pitch. The following materials are listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):
Material Carbon Steel Austenitic SS Ni-Cr-Fe Ni-Fe-Cr Aluminum Nickel Copper Unalloyed Titanium English 6000 5840 6180 6030 3560 5720 4490 SI 15754.54 15334.42 16227.17 15833.31 9347.69 15019.33 11789.65

Min Thick/Dia of Stay Plate/Rod (t4) - Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a stayed vessel. This is a required entry when you are analyzing vessel types A7, A7-B, A8, A8-B, B3, or B3-B. Stay Plate Corrosion Allowance - Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter of the vessel and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of the stay plate/bar. The stay plate/bar will be corroded twice to account for the fact that they are exposed to fluid on both sides. Consequently, enter the corrosion allowance of only one side. Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Is the Stay Plate Welded to the End Plate? - Check this box for the software to perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side length. If you do not check this box, the software uses the dimensions of the compartment formed by the stay plate. Pitch Distance Between Bars of Diameter - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. C-Factor (From UG-47) - Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47; the default value is 2.1. Stay Plate/Reinforcement Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

CodeCalc User's Guide

251

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Is the Stay Plate Welded to the End Plate? - Check this box for the software to perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side length. If you do not check this box, the software uses the dimensions of the compartment formed by the stay plate. Pitch Distance Between Bars of Diameter t3 - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. Pitch Distance Between Bars of Diameter t4 - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. Stay Plate/Reinforcement Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

The stay plate/bar will be corroded twice to account for the fact that they are exposed to fluid on both sides. Consequently, enter the corrosion allowance of only one side. Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Is the Stay Plate Welded to the End Plate? - Check this box for the software to perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side length. If you do not check this box, the software uses the dimensions of the compartment formed by the stay plate.

252

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Pitch Distance Between Bars of Diameter t3 - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. Pitch Distance Between Bars of Diameter t4 - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. C-Factor (From UG-47) - Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47; the default value is 2.1. Stay Plate/Reinforcement Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Pitch Distance Between Reinforcing Members - Type the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be greater than or equal to the width of the reinforcing member. C-Factor (From UG-7) - Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47; the default value is 2.1. Delta - Type the material parameter used to calculate pitch. The following materials are listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):
Material Carbon Steel Austenitic SS Ni-Cr-Fe Ni-Fe-Cr Aluminum Nickel Copper Unalloyed Titanium English 6000 5840 6180 6030 3560 5720 4490 SI 15754.54 15334.42 16227.17 15833.31 9347.69 15019.33 11789.65

CodeCalc User's Guide

253

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

The stay plate/bar will be corroded twice to account for the fact that they are exposed to fluid on both sides. Consequently, enter the corrosion allowance of only one side. Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Is the Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate - Check this box for the software to perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side length. If you do not check this box, the software uses the dimensions of the compartment formed by the stay plate.

Figure B3-B Dialog Box

254

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Stay Plate Corrosion Allowance - Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter of the vessel and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of the stay plate/bar. The stay plate/bar will be corroded twice to account for the fact that they are exposed to fluid on both sides. Consequently, enter the corrosion allowance of only one side. Some common corrosion allowance values are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Is the Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate? - Check this box for the software to perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side length. If you do not check this box, the software uses the dimensions of the compartment formed by the stay plate. Pitch Distance Between Bars - Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars. C-Factor (From UG-47) - Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47; the default value is 2.1. Vessel Radius - Enter the inside radius of vessel type C1. Length of Vessel - Enter the length dimension of vessel. This entry is required for vessel type C1 and for the external pressure calculations in vessel types A1 and A2. Pressure in 2nd Compartment - Type the internal pressure of the second compartment in vessel C1. You must enter an internal design pressure that is less than or equal to P1. In the event that the two compartments have equivalent pressure, the value entered for P2 must equal the value entered for P1. If left blank, a value of zero is used for P2. Stay Plate/Reinforcement Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

CodeCalc User's Guide

255

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Short Side Tab

Short-Side Length Dimension (H, L1, Le, or 2R) - Enter the design length of the short-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the particular vessel being analyzed as indicated in the following table:
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A7-B A8 A8-B B1 B2 B3 B3-B C1 H - Inside length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side of vessel L1 - Half-length of short-side minus the corner radius H - Inside length of short-side of vessel L3 - Half-length of short-side of vessel L3 - Half-length of short-side of vessel h - Inside length of short-side of vessel h - Inside length of short-side of vessel h - Inside length of short-side of vessel h - Inside length of short-side of vessel 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side *** No Entry Required ***

Min. Thick of Short-Side Plates (t1) - Enter the minimum thickness of the short-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a required entry for all vessel types.
When the Code specifies a single thickness (A3 and C1), the short-side thickness is used for both t1 and t2.

Short-Side Joint Efficiency Factor (Mid-Side) - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead, the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are: 1.00 Full Radiography 0.85 Spot X - Ray 0.70 No - Radiography For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12. Corner Section Joint Efficiency Factor - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead, the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are: 1.00 Full Radiography

256

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

0.85 Spot X - Ray 0.70 No - Radiography

For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12. Threaded Holes in Short Side Plate? - If the plate has uniform or multi-diameter holes, check this option to enter the pitch, diameter, and depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in order to adjust the calculated actual stress values. Center to Center Distance Between Holes - If the plate has uniform or multi-diameter holes, check this option to enter the pitch, diameter, and depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in order to adjust the calculated actual stress values. Diameter of Hole - Type the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry.

Figure 60: Hole Diameter to Corresponding Lengths and Center-to-Center

The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size. Depth of Hole - Type the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry.

Figure 61: Hole Diameter to Corresponding Lengths and Center-to-Center

The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness. Ligament Efficiencies - Enter ligament efficiencies for tube spacing. Distance from Neutral Axis - Enter the neutral axis distance. Type of Short-Side Reinforcement - Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel.

CodeCalc User's Guide

257

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

None - No reinforcing ring. Bar - Enter the width and thickness of the bar. Section - Enter the moment of inertia, cross-sectional area, and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam.

Long Side Tab

Long-Side Length Dimension (h, L2, L4, or 2R) - Enter the design length of the long-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the particular vessel being analyzed as indicated in the following table:
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A7-B A8 A8-B B1 B2 B3 B3-B C1 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side vessel L2 - Half-length of long-side minus the corner radius h - Inside length of long-side of vessel L4 - Half-length of long-side L4 - Half-length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side of vessel h - Inside length of long-side of vessel L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel *** No Entry Required ***

Min. Thick of Long-Side Plates (t2) - Enter the minimum thickness of the long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a required entry for all vessel types.
Per Appendix 13, vessels A3 and C1 (Figure 20C and 20K, respectively) are assumed to have equivalent long and short-side thicknesses. Thus, the long-side thickness is not a required entry for these two vessel types.

Long-Side Joint Efficiency Factor (Mid-Side) - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead, the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are: 1.00 Full Radiography 0.85 Spot X - Ray 0.70 No - Radiography For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12. Threaded Holes in Long-Side Plates - If the plate has uniform or multi-diameter holes, check this option to enter the pitch, diameter, and depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in order to adjust the calculated actual stress values.

258

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Center to Center Distance Between Holes - Enter the maximum pitch distance between holes in the side plates of the vessel being analyzed. This pitch distance (P) is shown in the following illustration. This value must be greater than the diameter of the hole

Figure 62: Hole Diameter to Corresponding Lengths and Center-to-Center

Diameter of Hole - Type the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry.

Figure 63: Hole Diameter to Corresponding Lengths and Center-to-Center

The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.

CodeCalc User's Guide

259

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Depth of Hole - Type the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry.

Figure 64: Hole Diameter to Corresponding Lengths and Center-to-Center

The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness. Ligament Efficiencies em / eb - Enter ligament efficiencies for tube spacing. Distance from Neutral Axis ci - Enter the neutral axis distance. Type of Long-Side Reinforcement - Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel. None - No reinforcing ring. Bar - Enter the width and thickness of the bar. Section - Enter the moment of inertia, cross-sectional area, and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam.

Reinforcing Bar Options

Outside Distance from Outside of Vessel - Type the distance from the outer surface of the vessel to the outermost point on the reinforcing bar or beam. Length of Reinforcing Member - For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement. No entry is required for other vessel types. In all cases the program includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of inertia. Width of Reinforcing Member - Type the width of the reinforcing member. This value is the distance that the reinforcement remains in contact with the vessel wall. This value cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch, as that would indicate that the reinforcement if overlapping.

260

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Reinforcing Section Options

Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Member - Type the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as reinforcement. Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member - Type the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcement in the direction parallel to the surface of the vessel. Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel - Type the distance from the surface of the vessel to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This distance should be measured normal to the vessel surface. Outside Distance from Outside of Vessel - Type the distance from the outer surface of the vessel to the outermost point on the reinforcing bar or beam. Length of Reinforcing Member (If Discontinuous) - For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement. No entry is required for other vessel types. In all cases the program includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of inertia. Width of Reinforcing Member - Type the width of the reinforcing member. This value is the distance that the reinforcement remains in contact with the vessel wall. This value cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch, as that would indicate that the reinforcement if overlapping.

Results
The software performs the following types of calculations for rectangular vessels.

Topics

Ligament Efficiency Calculations ................................................... 261 Reinforcement Calculations ........................................................... 262 Stress Calculations ........................................................................ 262 Allowable Calculations ................................................................... 263 Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations .............................. 263 MAWP Calculations ....................................................................... 263 External Pressure Calculations...................................................... 264

Ligament Efficiency Calculations

When the side plates have uniform or multi-diameter holes, ligament efficiency calculations are performed according to Section 13-6. In the case of uniform diameter holes, the ligament efficiency factors em and eb for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are considered to be the same. In the case of multi-diameter holes (see Figure M), the neutral axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid-thickness of the plate; in this case, for bending loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other surface. If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies, the calculated stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is important to note that if the stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then the calculations for the allowable stresses will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incorrectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the allowables at the same time.

CodeCalc User's Guide

261

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Reinforcement Calculations
Reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures D, E, and J), are discussed in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses those vessels in which the reinforcement on opposite side plates has the same moment of inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4 and B2 is assumed to be continuous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous. The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing member center lines. Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using this maximum value, equations (1a)-(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum value for both the long and short-side plates. The minimum calculated value shall be considered the maximum distance between reinforcement center lines. In addition to the above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked. Specifically, the width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch. Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and reinforcement) is determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calculations are performed for locations where the plate is in compression, and then also performed for locations where the plate is in tension. Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to calculate the maximum width of the shell plate which can be used to compute the effective moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in compression. At locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch distance is used in the computations.

Stress Calculations
Stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The calculations are performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side plates. These actual stress values are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form. A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress, while a negative (-) stress indicates compressive stress. As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are adjusted by the ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint efficiency E. At the mid-side locations, the stresses are increased by dividing the calculated value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency. When plates have holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E, there is no adjustment to the stress calculations; the allowables are adjusted by the value E. Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are used in the MAWP calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on end plates is performed if a thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are performed per UG-34 with a C factor entered by the user. These stresses are not used in the computation of the MAWP.

262

CodeCalc User's Guide

Rectangular Vessels (App. 13)

Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. For reinforced members, the software compares the membrane stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress. Also, when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculation as necessary. Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted allowable stress, SE. For reinforced members the program compares the actual stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note also that when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.

stress in bending is 66 percent of the yield stress, per the AISC manual. In addition, the stress in the gusset is one half of the lug force divided by the gusset area. This compression is compared to the AISC compression allowable. Usually when analyzing stresses in the lug plate the stresses in the wall of the vessel at the attachment location should be checked. This can be accomplished by checking the box to perform WRC 107 analysis from within the support lug dialog.

Lifting Lugs
There are two types of lifting lug orientations; flat and perpendicular. Flat lugs are generally welded below the top head seam and extend far enough above the seam for the lifting cables to clear the head and its nozzles. Perpendicular lugs (ears) are used to clear some obstruction at or near the top head (such as a body flange) by moving the support point away from the vessel shell. They are also used as tailing lugs. The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described above. The length is in the vertical direction relative to the vessel. The length of the welds will also need to be entered. For flat lugs the weld at the bottom will usually be the same as the lug width. For perpendicular lugs the weld length will be the same as the thickness of the lug. CodeCalc will take the square root of the sum of the squares (W, N, and T) to determine the total shearing load. The forces W and N cause bending loads on flat lugs, while W and T cause bending loads on perpendicular lugs. The corner of the weld group is where the stress will be checked.

Baseplates
Baseplate thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe, and angle leg only, and can be activated by clicking the Analyze Baseplate check box. The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual by D. Moss and is applied to the other leg shapes. CodeCalc will assume the following for all Baseplate Thickness calculations: Strong axis leg orientation. Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension). The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate. It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of CodeCalc.

Trunnions
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed using the TRUNNION DESIGN module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design are stresses at the vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear stress, bearing stress and unity check are calculated and compared with the appropriate allowables. Local stresses at the junction can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis Selection check box. The lifting orientation, vertical and horizontal positions, and the orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis. CodeCalc assumes that the loads entered act on one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with two trunnions thus the load is divided between them. An option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting on that trunnion during the lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified by the user. Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces' magnitude and direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc. The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.

266

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs In This Section

Wind Loads
Specifies parameters for wind loads. Additional Area (Insulation Area, Structures) - You may want to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, platforms, insulation and so on. CodeCalc will automatically compute an effective diameter with the input diameter known. Wind Pressure on Vessel - If your vessel specification calls out for a constant wind pressure design, enter appropriate wind pressure here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment. If you enter a positive number, CodeCalc will use this number regardless of the information in the following boxes.

Wind Design Code Input

Wind Design Code - You can choose the following wind design standards: ASCE 7-93 ASCE 7-95 ASCE 7-98/02 / IBC 2003 UBC 94/97 For a different wind code, you can compute and enter the design wind pressure and the program will multiply the wind pressure by the area to compute the wind load. Force Coefficient (Cf) - Enter the force coefficient for vessel here. This factor accounts for the shape of the structure. This factor is known as pressure coefficient, Cq in the UBC wind code. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5 and 1.2. This can be seen as: ANSI A58.1 refer to Table 12 ASCE 7-93 refer to tables 11-14, p21-22 ASCE 7-95, refer to tables 6-6 to 6-10, p32-33 ASCE 7-98, refer to tables 6-9 to 6-13 ASCE 7-2002, refer to tables 6-18 to 6-22, p68-72 UBC-1997 code, refer to table 16-H. Importance Factor (I) - Enter the value of the importance factor that you want the program to use. The importance factor accounts for the degree of hazard to life and property. Please note

CodeCalc User's Guide

273

Legs and Lugs

the program will use this value directly without modification. Values of typical importance factors are listed below for ASCE 7-93, ASCE 7-95/98/02 and UBC 1997 standards. ASCE7-93: Following values are used for ASCE 7-93. In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11. Category I II III IV 100 mi from Hurricane Oceanline 1.00 1.07 1.07 0.95 At Oceanline 1.05 1.11 1.11 1.0

Category Classification: I - Buildings and structures not listed below II - Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area III - Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals and so on. IV - Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure Most petrochemical structures are 1, Importance I. ASCE-7-95/98/02: In general this value ranges from .77 to 1.15. It is taken from table 6-2 of the ASCE 95 standard or table 6-1 from the 98 standard. Category I II III IV Importance Factor (I) 0.87 1.00 1.15 1.15

In the 98 standard for Wind Speeds > 100 mph for category I, the importance factor can be 0.77. Category Classification: I - Buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the event of failure II - Buildings and structures except those listed in categories I, III and IV III - Buildings and structures that represent a substantial hazard in the event of a failure IV - Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc. Most petrochemical structures are 1, Importance I. UBC: UBC 1997 code values are listed as follows: Category I, Essential facilities II, Hazardous facilities III, Special occupancy structures IV, Standard occupancy structures Importance Factor (I) 1.15 1.15 1.00 1.00

274

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

Basic Wind Speed (V) - Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical wind speeds in miles per hour. 85.0 miles per hour 100.0 miles per hour 110.0 miles per hour 120.0 miles per hour Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed. Wind Exposure - Reflects the characteristics of ground surface irregularities for the site at which the structure is to be constructed. For ASCE codes, the exposure categories are as follows, Exposure Category A B Description Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 feet. Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings. Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands. Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large bodies of water. Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3 (exposure C).

UBC Exposure Factor

UBC Exposure Factor is defined in UBC-91 Section 2312: Exposure Category B Description Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site. Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from the site in any full quadrant. The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.

Lifting Lug Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for lifting lugs.

Lifting Lug Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Lug Orientation to Vessel - Select the orientation for the lug. Flat - Indicates that the lug extends in the same direction as the vessel axis. This is a flat orientation.

278

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

Perpendicular - Indicates that the lug extends radially away from the vessel wall. These lugs are referred to as ear type lugs. They are typically used on the tops of horizontal vessels. If you are working with a perpendicular lug and there will be no bending stresses in the lug, you will need to set the offset dimensions (moment arms) to 0. The program will run, but may give some warnings. This type of lifting lug would be one on the top of a horizontal vessel and the vessel would be lifted by a spreader bar equally distributing the weight load directly over each lug. Thus there would be no bending. Contact Width or Height (Perp. Lug) of Lifting Lug (w) - The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described in the lug orientation to vessel cell. For a perpendicular lifting lug this is the total height of the lug. Thickness of Lifting Lug (t) - Enter the thickness of the plate from which the lifting lug was constructed. Diameter of Hole in Lifting Lug (dh) - Most lifting lugs have a circular hole cut or drilled into them. Enter the diameter of this hole. Radius of Semi-circular Arc of Lifting Lug (r) - Enter the radius of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug where the hole is located. Typically this will be circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular lugs. Height of the Lug from Bottom to Center of Hole (h) - Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel from the center of hole to the bottom of the lug. Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole (off) - Enter the distance from the center of the hole to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular lugs, this will be to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat, this will be 1/2 the thickness of the lug. Minimum thickness of Fillet Weld around Lug - This minimum is usually the distance from the root to the surface of the fillet weld (root dimension), and is not the fillet weld leg size. Length of weld along side of Lifting Lug (wl) - Enter the length of the long welds on the side of the lifting lug. CodeCalc will multiply this value by two when determining the weld area. Length of Weld along bottom of Lifting Lug (wb) - Enter the length of the short weld. This is usually the bottom weld.

Lift Information and Loads on one Lug

Perform WRC-107 Analysis? - Indicates whether or not to perform WRC 107 calculations on the Support Lug to Vessel junction. WRC 107 only addresses rectangular, square or round attachment shapes, but other shapes (such as support lug) can be modeled by converting to an equivalent rectangle which has: The same moment of Inertia The same ratio of length to width of the original attachment. Program uses this approach to convert the lug into an equivalent rectangle. This approach is referenced in WRC bulletin 198 by Dogde as, simple and direct, but is not derived by any mathematical or logical reasoning. So, very large or critical loads should, be examined in depth. Pad Width/Length (Optional) - The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad width must be greater than attachment width. The length of the attachment is measured along the long axis of the vessel.

282

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

If the box is checked to perform the analysis and the pad properties are entered in, the program will compute the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the edge of the pad. When computing the stresses at the edge of the attachment, program adds the pad thickness to the shell thickness.

Pad Thickness (Optional) - Enter the thickness of the pad.

CodeCalc User's Guide

283

Legs and Lugs

Vessel Leg Tab

Specifies parameters for vessel legs. Number of Legs - Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal to 3 and less than 16. CodeCalc will determine the effective number of legs for bending and shear of the vessel. Length of Legs - Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel. This length term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more likely to buckle than shorter legs. In order to eliminate torsional modes of vibration, legs in excess of about 10 feet should be crossbraced.

Effective Leg End Condition Factor K (used in Kl/r) - Enter in the value of K used as the effective end condition. This value usually ranges from .2 to 2.10. For design of pressure vessel legs a value of 1.0 is commonly used. If your design specs call out for a different value enter it here. End Condition Fixed - Fixed Fixed - Pinned Fixed - Trans Pinned - Pinned Fixed - Rotates Pinned - Rotates Theoretical K .5 .7 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 Recommended K .65 .80 1.20 1.00 2.10 2.00

If this value is out of range, CodeCalc will use 1.0. AISC Member Designation (ie. L2X2X0.2500) - Enter the AISC shape name of the member used to construct the vessel. The program uses the name to look up various properties of the section from the AISC steel construction manual. to display the AISC Database dialog box. For more information, see AISC Database Click Dialog Box (on page 285). Orientation to the Vessel Axis - Each I-beam and channel has a strong and weak orientation. This means that these sections are more easily bent around one as opposed to the other. If the

284

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

member is attached such that the tangent to the vessel is parallel to the beams strong axis, choose strong, otherwise choose weak. If the member is an angle and it is attached to with one leg welded to the vessel or one flat welded to the vessel, choose strong. If both legs are welded to the vessel choose diagonal. Leg Centerline Diameter (optional) - Enter the distance between the centerlines of two legs that are opposite to one another. If there are an odd number of legs (therefore no two are opposite), then enter the diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs. If this field is left blank then program will add half the leg section length to the vessel outer diameter. This input is only used to compute the forces and moments at the vessel-leg junction, which are needed for performing local stress analysis (WRC-107). Are the Legs Cross Braced? - Indicates that the legs are cross braced. Cross bracing effectively stiffens the legs. Thus they will experience a minimum of bending stress. It is recommended that legs greater than 8 or 10 feet in length be cross braced. Are the Legs Pipe Legs - Indicates that the legs are pipe legs. Pipe Legs Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter for the pipe legs. You must account for any corrosion allowance to the inner or outer diameters when you enter this value. The inside diameter must be less than the outside diameter. Pipe Legs Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter for the pipe legs. You must account for any corrosion allowance to the inner or outer diameters when you enter this value. The inside diameter must be less than the outside diameter.

AISC Database Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for selecting an AISC member from the database. Click + to expand the entries. Click - to collapse the entries

CodeCalc User's Guide

285

Legs and Lugs

Trunnion Tab
Geometry

Trunnion Type - Indicates the type of trunnion to analyze. This input is required for performing shear and bending stress calculation, and the WRC 107 analysis. Trunnion Outside Diameter - Specifies the outer diameter of the trunnion. Trunnion Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the trunnion. Projection Length - Specifies the projection length of the trunnion. Bail/Sling Width - Specifies the bail or sling width of the trunnion. Reinforcement - Specifies the trunnion reinforcement. This input is required for performing the WRC 107 analysis. Pad Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. The pad diameter is used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using WRC 107. Pad Thickness - Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. In the WRC 107 method the vessel thickness used is the thickness of the vessel plus the pad thickness. Ring Outside Diameter - Specifies the outside diameter of the ring. Ring Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the ring.

Lift Information and Loads on one Trunnion

Lift Orientation (optional) - Enter the vessel lift orientation, for the lifting lug/trunnion analysis. This value is only used for information purpose.

286

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

Axial Force - Enter the component of the force on the lifting lug/trunnion, along the axis of the vessel. Before the version 6.3 of CodeCalc and 4.2 of PVElite, this load was computed from the weight of the vessel. Now, you must enter the corresponding load depending upon the lift position and the lug/trunnion arrangement. CodeCalc assumes that the magnitude of the applied loads is acting on one lug or one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with 2 ( or more ) lifting lugs/trunnion, thus the load is divided between them. An option is to analyze the lug/trunnion with the maximum load, acting on that lug/trunnion, during the whole lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor that you specify.

CodeCalc User's Guide

287

Legs and Lugs

CodeCalc assumes that the magnitude of the applied loads is acting on one lug or one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with 2 ( or more ) lifting lugs/trunnion, thus the load is divided between them. An option is to analyze the lug/trunnion with the maximum load, acting on that lug/trunnion, during the whole lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor that you specify. Impact Factor - When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high as 3.0 may be entered. The program multiplies the lifting loads by the impact factor.

WRC 107 Input

Perform WRC-107 Analysis on Trunnion? - Indicates that WRC-107 analysis will be performed on the trunnion.

Output
CodeCalc produces three basic types of results in the LEG & LUG module: Results for Legs, using the methods described by AISC Results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering principles Results for Support Lugs, using AISC methods, formulae from pressure vessel textbooks and other engineering reference texts. The input for this module includes some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangent-to-tangent length, the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are performing a Leg or Support Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in order to determine the loads. For evaluation of wind loads: 1. Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel. 2. Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average. 3. Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area. 4. Compute the centroid of the vessel. 5. Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid. For evaluation of seismic loads: 1. Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave. 2. Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel. 3. Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel. If both types of loadings are considered, CodeCalc computes both and then choose the maximum of the two.

288

CodeCalc User's Guide

Legs and Lugs

Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed, CodeCalc reads entire data from the structural database (AISC89.BIN). The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compression loads as outlined in AISC paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula will be shown as appropriate. The combination of stresses due to bending and compression will be compared to the allowable per AISC 1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0, it implies that the member has failed.

Baseplate Results
Baseplate analysis produces the following results: The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress and compared to the input thickness. The concrete bearing pressure is compared to the input allowable stress The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel moment equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts, you should choose a practical bolt size.

Trunnion Results
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to display a picture only. There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used: Bending Stress: 0.66 *Sy*Occfac Shear Stress: 0.40 *Sy*Occfac Bearing Stress: 0.75 *Sy*Occfac WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the allowable (1.5 * Sallow). For more information, see the WRC 107 module.

CodeCalc User's Guide

289

Legs and Lugs

290

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 14

Pipes and Pads

Home tab: Components > Add New Pipe/Pad Calculates the required wall thickness and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping Code. Extruded outlet headers are also analyzed.

In This Section

Pipes and Pads Tab (Pipes and Pads) .......................................... 291 Output ............................................................................................ 300

Pipes and Pads Tab (Pipes and Pads)

Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the item. This entry is optional but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Design Internal Pressure - Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure at which the system operates continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall thickness, and so on, involve the design pressure. Reinforcing Pad Present? - Check this box if the intersection being analyzed has a reinforcing pad. When this option is selected, the software will determine the area(s) available in the pad within the appropriate limits of reinforcement. In addition, the software will also report the required pad diameter based on the given pad thickness and the required pad thickness based on the given diameter. Reinforcing Pad Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Pad Diameter Along Vessel Surface - Enter the length of the reinforcing element along the longitudinal axis of the header.

CodeCalc User's Guide

291

Pipes and Pads

Pad Thickness - Enter the length of the reinforcing element along the longitudinal axis of the header. Is There an Extruding Outlet? - Check this box if the branch connection for this intersection is formed by the extrusion process. When this option is selected, the software prompts you to enter information required to determine the area in the extruded outlet. Thickness, Tx, of extruded outlet - The dimension TX of an extruded outlet header is the corroded finished thickness, which is measured at a height equal to the radius of curvature above the outside surface of the header. Height, Hx, of extruded outlet - Enter the height of the extruded outlet (HX), which is the dimension HX of an extruded header. This distance must be greater than or equal to the radius of curvature RX of the outlet. Inside Diameter, Dx, of extruded outlet - Enter the inside diameter of the extruded outlet (DX), which is measured at the level outside of the header. The software will automatically adjust the wall thickness of the outlet if the mill tolerance and/or the corrosion allowance is specified.

292

CodeCalc User's Guide

Pipes and Pads

Results of curvature, Rx, of extruded outlet - Enter the radius of curvature of the external contoured part of the extruded outlet (RX), which is measured in the plane containing the axes of both the header and the branch.

Figure 65: Pipe and Pad Module Geometry

Figure 66: Pipe and Pad Module Geometry

CodeCalc User's Guide

293

Pipes and Pads

Figure 67: Extruded Outlet

Branch Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Branch Material Type - Select the type of material used for the branch. Branch Dimension Basis - Select the branch dimension basis. If the actual outside diameter is known, select Actual (OD). If the nominal schedule is known, select Nominal. Pipe Actual Diameter - If you selected Actual (OD) in the Branch Dimension Basis list, enter the actual outside diameter of the pipe. If you selected Nominal in the list, enter the nominal outside diameter. For example, type 10 for a 10-inch pipe. Actual Thickness of Branch - If you specified Actual (OD) as the thickness basis, then enter the actual wall thickness of the pipe; otherwise, enter 0.0 for nominal basis. The software will reduce the wall thickness according to B31.3 if appropriate values are entered for mill tolerance or corrosion allowance.

294

CodeCalc User's Guide

Pipes and Pads

Nominal Thickness of Branch - Select the schedule for the branch or header wall only if you selected Nominal for the diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise, specify the Actual Thickness of Header. Mill Undertolerance, percent (ie. 12.5) - The mill undertolerance accounts for manufacturing deficiencies when pipe is produced. For example, if you enter 12.5, then the wall thickness of the pipe will be multiplied by (100 - 12.5)/100 or .875. This is essentially a reduction in wall thickness. Valid entries are between 0 and 99%. Branch Corrosion Allowance - Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness - (corrosion allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0. Basic Quality Factor for Longitudinal Joints - The basic quality factor is used in the wall thickness calculations for pipes under internal pressure only. These factors are listed in the ANSI B31.3 piping code Table A-1B. For seamless and fully radiographed pipe, this value is 1.0. For electric resistance welded and spot welded materials it is usually 0.85. Angle Between Branch and Header (usually 90) - Enter the angle between the centerline direction vector of the branch and header. Typically, this is 90-degrees. The piping codes do not allow "hillside" type arrangements. This angle is referred to as beta and is pictured in the user's guide. This is the smaller angle between axes. Does the Branch Penetrate a Header Weld? - Select this option if the branch pipe passes through a weld seam on the header pipe. Paragraph 304.3.3 in the ANSI piping code states that if the branch does not penetrate a header weld, the value of 1.0 for the joint efficiency is used in the appropriate wall thickness equation. However, if the branch does penetrate a header weld, the user-defined value of E is used in the thickness equation. Rate the Attached B16.5 Flange? - Opens the Flange Rating dialog box so that you can define the class and grade of the attached flange. The software uses the class and grade, along with the temperature, to rate the flange using the tables in ANSI B16.5. Class for Attached B16.5 Flange - Enter the class of the flange attached to the nozzle neck. You can choose from the following classes of flanges: CL 150 CL 300 CL 400 CL 60 CL 90 CL 1500 CL 2500 The Flange Rating dialog box displays only if you select Rate the attached B16.5 flange? Grade of Attached B16.5 Flange - Select the nozzle flange material grade (group). The available flange grades are listed in the following tables. There are certain advisories on the use of certain material grades. We recommend that you review the cautionary notes in the ANSI B16.5 code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

295

Pipes and Pads Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-2003)

Material Group 1.1 Nominal Designation C-Si C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 3 Ni 1.2 C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 2Ni 3Ni 1.3 C-Si C-Mn-Si 2 Ni 3 Ni C-Mo C-Si C-Mn-Si C-1/2Mo C-Mo Ni-Cr-Mo Ni-Cr-1Mo 1Cr-Mo 1Cr-Mo-Si 2Cr-1Mo Cr-Mo 5Cr-Mo 9Cr-1Mo 9Cr-1Mo-V 1Cr-Mo 5Cr-Mo 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 19Cr-10Ni-3Mo 2.3 2.4 2.5 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F5a A 182 Gr. F9 A 182 Gr. F91 A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F5 A 182 Gr. F304 A 182 Gr. F304H A 182 Gr. F316 A 182 Gr. F316H A 182 Gr. F317 A 182 Gr. F304L A 182 Gr. F316L A 182 Gr. F321 A 182 Gr. F321H A 182 Gr. F347 A 182 Gr. F347H A 182 Gr. F348 A 182 Gr. F348H A 351 Gr. CF3 A 351 Gr. CF8 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 351 Gr. CF8M A 351 Gr. CG8M A 240 Gr. 304 A 240 Gr. 304H A 240 Gr. 316 A 240 Gr. 316H A 240 Gr. 317 A 240 Gr. 304L A 240 Gr. 316L A 240 Gr. 321 A 240 Gr. 321H A 240 Gr. 347 A 240 Gr. 347H A 240 Gr. 348 A 240 Gr. 348H A 240 Gr. 309H A 217 Gr. C5 A 217 Gr. C12 A 217 Gr. C12A A 387 Gr. 91 Cl.2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 Forgings A 105 A 350 Gr. LF2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 350 Gr. LF3 A 316 Gr. WCC A 352 Gr. LCC A 352 Gr. LC2 A 352 Gr. LC3 A 352 Gr. LCB A 203 Gr. B A 203 Gr. E A 515 Gr. 65 A 516 Gr. 65 A 203 Gr. A A 203 Gr. D Castings A 216 Gr. WCB Plates A 515 Gr. 70 A 516 Gr. 70 A 537 Cl. 1

A 217 Gr. WC1 A 352 Gr. LC1 A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 182 Gr. F1 A 182 Gr. F2

1.4 1.5 1.7

A 515 Gr. 60 A 516 Gr. 60 A 204 Gr. A A 204 Gr. B A 217 Gr. WC4 A 217 Gr. WC5 A 217 Gr. WC6 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2 A 204 Gr. C

1.9 1.10 1.11 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.17 2.1 2.2

A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2 A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3

2.6

23Cr-12Ni

296

CodeCalc User's Guide

Pipes and Pads

2.7 2.8 25Cr-20Ni 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N 25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N 24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V 25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W 23Cr-12Ni 25Cr-20Ni 25Cr-12Ni 18Cr-10Ni-Cb 25Cr-20Ni 35Ni-35Fe-10Cr-Cb 99.0Ni 99.0Ni-Low C 67Ni-30Cu 67Ni-30Cu-S 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 462 Gr. N08020 B 160 Gr. N02200 B 160 Gr. N02201 B 564 Gr. N04400 B 164 Gr. N04405 B 564 Gr. N06600 B 564 Gr. N08800 A 351 Gr. CH8 A 351 Gr. CH20 A 351 Gr. CF8C A 351 Gr. CK20 B 463 Gr. N08020 B 162 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02201 B 127 Gr. N04400 B 168 Gr. N06600 B 409 Gr. N08800 B 333 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10675 B 575 Gr. N10276 B 443 Gr. N06625 B 333 Gr. N10001 B 434 Gr. N10003 B 575 Gr. N06455 B 424 Gr. N08825 B 575 Gr. N06022 B 575 Gr. N06200 B 435 Gr. N06002 B 599 Gr. N08700 B 625 Gr. N08904 B 620 Gr. N08320 B 582 Gr. N06985 B 688 Gr. N08367 B 582 Gr. N06975 B 625 Gr. N08031 B 582 Gr. N06007 B 582 Gr. N06030 B 409 Gr. N08810 B 536 Gr. N08330 A 351 Gr. CN7M A 182 Gr. F310 A 182 Gr. F44 A 182 Gr. F51 A 182 Gr. F53 A 351 Gr. CK3McuN A 351 Gr. CE8MN A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN A 240 Gr. 310H A 240 Gr. S31254 A 240 Gr. S31803 A 240 Gr. S32750

A 240 Gr. S32760 A 240 Gr. 309S A 240 Gr. 310S

2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8

65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 462 Gr. N10665 64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-Mn-W B 462 Gr. N10675 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr 60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb 62Ni-28Mo-5Fe 70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe 61Ni-16Mo-16Cr 42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu 55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo 55Ni-23Cr-16Mo-1.6Cu 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe 25Ni-46Fe-21Cr-5Mo 44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo 26Ni-43Fe-22Cr-5Mo 47Ni-22Cr-20Fe-7Mo 46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu-N 49Ni-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C 47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo 40Ni-29Cr-15Fe-5Mo 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr 35Ni-19Cr-1Si 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo B 564 Gr. N10276 B 564 Gr. N06625 B 335 Gr. N10001 B 573 Gr. N10003 B 574 Gr. N06455 B 564 Gr. N08825 B 462 Gr. N06022 B 462 Gr. N06200 B 572 Gr. N06002 B 672 Gr. N08700 B 649 Gr. N08904 B 621 Gr. N08320 B 581 Gr. N06985 B 462 Gr. N08367 B 581 Gr. N06975 B 462 Gr. N08031 B 581 Gr. N06007 B 462 Gr. N06030 B 564 Gr. N08810 B 511 Gr. N08330

3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12

A 351 Gr. CN3MN

3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17

CodeCalc User's Guide

297

Pipes and Pads Table 1A List of Material Specification (ASME B16.5-1996)

Material Group 1.1 Nominal Designation C-Si C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V C-Mn-Si C-Mn-Si-V 21/2Ni 31/2Ni C-Si C-Mn-Si 21/2Ni 31/2Ni C-Si C-Mn-Si C-1/2Mo A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 182 Gr. F1 A 217 Gr. WC1 A 352 Gr. LC1 A 217 Gr. WC4 A 217 Gr. WC5 Forgings Castings Plates A 515 Gr. 70 A 516 Gr. 70 A 537 Cl. 1 A 203 Gr. B A 203 Gr. E A 216 Gr. WCB A 105 A 216 Gr. WCC A 350 Gr. LF2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 A 352 Gr. LCC A 352 Gr. LC2 A 352 Gr. LC3 A 350 Gr. LF3 A 352 Gr. LCB

1.2

1.3

A 515 Gr. 65 A 516 Gr. 65 A 203 Gr. A A 203 Gr. D A 515 Gr. 60 A 516 Gr. 60 A 204 Gr. A A 204 Gr. B A 204 Gr. C

1.4 1.5

1.7

C-1/2Mo 1/2Cr-1/2Mo Ni-1/2Cr-1/2Mo 3/4Ni-3/4Cr-1Mo 1Cr-1/2Mo 11/4Cr-1/2Mo 11/4Cr-1/2Mo-Si 21/4Cr-1Mo 5Cr-1/2Mo 9Cr-1Mo 9Cr-1Mo-V 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 19Cr-10Ni-3Mo 18Cr-8Ni 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 18Cr-10Ni-Cb

A 182 Gr. F2

1.9

A 217 Gr. WC6

A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2

1.10 1.13 1.14 1.15 2.1 2.2

A 217 Gr. WC9 A 217 Gr. C5 A 217 Gr. C12 A 217 Gr. C12A A 351 Gr. CF3 A 351 Gr. CF8 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 351 Gr. CF8M A 351 Gr. CG8M

A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2

A 387 Gr. 91 Cl.2 A 240 Gr. 304 A 240 Gr. 304H A 240 Gr. 316 A 240 Gr. 316H A 240 Gr. 317 A 240 Gr. 304L A 240 Gr. 316L A 240 Gr. 321 A 240 Gr. 321H

2.3 2.4 2.5

After purchasing and installing NozzlePro, you must configure it to work with CodeCalc. On the Tools tab, select Configuration. On the Miscellaneous tab, browse to or type the installation path in Nozzle Pro Installation Folder. CodeCalc will now automatically run NozzlePro and present the results within CodeCalc. WRC 107/FEA also includes a stress summation capability. The software calculates overall stress intensities on a vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 2. Local vessel stresses for sustained, expansion, and occasional loads, along with pressure stresses, are transformed into code-defined stress components. The results, in the form of Pm, Pl, Q, and their appropriate combinations, can be compared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values.

In This Section

Design Tab..................................................................................... 302 Vessel Tab ..................................................................................... 304 Loads Tab ...................................................................................... 306 WRC 107 Options .......................................................................... 315 Results (WRC 107/537/FEA) ......................................................... 318 Examples ....................................................................................... 324

CodeCalc User's Guide

301

WRC 107/537 FEA

Design Tab
Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. This number can be up to 5 digits in length. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up to 15 characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays. Analysis Type - Select the type of nozzle-vessel junction analysis: WRC 107/537 or FEA. To use the FEA option and perform a finite element analysis, you must separately purchase NozPro from Paulin Research Group http://www.paulin.com. Design Temperature - Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly. Attachment Type - Select the type of attachment. Select Round for a typical pipe nozzle. Select Square for an attachment such as square vessel support lug. Select Rectangle for an attachment such as rectangular vessel support lug. See the WRC 107 bulletin for examples. Each selection opens a dialog box specific to the attachment type. When FEA is selected for Analysis Type, only Round is available. Diameter Basis - Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD for the outside diameter. Diameter - Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis for Nozzle. Nozzle Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Full Length in Circumferential Direction, C11 - If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C11. IN WRC 107, C11 is defined as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the circumferential direction of the vessel. Full Length in Longitudinal Direction, C22 - If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C22. IN WRC 107, C22 is defined as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. Fill Type - Select Hollow for a hollow attachment and select Solid for a solid attachment. Round-hollow attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder-to-cylinder analysis. Round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels. Rectangular attachments on spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method.

302

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

This value is only available when WRC 107/537 is selected as the value for Analysis Type. Wall Thickness - Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units. Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value. WRC 107/537 analysis uses the wall thickness. Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 1/4" depending on the service and design specifications. Reinforcing Pad - Select Re-Pad when the nozzle has a pad. Select None if there is no pad. For FEA only, select Hub when the nozzle has a hub reinforcement. For WRC 107/537, the software performs two separate analyses: Using the nozzle OD and the vessel wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness Taking the pad into account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a solid attachment. For FEA, the software performs analyses at critical locations such as the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad. Thickness (Reinforcing Pad) - Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. For WRC 107/537 analysis, the vessel thickness includes the pad thickness. For FEA, the reinforcing pad is directly modeled. Reinforcing Pad Diameter - Enter the reinforcing pad diameter along the surface of the vessel. For WRC 107/537 analysis, a solid attachment model is used and the pad diameter is used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad. For FEA, the reinforcing pad is directly modeled. Full Length of Pad in Circumferential Direction, C11P - If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C11P. IN WRC 107, C11 is defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the circumferential direction of the vessel. Full Length of Pad in Longitudinal Direction, C22P - If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C22. IN WRC 107, C22 is defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. Hub Thickness - Enter the thickness of the hub.

Hub Height - Enter the height of the hub. Bevel Height - Enter the bevel height of the hub.

CodeCalc User's Guide

303

WRC 107/537 FEA

Insert or Abutting Nozzle? - Select Insert if the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole. Select Abutting if the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall. This value is only available when FEA is selected for Analysis Type. Nozzle Outside Projection - Enter the projection length of the nozzle from the vessel wall to the nozzle flange. Nozzle Inside Projection - Enter the projection length of the nozzle into the vessel, measured along the centerline of the nozzle. Thickness of Nozzle Insert (if different) - Enter the thickness of the internally projected part of the nozzle, if it is different from the nozzle thickness. Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell/Pad - Enter the fillet leg size of the weld. This field is optional. Nozzle Fatigue Curve - Select the fatigue curve to use based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Select one of the following: S No. Low Carbon Steels 1 Low Alloy Steels Austenetic Steels 70Cu-30Ni Alloys 2 4 5 High Tensile Steels 3 Description UTS < 130 ksi To 700 F Martensitic stainless steels to 700 F To 800 F Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys to 800 F

Ni-Cr-Mo-Fe Alloys 6

This value is only available when FEA is selected for Analysis Type. . Select the shell you want Merge Shell/Head - Click to bring in data from Shells and Heads to use, and the appropriate data will be brought in from that shell for use in the analysis. Import Nozzle Data from PV Elite - Click to import nozzle data from a PVElite .pvi file.

Vessel Tab
Vessel Type - Select the type of vessel. When WRC 107/537 is selected for Analysis Type on the Vessel tab, select Cylindrical or Spherical. When FEA is selected for Analysis Type, select Cylindrical, Hemispherical, Elliptical, Torispherical, Conical, or Flat Head. Attached Shell Length - Enter the length of the shell attached to the head. Set this value based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and the concern for any stress discontinuity in this area. This value is optional. Attached Shell Thickness - Enter the thickness of the shell attached to the head. Set this value based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and the concern for any stress discontinuity in this area. If left blank, this entry defaults to the thickness of the head. This value is optional. Design Length of Section - Enter the total length of the cylinder or a conical geometry. Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads - Enter the aspect ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0. Length of Straight Flange - Enter the length of the straight flange portion for conical or torispherical heads.

304

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

Inside Crown Radius - Enter the crown radius L for a torispherical head as defined in ASME Section VIII Div. 1. For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the ASME code. This dimension is usually referred to as DR in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being OD heads, the crown radius is given on the inside diameter basis. For example, DR and IKR point to the inside of the head in the illustration. Inside Knuckle Radius - Enter the knuckle radius R for a torispherical head as defined in ASME Section VIII Div. 1. For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the ASME code. This dimension is usually referred to as IKR in many head catalogs. Even though the head catalogs list these heads as being OD heads, the crown radius is given on the inside diameter basis. For example, DR and IKR point to the inside of the head in the illustration. Length of Straight Flange - Enter the length of the straight flange portion for conical or torispherical heads. Small End Diameter - Enter the diameter for the small end of the cone. Is there a knuckle? - Select if the cone has a knuckle. Knuckle Radius at Small End - Enter the knuckle radius at the small end of the cone. The direction of a conical head or shell is from the large end to the small end. The large end is the bottom of the cone and the small end is the top. Knuckle Radius at Large End - Enter the knuckle radius at the large end of the cone. The direction of a conical head or shell is from the large end to the small end. The large end is the bottom of the cone and the small end is the top. Diameter Basis For The Vessel - Select the type of diameter to use for the pressure vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter and OD for the outside diameter. The software uses Diameter Basis for Vessel, Vessel Wall Thickness, and Vessel Corrosion Allowance to determine the mean radius. Diameter of Vessel - Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis for Vessel. Vessel Wall Thickness - Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel. You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For example, if the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type: <vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875 The software modifies this value if a value for Vessel Corrosion Allowance is defined.

Vessel Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter. Some common corrosion allowances are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material.

CodeCalc User's Guide

305

WRC 107/537 FEA

2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. For more information on material, see Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385) and Material Properties Dialog Box (on page 422). Nozzle Fatigue Curve - Select the fatigue curve to use based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Select one of the following: S No. Low Carbon Steels 1 Low Alloy Steels Austenetic Steels 70Cu-30Ni Alloys 2 4 5 High Tensile Steels 3 Description UTS < 130 ksi To 700 F Martensitic stainless steels to 700 F To 800 F Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys to 800 F

Ni-Cr-Mo-Fe Alloys 6

This value is only available when FEA is selected for Analysis Type on the Design Tab (on page 302).

Loads Tab
Convention System - Select WRC 107 to define local forces and moments according to WRC 107 conventions. Select Global to define local forces and moments in global coordinates. The selected convention is applied to the vessel, the nozzle, and the loads. For both conventions, enter values for Direction Cosines, Sustained Loads, Expansion Loads, and Occasional Loads. The software compares stresses intensities to allowable stresses based on the value for Vessel Material selected on the Vessel tab. When you switch convention systems, the software converts loads from one system to the other. WRC 107/537 Load Conventions (on page 314) Global Load and Direction Conventions (on page 315) Direction Cosines - Enter the centerline direction cosines. Enter values for Vessel (VX, VY, and VZ) and Attachment (NX, NY, and NZ). For WRC 107 analysis, the software uses the direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments for each load case from piping analysis software such as CAESAR II into the traditional WRC 107 sign/load convention. For FEA, these direction cosines are used to determine the angle between the nozzle/attachment and the vessel. The direction for a conical vessel is from the big end to small end. For WRC 107 analysis, the centerlines of the vessel and nozzle must be perpendicular to each other. The direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle centerline must not be collinear. The following global convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:

306

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

WRC 107/537 FEA

When the nozzle is located along the Z-axis, it can represented by a nozzle orientation reference vector along the X-axis and a nozzle orientation angle of 90.

Nozzle Orientation Angle for the Reference Vector - Enter the angular displacement of the nozzle from the Nozzle Orientation Reference Vector. This value is optional. For example, if the nozzle orientation reference vector is along the X-axis and the nozzle orientation angle is zero, then the nozzle is located along the x-axis.

CodeCalc User's Guide

313

WRC 107/537 FEA

Nozzle Offset from the Vessel Centerline - Enter the offset distance from shell/head centerline to the nozzle centerline. Nozzle Distance from Top End of the Vessel - Enter the distance from the positive end of the vessel to the point where the nozzle or branch centerline intersects the vessel centerline.

WRC 107/537 Load Conventions

The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the orientation of the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the vessel and the nozzle. The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:

P - Radial load VC - Circumferential shear load VL - Longitudinal shear load MC - Circumferential moment ML - Longitudinal moment MT - Torsional moment

The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:

P - Radial load V1 - Shear load from points B to A V2 - Shear load from points D to C M1 - Moment from points A to B M2 - Moment from points D to C MT - Torsional moment

317

WRC 107/537 FEA

Results (WRC 107/537/FEA)

WRC 107 Stress Summations
ASME Section VIII, Division 2 code provides or a procedure to analyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles (Appendix 4-1, Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis). Only the elastic analysis approach is discussed here. You should always refer to the applicable code if any of the limits described in this section are approached; if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists; or there are non-linear concerns such as operation of the material in the creep range. The first step in the procedure is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. Section AD-160 contains the exact method and states that if all of the following conditions are met, then fatigue analysis need not be done: The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of allowed cycles corresponding to a Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the material fatigue curve. The Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating temperature. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less than 1/3 (1/4 for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/Sm), where Sa is the value obtained on the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure fluctuations. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads (including piping reactions) does not exceed Sa from the fatigue curve for the expected number of load fluctuations. Once you decide that an elastic analysis is satisfactory, either a simplified approachWRC 107 Stress Calculations (on page 321)or a comprehensive approachFinite Element Analysis (FEA) (on page 323)may be taken to the vessel stress evaluation. ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle (on page 318)

ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle

In order to address local allowable stresses, the endurance curve for the material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information should be available. If any of the elastic limits are approached, or if there is anything out of the ordinary about the nozzle/vessel connection design, the code should be carefully consulted before performing the local stress analysis. The material Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels are given in this section for illustration. Only values taken directly from the code should be used in design. There are essentially three criteria that must be satisfied before the stresses in the vessel wall due to nozzle loads can be considered within the allowables. These three criteria can be summarized as: Pm < kSmh Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg

Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus bending), respectively; and K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc)/2. Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of nozzles, as given in Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or

318

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

internal pressure in the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be classified as Q, or the secondary stresses, regardless of whether they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and leads to a much more detailed classification: Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure) Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include: Membrane stress due to internal pressure Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments Q - Secondary stresses, which may include: Bending stress due to internal pressure Bending stress due to applied sustained forces and moments Membrane stress due to applied expansion forces Bending stress due to applied expansion forces and moments Membrane tress due to applied expansion moments Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses, the following rules apply: 1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm, Pl, and Q. 2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh. 3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh. 4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg. 5. If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated using a k value of 1.2. These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same analogy, the peak stress limit may also be written as: P l + Pb + Q + F < S a

The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below: "If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for cyclic operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135 has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design, fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."

CodeCalc User's Guide

319

WRC 107/537 FEA Example: Fatigue Curve (For Values of Sa)

If some of the conditions of in ASME VIII Div.2, AD-160 are not satisfied, you probably need to perform the formal fatigue analysis. Peak stresses are required to be calculated or estimated. You may consider using AD-560, Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design instead of Article 4-6, Stresses in Openings for Fatigue Evaluation to calculate the peak pressure stress for the opening. If all conditions of AD-560.1 through AD-560.6 are satisfied, the stress indices given in Table AD-560.7 may be used. If you click the corresponding box, the software uses these pressure stress indices to modify the primary stress due to internal pressure (hoop and longitudinal stresses). For external loads, the highest peak stress is usually localized in fillets and transitions. If you use WRC107 stress concentration factors (Kn, Kb), the fillet radius between the vessel and nozzle is required. (If a reinforcing pad is used, you can input the pad fillet radius.) The software makes a rough approximation and use WRC 107 Appendix-B equations (3) and (4) to estimate Kn and Kb. The tension and bending stresses are thus modified using Kn and Kb respectively. The software calculates the local stresses for four pairs of points (upper and lower) at the intersection. You should not direct the program to perform the stress summations. Instead, determine which stresses should be added based on locations in order to obtain the peak stress level, and then use Appendix-4 and 5 rules and fatigue curves depending on operation cycles.

The equations used in CodeCalc to qualify the various stress components can be summarized as follows: Pm(SUS) < Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)

320

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

Based on comparisons with finite element analysis, it is known that the top tip of the fillet weld on the nozzle usually experiences the highest peak stress due to external loads. It is conservative to add all the peak stresses after including both pressure stress indices and concentration factors. Note that the stress summation may ONLY be used to check stress intensities, not stress levels. You need the peak stress level to perform fatigue analysis. The current stress summation routine does not compare stress level with fatigue allowables according to Appendix 5. However, you may find the stress summation results useful to compare the combined effect due to the stress concentration factor and pressure stress indices. For more information on fatigue analysis, see WRC-107 Elastic Analysis v/s Fatigue Analysis in the June 2000 COADE newsletter http://www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.

WRC 107 Stress Calculations

The software calculates stress intensities according to WRC 107 and includes the effects of longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes a reinforcing pad, CodeCalc performs two analyzes on the geometry. The first analysis calculates stresses at the edge of the nozzle. The second stress analysis is at the edge of the reinforcing pad. CodeCalc uses the Lam equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower surface of the cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as well as the longitudinal stress equation are as follows:

For spherical shells the program uses the following equation:

For each run performed, a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading is displayed for review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the curve figure for that loading has been exceeded.

Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at Edge of the Nozzle?
Because the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses calculated at the edge of the pad may be same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type of stress has been exceeded.

What are the Allowable Stresses?

The stress intensities calculated should typically be between 1.5 and 3.0 times the hot allowable stress for the vessel material at operating temperature. If the results are less than 1.5 Sa then the configuration and loading are acceptable. If the load is self-relieving that is, if it relaxes or disappears after only a small rotation or translation of the attachment the allowable stress intensity increases to 3.0 Sa. Since many geometries do not fall within the acceptable range of WRC 107, it may be necessary to use a more sophisticated tool to solve the problems where the diameter of the vessel is very large in comparison with the nozzle, or where the thickness of the

CodeCalc User's Guide

321

WRC 107/537 FEA

vessel or nozzle is small. An example of a more sophisticated tool would be Finite Element Analysis (FEA) (on page 323).

Figure C - WRC 107 Module Geometry for a Sphere Spherical Shells To Define WRC Axes:

Figure D - WRC 107 Axis Convention for a Cylinder Cylindrical Shells To Define WRC Axes:

P-axis: Along the nozzle centerline and positive entering the vessel. M1-axis: Perpendicular to the nozzle centerline along convenient global axis. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis into the M1 axis and the result is the M2-axis.

P-axis: Along the nozzle centerline and positive entering the vessel. MC-axis: Along the vessel centerline and positive to correspond with any parallel global axis. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with the MC axis and the result is the ML-axis. u: Upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. l: Lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. A: Position on vessel at junction, along negative MC axis. B: Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis. C: Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis. D: Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis.

To Define WRC Stress Points:

u: Upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. l: Lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. A: Position on vessel at junction, along negative M1 axis. B: Position on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. C: Position on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. D: Position on vessel at junction, along negative M2 axis.

Shear axis VC is parallel, and in the same direction as the bending axis ML. Shear axis VL is parallel, and in the opposite direction as the bending axis MC.

322

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

Finite Element Analysis (FEA)

Using the interface within CodeCalc to Paulin Research Group's NozzlePro program, you can perform FEA and WRC 107 within the same module. FEA can model more types of vessel and nozzle geometries. This module uses the ASME Section VIII Div. 1 allowable stress values, which may be conservative in some cases. You can switch to Div. 2 values. FEA generates graphical results showing various ASME stress states. Important results and a sample printout are below. The ASME overstressed areas are reported. ASME Overstressed Areas Pad Edge Weld for Nozzle 1 Pl 1.5(k)Smh Primary Membrane Load Case 2 20,116 18,000 Plot Reference: psi psi 1) Pl < 1.5(k)Smh (SUS,Membrane) Case 2 111%

1. The next report, the Highest Primary Stress Report, outlines the stresses at critical location like the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad. 2. The Highest Secondary and Fatigue Stress Reports are also provided. 3. Next, the program lists nozzle stress intensification factors for use in a beam type pipe stress analysis program such as CAESAR II. 4. NozzlePro then calculates the maximum individual allowable loads and simultaneously acting allowable loads. Both primary and secondary loads are reported. Maximum SECONDARY Load Type Individual (Range): Occurring Axial Force (lb.) Inplane Moment (in. lb.) Outplane Moment (in. lb.) Torsional Moment (in. lb.) Pressure (psi) 398030. 5306513. 3358105. 2343568. 344. Conservative Simultaneous Occurring 120631. 1137199. 719650. 710264. 111. Realistic Simultaneous Occurring 180946. 2412363. 1526608. 1065396. 111.

PRIMARY Load Type (Range): Axial Force (lb.) Inplane Moment (in. lb.) Outplane Moment (in. lb.) Torsional Moment (in. lb.) Pressure (psi)

Maximum Individual Occurring 618455. 5998639. 5458219. 2938301. 422.

Conservative Simultaneous Occurring 178300. 1222872. 1182725. 847110. 111.

Realistic Simultaneous Occurring 267450. 2594104. 2508939. 1270665. 111.

Conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to-70% of the allowable. Realistic allowable simultaneous loads are the maximum loads that can be applied simultaneously, producing stresses that are closer to 100% of the allowable. Maximum

CodeCalc User's Guide

323

WRC 107/537 FEA

individual occurring primary pressure can be taken as a finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle. Nozzle-shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities are used to accurately model the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress software used to model the piping system attaching to the nozzle. You have a choice of performing either a WRC 107 or a finite element analysis from within the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element program users should visually check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the FEA results make sense from stress analysis perspective. Address technical queries regarding FEA results to Paulin Research Group http://www.paulin.com.

Examples
Examples illustrating these principles are located in the CodeCalc\Examples directory.

Figure F - Vessel and Nozzle Direction Cosines

324

CodeCalc User's Guide

WRC 107/537 FEA

After confirming that the geometry guidelines according to WRC 107 are met, the actual preparation of the WRC 107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in the WRC 107 procedure is to identify the correlation between the stress output global coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. The software performs this conversion automatically. You will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the vessel as well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure illustrates the definition of the direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle:

Figure G - Converting Forces/Moments in CAESAR II Global Coordinates to WRC 107 Local Axes In order to define a vessel direction vector, you must first designate the output data points (A to D) as defined by the WRC 107 bulletin. The line between data points B and A defines the vessel centerline, except for nozzles on heads, where the vessel centerline will have to be defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of the nozzle. In the vessel/nozzle configuration shown, because point A is assigned to the bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is always defined as the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel. For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be obtained from typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect the action of the piping on the vessel. The following data would then be entered into the WRC 107 program. You can use either the WRC-107 or global convention. The program will supply a pass/fail status at the end of the report. While on the input screen you can also toggle from one convention to another and the program will transform the loads automatically between the two conventions. Summary of Restraint Loads on the Vessel Load X lb Y lb Z lb MX ft. lb MY ft. lb MZ ft. lb

CodeCalc User's Guide

325

WRC 107/537 FEA

Sustained -26 Expansion 8573 -1389 23715 32 -5866 -65 31659 127 -5414 4235 -525

WRC 107 Local Components Load ForceP(+ Force X) VL(-Y) -1389 23715 Force VC(+Z) 32 -5866 Momen Moment Moment t T(-X) MC (+Y) ML(+Z) -65 31659 127 -5414 4235 -52583

Sustained -26 Expansion 8573

326

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 16

Base Rings
Home tab: Components > Add New Base Ring Performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques. Thickness of a Basering under Compression - The equation for the thickness of the basering is the equation for a simple cantilever beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. Thickness of a cantilever, t:

Where fc = Bearing stress on the concrete l = Cantilever length of basering s = Allowable bending stress of basering (typically 1.5 times the code allowable) There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the stress from the vessel and base-ring acting on the concrete. The simplified method calculates the compressive stress on the concrete assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Stress acting on the concrete, fc:

Where: W = Weight of the vessel together with the basering M = Maximum bending moment on vessel A = Cross-sectional area of basering on foundation c = Distance from the center of the basering to the outer edge of the basering I = Moment of inertia of the basering on the foundation However, when a steel skirt and basering are supported on a concrete foundation, the behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced by the force downward on the concrete. Because these two materials have different elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the strain in the base ring at any specific location, the neutral axis of the combined bolt/concrete cross section will be in the direction of the concrete. Several authors, including Jawad and Farr (Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, pg 428 - 433) and Megyesy (Pressure Vessel Handbook, pg 70 -

CodeCalc User's Guide

327

Base Rings
73), have analyzed this phenomenon. The software uses the formulation of Singh and Soler (Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pg 957 - 959). This formulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method: In this case, the neutral axis is parallel to the Y-axis. The location of the neutral axis is identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure (p) and the angle alpha. For narrow base plate rings, an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming that the foundation is linearly elastic and the base plate is relatively rigid, Brownell and Young have developed an approximate solution which can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle diameter c, such that: Thickness, t:

Where: A = Total cross-sectional area of all foundation bolts P = Peak concrete pressure l = Width of basering c = Thin ring diameter We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the neutral plane. Let n be the ratio of Young's moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in the base plate), an analysis, similar to that given above, yields the following results:

Where: n = Ratio of elastic modulus of the bolt, Eb, to that of the concrete, Ec:

328

CodeCalc User's Guide

Base Rings
t3 = Width of the basering, similar to the cantilever length, l, in Jawad and Farr's thickness equation previously mentioned c = Bolt circle diameter r1 - r4 = Four constants based on the neutral axis angle and defined in Singh and Soler's equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here. These equations give the required seven non-linear equations to solve for seven unknowns, namely p, c, , and the ri (i = 1 - 4) parameters. The iterative solution starts with assumed values of s and p, so and po, taken from an approximate analysis performed first. Then is determined using the above equation. Knowing the dimensionless parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s, named po' and so'). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:

This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the iteration stage are within specified tolerances --ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value, Where:

After the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate method. Thickness of Basering under Tension - On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, then there is a discrepancy on how to do the analysis. For example, while Megyesy uses Table F (Pressure Vessel Handbook, pg 78) to calculate an equivalent bending moment, Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but does not give a table (Pressure Vessel Design Manual, pg 126-129), and Jawad & Farr use a 'yield-line' theory (Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, pg 435-436). Since the Jawad and Farr equation for thickness, t, is both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation 12.13: Thickness, t:

Where:

CodeCalc User's Guide

329

Base Rings
Bolt Load, Pt:

Base Rings

Base Ring (1) Tab (Base Rings)

Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the item. This entry is optional but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. in CodeCalc can either analyze existing base Analyze or Design Basering? - Base Rings rings or design new ones. You can choose either Analyze for existing or Design for new baserings. If you choose Design mode, the software may change the following items: Number of Bolts Size of Bolts Bolt Circle Diameter Outside Diameter of the Base ring Inside Diameter of the Base ring Temperature of Basering (needed if not ambient) - Normally baserings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the base ring is at a higher temperature, enter it here; otherwise, leave the default temperature. Thickness of Basering - Enter the actual thickness of basering. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance should be subtracted from this value. The software will compute the required basering thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user-specified thickness value will be used only for comparison. Basering Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Inside Diameter of Basering - Enter the inside diameter of the basering. This value must be greater than 0 and less than the bolt circle diameter and the base ring OD. If you have specified that the software is to design the base ring, the software may change this value. A good approximation for the base ring ID should be entered when using either the Analyze or Design option. Outside Diameter of Basering - Enter the outside diameter of the base ring. This value must be greater than the base ring ID and the bolt circle diameter. When in Design mode, the software may change this value.

CodeCalc User's Guide

333

Base Rings

Base Ring (2) Tab (Base Rings)

Bolt Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Diameter of Bolt Circle - Enter the diameter of the bolt circle of the flange. This is dimension C in the ASME Code.

Figure 68: Flange Diagram

Thread Series - The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User-specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Irrespective of the table used, the values are converted back to user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1-inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1-inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.

334

CodeCalc User's Guide

Base Rings
Nominal Bolt Diameter - Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the software range from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. This value is used to determine the bolt space correction factor. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field. Also, enter the root area of one bolt in the Root Area cell. Bolt Root Area - If your bolted geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types, you must enter the root area of a single bolt here. Number of Bolts - Enter the number of bolts to use in the flange analysis. The number of bolts is almost always a multiple of four. Skirt Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Skirt Thickness - Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. The software will automatically compute the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial stress. The software uses the ASME code compression allowable B for axial stresses. Skirt Temperature - If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Usually, skirts are at ambient temperature. Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base - Enter the skirt OD at the junction of the skirt and base ring. This value should be greater than the base ring ID and less than the base ring bolt circle. Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head - Enter the diameter of the skirt at the bottom head of the vessel. Not all skirts are cylindrical. Some skirts are cone shaped and as such have different diameters at the top and bottom. Joint Eff. for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head - Enter the joint efficiency for the weld that joins the skirt to the bottom head. This value depends on the weld detail used. Typical values range between 0.49 and 1.0.

CodeCalc User's Guide

335

Base Rings

Miscellaneous Tab (Base Rings)

Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete - Enter the Nominal Compressive stress of the Concrete to which the base ring is bolted. This value is f'c in Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Water Content, US Gallons fc, 28 Day Ultimate Compressive Strength (psi) per 94-lb Sack of Cement 7.5 6.75 6 5 2000 2500 3000 3750

Thickness of Top Ring or Plate (if any) - If your base ring design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness greater than 0.0 is entered, the software will compute the required thickness of the top plate. If no top ring thickness is entered, the software will not perform top ring thickness calculations. Radial Width of the Top Ring or Plate (if any) - Enter the radial width of the top ring or plate, if any. This is simply the half of (top ring OD - top ring ID). If you enter a value for Thickness of Top Ring or Plate (if any), then you must also enter a value for this option, and it must be positive. Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss - Enter the type of top ring or plate as per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring). For more information, refer to Dennis Moss Pressure Vessel Design Manual page 129. If you specify type 3 or 4, the software will calculate as per page 130. External Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, base plate, gussets and top ring. The external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness of these components. Dead Weight of Vessel - Enter the weight of the vessel with all peripheral equipment, such as ladders, cages, catwalks, packing, and so on. The working fluid of the vessel should not be included here. This entry is optional and can be 0. Operating Weight of Vessel - Enter the operating weight of the vessel here. This includes all contents and associated hardware. This value must be greater than 0. Test Weight of Vessel - Enter the test weight of the vessel here. This weight will include the fluid used for the hydrotest of the vessel. This entry is optional and can be 0. Operating Weight of Vessel - Enter the total moment exerted on the skirt by the wind, reboilers, attached piping, and so on, when the vessel is operating. This value must be greater than 0. Test Weight of Vessel - Enter the test moment on the basering. The entry for the test moment is optional and can be 0. Operating Moment of Basering - Enter the total moment exerted on the skirt by the wind, reboilers, attached piping, and so on, when the vessel is operating. This value must be greater than 0. Test Moment on Basering - Enter the test moment on the basering. The entry for the test moment is optional and can be 0. Are Gussets to be used? - Check this option if your basering design includes the use of gusset plates otherwise, leave this option unselected. After you select Are Gussets to be used? the software displays addtional parameters for the gussets.

SECTION 17

Thin Joints
Home tab: Components > Add New Thin Joint Performs elastic analysis for the stresses due to internal and external pressures, and closing or opening of a metal bellows expansion joint typically used in piping systems and heat exchangers. The maximum combined stress is used to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the appropriate formula in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26 2007 Edition. The MAWP/MAPnc will also be computed for the bellows. Thin Joints enables engineers and designers to evaluate or design metal bellows expansion joints. Because the module uses ASME Code procedures for evaluating these joints, the calculations are acceptable to fabricators, engineering contractors, and petrochemical companies. Thus a consistent design basis and a simple way to perform the calculations will be established, and individual engineers will be effective in evaluating these critical components. Thin Joints calculates the required thickness and elastic stresses using formulas in ASME Section VIII Code, Division 1, Appendix 26. These formulas take into account both internal and external pressures, and axial joint movement. The appendix covers both reinforced and un-reinforced expansion joints for U-shaped and toroidal types with multiple convolutions and up to a 0.2 inch nominal thickness. Each curve in Appendix 26 was digitized. The program picks points off of the curves and interpolates for the results used in the stress calculations. These parameters are displayed as part of the output. If the selected joint is reinforced or un-reinforced, the software perform the various stress and cycle life computations for that joint type. Thus, there will be no extraneous output for a joint type that is not of interest. In addition, for reinforced expansion joints, the stresses in the reinforcing element and any bolted fastener, which may be holding the ring together, are calculated as well.

In This Section

Expansion Joint Tab (Thin Joints) ................................................. 341 Bellows Tab (Thin Joints) .............................................................. 346

Expansion Joint Tab (Thin Joints)

CodeCalc User's Guide

341

Thin Joints
Design Internal Pressure - Displays the internal pressure to be exerted on the expansion joint. This analysis is limited to internal pressure only. External pressure is not considered. Design External Temperature - The software automatically updates materials properties for external pressure calculations when you change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a completely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore, this temperature may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry. If your temperature is above the upper limit, the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions. Design External Pressure - Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value, such as 14.7 psia. If you enter a zero, the software will not perform external pressure calculations.
Value 0.00 14.7 Result No External Calculation Full Vacuum Calculation

Design Length of Section - Enter the cumulative design length of the bellow section. For the U-shaped type bellows, the bellow design length can be determined by multiplying the total number of convolution (N) and convolution pitch (q). The design length will also be used to perform the external pressure analysis.

Thin Joint Type - Select the type of thin joint. You can choose: U-Shaped

342

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thin Joints
Toroidal

If you select Toroidal, the software opens the Toroidal Thin Joint Additional Information dialog box in which you can enter information about the toroidal thin joint. Mean Diameter, Dm - Enter the mean diameter (Dm) of toroidal bellows convolution:

Distance Between Attachment Weld, Lw - Enter the distance between toroidal bellows attachment welds (Lw). Convolution Mean Radius - Enter the mean radius of toroidal bellows convolution (r) as depicted in the toroidal bellows. Reinforcement/Collar Information - Select this option to define ring and collar information. Reinforcement Ring Present? - Select this option to define reinforcing ring information. This option is available only if you select U-shaped thin joint type. Ring Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. This option is available only if you select Reinforcing Ring Present?.

CodeCalc User's Guide

343

Thin Joints
Cross Sectional Diameter, Dr - Enter the ring cross sectional diameter (Dr). This option is available only if you select Reinforcing Ring Present?.

Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature, Er (optional) - Enter the modulus of elasticity of reinforcing ring member material at design temperature. This option is available only if you select Reinforcing Ring Present? Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature, Era (opitonal) - Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING table C-6. This option is available only if you select Reinforcing Ring Present? Weld Joint Efficiency, Cwr - Enter the longitudinal weld joint efficiency for reinforcing ring (Cwr) (see UW-12). This option is available only if you select Reinforcing Ring Present?. Fastener Bolt Present? - Enables the entries for the bolt information section of the Reinforcing Data dialog box. This option is available only if you select U-shaped thin joint type. Bolt Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Effective Length, Lf - Enter the effective length of one reinforcing fastener (Lf) that is being stressed. This is typically the distance from the center of the nut to the center of the head on the bolt. This option is available only if you select Fastener Bolt Present?. Cross Sectional Area, Af - Enter the cross-sectional metal area of one reinforcing fastener (Af) that retains the ring. Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature, Ef (optional) - Enter the modulus of elasticity for the fastener material (Ef) at the bellows design temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING table C-6.

344

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thin Joints
Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature, Efa (optional) - Enter the modulus of elasticity (Efa) for the collar material at the bellows design temperature. This is an optional field and is available only if you select Fastener Bolt Present?. Collar Present? - Select this option to define collar information. This option is available for either type of thin joint. Collar Material Name - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. This option is available only if you select Collar Present?. Cross Sectional Thickness, tc - Enter the collar cross sectional thickness (tc). This option is available only if you select Collar Present?. Cross Sectional Length, Lc - Enter the collar cross sectional length (Lc). For the toroidal bellows, Lc is determined by dividing the collar cross section area with the collar thickness. This option is available only if you select Collar Present?. Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature, Ec (optional) - Enter the modulus of elasticity (Ec) for the collar material at the bellows design temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING table C-6. This option is available only if you select Collar Present?. Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature, Eca (optional) - Enter the modulus of elasticity (Eca) for the collar material at the bellows design temperature. This is an optional field and is available only if you select Collar Present?. Weld Joint Efficiency, Cwc - Enter the longitudinal weld joint efficiency for tangent collar (Cwc) (see UW-12). This option is available only if you select Collar Present?.

CodeCalc User's Guide

345

Thin Joints

Bellows Tab (Thin Joints)

Poisson's Ration, vb - Displays Poisson's ratio for the bellow material (vb). Inside Diameter of Bellows, Db - Enter the inside diameter of the bellows (Db). This value will normally be equal to the pipe or vessel inside diameter. Some geometries are larger in diameter than the attached cylinder. Thus, the bellows ID will be larger than the vessel/pipe ID. Dim. Af Db Dm Dr Description Cross sectional metal area of one reinforcing fastener. Inside diameter of bellows convolution. Mean diameter of bellows convolution. Cross sectional diameter of the reinforcing ring. Sketch

Bellows collar length. For the toroidal bellows, Lc is determined by dividing the collar cross section area with the collar thickness. Effective length of one reinforcing fastener. End tangent length. Distance between toroidal bellows attachment welds. Convolution pitch. Mean radius of toroidal bellows convolution. Bellow nominal thickness of one ply. Collar thickness. Convolution height.

Lf Lt Lw q r t tc w

Convolution Depth, w - Enter the distance from the top of the convolution to the trough of the convolution. This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code.

346

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thin Joints
Convolution Pitch, q - The convolution pitch is the distance between the tops of successive bellows convolutions. This is referred to as q in the ASME Code. Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution, deltaq - Deltaq is the total equivalent axial displacement range per convolution. For example, for a total design movement of 1 inch with an expansion joint that had 8 convolutions, this would result in deltaq = 1/8 = 0.125 in/conv. Number of Convolution, N - Enter the total number of convolutions. Nominal Thickness of One Ply, t - Enter the nominal thickness (t) of the plate that the expansion joint is to be made of before it is pressed or formed. Expansion joints are typically thin compared to the matching pipe. Number of Piles, n - Enter the total number of piles used to form the bellows thickness. End Tangent Length, Lt - Displays the end tangent length described as Lt. The Lt variable is required only for the U-Shaped bellows analysis. Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor, Kg - Enter the fatigue strength reduction factor (Kg) per the ASME code Appendix 26. This factor accounts for geometrical stress concentration factors due to thickness variations; weld geometries, surface notches or environmental conditions. The range of factor Kg is between 1 and 4, with its minimum value for smooth geometrical shapes and its maximum for 90 degree welded corners and fillet welds. Fatigue strength reduction factors can be determined from theoretical, experimental, or photo elastic studies. Material Condition - Select the method of which the U-shaped bellow is being made. This selection will be used to determine the multiplier Kf for the combined meridional membrane and bending stress allowables.
Material Condition Annealed Formed Kf 1.5 3.0

Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature - Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows operating temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING table C-6. Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature - Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING table C-6.

CodeCalc User's Guide

347

Thin Joints

348

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 18

Thick Joints
Home tab: Components > Add New Thick Joint Applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers, which require flexible elements to reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) are not included within the purview of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs is based upon the equivalent geometry used in Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers by S. Kopp and M.F. Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell theory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with this method. (TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61). The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions: Applied loadings are axial. Torsional loads are negligible. Flexible elements are sufficiently thick to avoid instability. Flexible elements are axisymmetric. All dimensions are in inches. and all forces are in force-pounds. Per TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61, other systems of units may be used for input and output since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its internal calculations. The sequence of calculations used by the software is: 1. Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user-defined). 2. Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22. 3. Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3. 4. Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4. 5. Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell elements per RCB-8.5. 6. Calculate FAX for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module to determine the differential expansion and shell side and tube side equivalent pressures. 7. Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7 8. Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the Code for the load conditions as noted in step 6. 9. Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary. More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate the hydrotest and uncorroded conditions. Thick expansion joints can also be designed in the Tubesheet module. This integration allows CodeCalc to automatically transfer the needed information between the tubesheet and the expansion joint calculation. Figure Thick Joint Module Geometry shows the geometry for the Thick Joints module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and RCB-8.22). Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for

CodeCalc User's Guide

349

Thick Joints
the analysis are shown. The discussion of input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure. The stresses computed from the TEMA standard are compared to their respective allowables, as per APP-5 in ASME code Sec. VIII Div. 1. The cycle life is also computed to address the fatigue consideration.

Figure 69: Thick Joint Module Geometry

Figure 70: Flanged Only Expansion Joint

In This Section

Expansion Joint Tab (Thick Joints) ................................................ 351 Shell Tab (Thick Joints) ................................................................. 352 Miscellaneous Tab (Thick Joints) .................................................. 353 Results (Thick Joints) .................................................................... 356

350

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thick Joints

Expansion Joint Tab (Thick Joints)

Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the item. This entry is optional but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Design Temperature - Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The software will automatically update materials properties for built-in materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to update them for the given temperature. Expansion Joint Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint bellows. Note that this is not the diameter at the shell, but the inside diameter at the outside of the bellows. This value is shown ID in the following illustration. Expansion Joint Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint bellows. This value is shown as OD in the following illustration. This is not the diameter at the shell, but the outside diameter at the outside of the bellows. Expansion Joint Flange Wall Thickness - Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming. This will usually be somewhat thinner than the unformed metal. This value is shown as te in the following illustration. Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint. This value will be subtracted from the minimum thickness of the flange or web for the joint. Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Offset - Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp inside corner. This value is shown ra on the following illustration. Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius - Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp outside corner (flanged only). This value is shown as rb in the following illustration.

Figure 71: Thick Joint Module Geometry

Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset - Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle. Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner. This value is shown as fb in the following illustration. In both cases this distance is frequently zero. An expansion joint with a outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance is the distance from the end of the knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.

CodeCalc User's Guide

351

Thick Joints
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius - Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp outside corner (flanged only). This value is shown as rb in the following illustration. Number of Flexible Shell Elements (1 Convolution = 2 Fse) - Enter the number of flexible shell elements in the flanged/flued expansion joint, as shown in the following illustration:

Shell Tab (Thick Joints)

Shell Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached. This value is shown as G in the illustration. Shell Wall Thickness - Enter the actual wall thickness of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached. This value is shown as ts in RCB-8-21 and in the illustration. Shell Cylinder Length - Enter the length of the shell cylinder to the nearest body flange or head. This value is shown as li in the illustration. Per TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21, lo and li are the lengths of the cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero. Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if less than the cylinder length. Shell Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell wall. Some common corrosion allowances are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4" Shell Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.

352

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thick Joints
1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Mean Metal Temperature for Shell and Expansion Joint - Enter the shell mean metal temperature along its length. This value will be used to look up the Young's modulus of the shell, expansion joint and the outer cylinder, if present. As per TEMA technical inquiry #156 (8th edition), the mean metal temperature should be used to look up these Young's modulus values.

Miscellaneous Tab (Thick Joints)

Is there an outer cylinder? - Check this field if there is a cylindrical section attached to the expansion joint at the OD. This will always be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolute. It may also be true when there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutes, as in the case of certain inlet nozzle geometries for heat exchangers. Outer Cylindrical Element Thickness - Enter the actual wall thickness of the outer cylindrical element at the point where the expansion joint is attached. Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the outer cylindrical element.

CodeCalc User's Guide

353

Thick Joints
Outer Cylindrical Element Length (Lo) - Enter the length of the outer cylinder to the nearest body flange or head, or to the centerline of the convolute. This value is shown as lo in the following illustration:

Figure 72: Thick Joint Module Geometry

Per TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21, lo and li are the lengths of the cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero. Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, because the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if less than the cylinder length. Outer Cylindrical Element Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Shellside Design Pressure - You do not need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is simply the design pressure for the shell. Tubeside Design Pressure - You do not need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is simply the design pressure for the channel. Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis. Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) (corr) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis. As of CodeCalc version 6.3 and PV Elite version 4.1, the TEMA tubesheet module calcuates the shellside prime design pressure, in both corroded and un-corroded conditions.

354

CodeCalc User's Guide

Thick Joints
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis. Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) (corr) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis. Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis of fixed tubesheet exchangers. Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) (corr) - You need to run the CodeCalc Tubesheet module program to get this value. It is listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis of fixed tubesheet exchangers. Desired Cycle Life, Cycles - Enter the number of desired pressure cycles for this exchanger. This will be compared with the actual computed cycle life of the expansion joint. Differential Expansion? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Shellside Pressure? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Tubeside Pressure? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Shellside + Tubeside Pressure? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Shellside + Differential Expansion? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Tubeside + Differential Expansion? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout. Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion? - Check this field if you want to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may want to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout.

CodeCalc User's Guide

355

Thick Joints

Results (Thick Joints)

The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant for the joint, the stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed below.

Spring Constant
The software does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring constant for the joint, which can be used in the TUBESHEET module or elsewhere to determine the effect of the joint on the heat exchanger design.

Stresses
The software calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the expansion joint and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 5, this stress should be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of the inner and outer torus (or sharp corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material at operating temperature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure - stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allowables. Thus the software only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the case of shellside pressure.

Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys, nickel-iron chromium alloys and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as follows: N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17 For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equation for cycle life is: N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17 Where: Kg = The fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for the geometrical stress concentration factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions. The range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical shapes and its maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a Kg of 1.0 when the knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thickness. Sn = The maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection. Eb = The modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The software determines both the modulus of elasticity and the material type from the user-defined name of the external pressure chart.

356

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 19

Half Pipes
Home tab: Components > Add New Half Pipe Performs required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) calculations for cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The module is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2010, Addenda 2011a Edition. Specifically, the module is based on the rules in Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. Half-Pipes first performs shell thickness calculations based on both the internal pressure and the externally applied half-pipe jacket pressure. In addition to the thickness calculations, the jacket MAWP is computed for both the input shell thickness and the required shell thickness. After the required thickness of the shell is determined, the half-pipe jacket thickness is calculated. Finally, based on the shell and jacket thicknesses, an appropriate fillet weld size is calculated. It is important to note the limitations of Half-Pipes. First, the half-pipe jacket analysis performed is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in Figure EE-4. These are the only two geometries addressed by paragraph EE-1. The analysis of rectangular or square jacketed geometries is not supported. The second limitation on the Half-Pipes module is the acceptable nominal pipe sizes. Appendix EE only includes charts for nominal pipe sizes 2, 3, and 4. Therefore, nominal pipe sizes greater than 4 or less than 2 will not be accepted in the input. Although there are no charts for nominal pipe sizes 2.5 and 3.5, the Half-Pipes module accepts these sizes and perform iterations between the given charts. Additionally, if the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size or has a formed radius, the actual radius is used in the calculations. Half-Pipes takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values and corrosion allowances are entered, and the software adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition.

CodeCalc User's Guide

357

Half Pipes In This Section

Shell Tab (Half Pipes) .................................................................... 358 Jacket Tab (Half Pipes) ................................................................. 359 Discussion of Results .................................................................... 360

Shell Tab (Half Pipes)

Item Number - Enter the shell section ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional, but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Shell Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the shell or head. The value entered should be the un-corroded dimension of the inside diameter. This analysis is only valid for cylindrical shells; therefore, inputting inside diameter values for torispherical, elliptical, spherical, or conical heads will produce erroneous results. Shell Thickness - Enter the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness value is tested to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the externally applied jacket pressure. Shell Internal Pressures - Enter the internal design pressure used in the vessel analysis. This value is used as an initial check on the required thickness of the shell. The value entered should be a positive value, for example, 14.7 psiag. Shell Design Temperature - Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The software will automatically update material properties for built-in materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses manually, you are responsible for updating them for the given temperature. Shell Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Shell Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter. Some common corrosion allowances are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4"

358

CodeCalc User's Guide

Half Pipes
Shell Long. Joint Efficiency - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This is the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in the cylindrical shell. Refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.

Jacket Tab (Half Pipes)

Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket - Enter the nominal pipe size of the half-pipe jacket. The pipe size entered must lie within the range of values supported in ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, Appendix EE. The supported sizes range between NPS 2 inch and NPS 4 inch. to open the Pipe Selection Dialog Box and select the appropriate material. The Pipe Click Selection Dialog Box displays read-only information about the selected material. If working in SI units, the proper conversion values must be entered. For example, if working with a NPS 50 pipe, the corresponding SI value of 5.08 cm must be entered. The following table lists the accepted values for the NPS. English Input NPS 2.0 in 2.5 in 3.0 in 3.5 in 4.0 in NPS 50 65 80 90 100 SI 5.08 cm 6.35 cm 7.62 cm 8.89 cm 10.16 cm

Inside Radius of Formed Half-Pipe Jacket (r) - Enter the radius of the formed half-pipe. This value is used rather than the standard nominal pipe sizes. Minimum Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket -.Enter the thickness of the jacket used to withstand the internal pressure. If the thickness value of the jacket is not adequate to withstand the internal pressure, an acceptable thickness will be determined. Therefore, if the software is used for design purposes, enter a minimal value for jacket thickness. The software determines an appropriate pipe schedule through iteration. The software-selected pipe schedules include a standard mill tolerance of 0.875 (a reduction of 12.5%). This tolerance is not, however, be included in the user input value of thickness. This allows you to include their own mill tolerance in their input value, without having this value further adjusted. Jacket Design Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure used in the half-pipe jacket analysis. This value is used to determine the required thickness of both the shell and the jacket. The value entered should be a positive value, such as 14.7 psg. Jacket Design Temperature - Enter the temperature associated with the internal jacket pressure. The software automatically updates material properties for built-in materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses manually, you are responsible for updating them for the given temperature. Jacket Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties.

CodeCalc User's Guide

359

Half Pipes
3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Jacket Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter. Some common corrosion allowances are: 0.0625 - 1/16" 0.1250 - 1/8" 0.2500 - 1/4"

Discussion of Results
Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation Half Pipes performs is the required thickness of the shell due to the internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation 1 from Paragraph UG-27 of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in this calculation. Because the exterior of the shell wall is also used as the internal half-pipe jacket wall, the corrosion allowance of the shell and the corrosion allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are displayed in this section of the output. After the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness due to the external pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is obtained through the pressure calculations discussed in the next section.

Pressure Calculations for Input Shell Thickness

The calculations displayed in this section of the output are the external (jacket) pressure calculations, performed using the input value of shell thickness. The first step in the pressure calculations is to determine the K-factor from the appropriate chart. The chart is selected based on the nominal pipe size of the jacket and the K-factor, which is a factor of the shell inside diameter and the shell thickness. Both the chart and K-factor are displayed in the output. As stated previously, for nominal pipe size 2.5 or 3.5 an iteration is performed between the charts to obtain the K-factor. When this is the case, the output will display the two charts from which the iteration was performed. The next step in the external pressure calculations is to determine the longitudinal stress. This calculation accounts for the corrosion allowance by using a corroded value of the shell inside radius, as well as the corroded value of the shell thickness. Using the longitudinal stress and the previously determined K-factor, the permissible jacket pressure is determined using Equation 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. The permissible jacket pressure is considered the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) for the input shell thickness, and it is compared to the input jacket design pressure.

Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations

The input jacket thickness is tested to see if it is adequate to withstand the internal pressure of the jacket. The calculation is based on Equation 2, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. As in previous calculations, the corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculation. If the input thickness is not adequate, the software iterates for an appropriate pipe thickness. The iteration begins with Schedule 5S pipe and continues on until an acceptable schedule is found.

360

CodeCalc User's Guide

Half Pipes
The software-selected pipe schedule is adjusted by a standard mill tolerance value (0.875). The user input value of thickness, however, does not use the mill tolerance adjustment. In the event that the input thickness is not adequate, both the selected pipe schedule and the adjusted thickness are displayed in the output.

Minimum Fillet Weld Size Calculations

As mentioned in Paragraph EE-1, "The fillet weld attaching the half-pipe jacket to the vessel shall have a throat thickness not less than the smaller of the jacket or shell thickness." Therefore, the software selects the smaller of the two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum fillet weld size. The output report indicates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based upon.

Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo of the input thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness calculations. The comparison of these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness of the shell is governed by the internal or external pressure. The next three displayed values are the jacket pressure results. The input design pressure is shown along with the MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next displayed values are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness selected by the program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.

CodeCalc User's Guide

361

Half Pipes

362

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 20

Large Openings
Home tab: Components > Add New Large Opening Calculates three different kinds of stresses acting on flat heads that have a large centrally located opening or nozzle whose inside diameter is greater than 1/2 of the outside diameter of the flat head. Geometries with or without an attached nozzle may be analyzed. This analysis module is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14. For more information on flat head analysis, see Nozzles (on page 87).

CodeCalc User's Guide

363

Large Openings
The first step in this process is to analyze the flange as a flat head and determine the total moment acting on the flange for the operating case. Since there is no gasket, the gasket seating case is neglected. The radial flange, tangential flange and longitudinal hub stresses are computed in accordance with Appendix 2. These three stresses, Sr*, St*, Sh* and some geometry constants are used to determine the actual radial, tangential, and longitudinal hub stresses. Two sets of stresses are calculated: one for the head/shell juncture, and the second for the opening head juncture. If all of the calculated stresses are below the allowable stresses, the geometry is considered satisfactory. If any stress is greater than it's allowable, the geometry must be reconsidered.

Figure 73: Attached Nozzle Geometry

Figure 74: Geometry for an Opening without an Attached Nozzle

In This Section

Opening Tab (Large Openings) ..................................................... 365 Shell/Nozzle Tab (Large Openings) .............................................. 366

364

CodeCalc User's Guide

Large Openings

Opening Tab (Large Openings)

Specifies parameters for analysis of a large nozzle opening. Item Number - Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for the item. This entry is optional but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Design Pressure - Enter the design internal pressure for the flange. The pressure is used to compute the forces that act on the inside of the flange. One such example would be the hydrostatic end force. Note that only positive (internal) pressures are considered. Integral Flat Head Thickness - Enter the design temperature for the flange. This value is used to look up the stress values for the material you have chosen from the material tables. Opening Inside Diameter (Bn) - Enter the inside diameter (Bn) of the opening. Appendix 14 states that the opening should be centrally located in the flat head. The diameter of the opening should also be greater than 1/2 of the flange outside diameter. If your opening does not meet these criteria, do not use this module to analyze the opening. Flat Head Outside Diameter - Enter dimension A as it appears in Appendix 14. It is normally the shell outside diameter Flange and Nozzle Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

CodeCalc User's Guide

365

Large Openings

Shell/Nozzle Tab (Large Openings)

Specifies parameters for the shell and nozzle at a flat head. Shell Side Hub Thickness, Small End (g0s) - Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub inside the shell. This value is g0 in the ASME code. The software uses this value to compute the shell inside diameter Bs. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363). Shell Side Hub Thickness, Large End (g1s) - Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub inside the shell. This value is g1 in the ASME Code. This is typically the leg dimension of the weld which attaches the flat head to the shell. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363). Shell Side Hub Length (hs) - Enter the length of the hub on the shell side of the flange. This value is h (shell) in the ASME Code. It is usually the length of the weld leg. The hub length and other hub dimensions g1 and g0 are used to determine the flange stress factors from Appendix 2. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363). Corrosion Allowance - If your specification includes a corrosion allowance, enter it here. The software corrects all dimensions such as the flange ID and all hub thicknesses for the effect of corrosion. The corrosion allowance cannot be greater than any of the entered shell hub or flange thickness dimensions. This is flagged as an error. Some common corrosion allowances are: 0.0625 0.1250 0.2500 1/16" 1/8" 1/4"

Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Small End (g0n) - If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head, enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. If there is no nozzle attached, then enter 0.0. This value is g0 (nozzle) in the ASME Code. The dimension will usually be the nozzle neck thickness. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363). Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End (g1n) - If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head, enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. If there is no nozzle attached, enter 0.0. This value is g1 (nozzle) in the ASME Code. The dimension is usually the weld leg dimension. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363). Nozzle Side Hub Length (hn) - If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head, enter the length of the hub. If there is no nozzle attached, enter 0.0. This value is h (nozzle) in the ASME Code. The dimension is usually the weld leg dimension. See Figure A and Figure B in Large Openings (on page 363).

366

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 21

WRC 297/Annex G
Home tab: Components > Add New WRC 297 Calculates local stresses on: Cylinder to cylinder attachments according to Welding Research Council bulletin number 297 or PD 5500, Annex G. Cylinder on sphere attachments according to PD 5500 Annex G. Solid attachments on either a cylinder or a sphere, according to PD 5500 Annex G. WRC 297/Annex G calculates stress intensities in the nozzle and vessel wall at the junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different points. Typically, stress intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at operating temperature. However, you should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for further clarification and evaluation of stress results. Because this method produces extensive output, it may be useful to produce only a summary of results. On the Tools tab, select Configuration, then click Summary on the Miscellaneous tab. This option affects all generated reports in the file.

WRC 297/Annex G
Vessel Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. 1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. For more information on vessel material, see Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385) and Material Properties Dialog Box (on page 422). Stress Concentration Factor for Vessel - Enter a value, typically between 1 and 3, for stress concentration due to weld quality and dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld. The stress concentration factor: Accounts for peak stresses - local stress risers in the immediate vicinity of vessel welds due to factors such as sharp corners and lack of fillet weld radii. Peak stresses are considered in fatigue analysis. Applies to the stress calculations in the vessel and the nozzle on both the inside and the outside of the vessel. Is used in pressure stress calculations in the vessel on both the inside and outside of the vessel. This value is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G? is not selected. . Select the shell you want Merge Shell/Head - Click to bring in data from Shells and Heads to use, and the appropriate data will be brought in from that shell for use in the analysis. Import Nozzle Data - Click to import nozzle data from a PVElite .pvi file.

Nozzle / Attachment Tab

Specifies nozzle or other attachment parameters for WRC 297 analysis. Attachment Type - Select the type of attachment. For WRC 297 analysis, Round is the only option. For PD5500 Annex G analysis, select Round, Square, or Rectangular. Nozzle Diameter Basis - Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD for the outside diameter. Nozzle Diameter - Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis for Nozzle. Wall Thickness - Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units. Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value. Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 1/4" depending on the service and design specifications.

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 22

Appendix Y Flanges
Home tab: Components > Add New Appendix Y Flange Performs stress evaluations of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form identical flange pairs. This module conforms to the latest version of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y, 2007 Edition. The analysis of an Appendix Y flange is similar in many ways to the Appendix 2 evaluation. However, these flanges have metal-to-metal contact outside the bolt circle, unlike the types evaluated in Appendix 2. These flanges typically have a soft, self-sealing o-ring gasket that sits in the recess of one of the flange faces. The loads on the flanges are generated in a very similar manner to those in Appendix 2. The actual stress evaluation, however, is different. This software evaluates flanges with or without hubs. A category 1 flange is an integral flange. The integral type must have the hub information specified. A category 2 flange is a loose type flange with a hub where the hub strengthens the assembly. A category 3 flange is a loose type flange where no credit is taken for the strengthening effect of the hub. Based on user input (especially flange type and hub information), the category is automatically determined.

Gasket and Gasket Factors

One critical value the software computes is the diameter of the load reaction. This value is termed G and is a function of where the gasket sits on the flange face. The value of G is typically the average of the gasket inner and outer diameters. For these types of flanges, the gasket ID is usually equal to the flange face ID and the gasket OD is usually equal to the flange face OD. Two other important factors are m and Y. The value of m is the leak pressure ratio, and the value of Y is the gasket design seating stress. This Appendix presumes these gaskets to be self-sealing (see the definition of Hg in the Code). Thus, the m and Y factors should both be 0.0. If any other value is entered, the user-defined values are echoed but the software uses values of 0.0 for both.

In This Section

Flange Tab ..................................................................................... 376 Hubs/Bolts Tab .............................................................................. 378 Gasket Tab .................................................................................... 380

CodeCalc User's Guide

375

Appendix Y Flanges

Flange Tab
Item Number - Enter an ID number for the item. This can be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Description - Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional, but strongly encouraged for organizational and support purposes. Type of Flange - Select the type of flange: Integral or Loose. Integral flanges generally have hubs and act as an integral component with the shell to which there are attached. Loose flanges typically do not have hubs and are attached by fillet welds. This module computes Class 1, Category 1, 2, or 3 flanges. Design Pressure - Enter the specified design pressure (P). Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature for the flange. This value will be used to look up the allowable stresses for the material at design temperature. Flange Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list. The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Flange Thickness - Enter the flange thickness. The flange thickness is shown in the diagram below.

Figure 75: Flange Diagram

376

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendix Y Flanges
Corrosion Allowance - Enter the specified corrosion allowance. Values, such as the flange ID and hub thicknesses, will be corroded according to the flange type. Note, however, that for either type of flange (loose or integral), the flange thickness, T, will not be corroded since the contained fluid is not exposed to the flange thickness. Flange Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the flange. This is dimension B in the following illustration, which extends to the equivalent left side of the flange, not shown:

Figure 76: Flange Diagram

Flange Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the flange. This is dimension A in the ASME Code.

CodeCalc User's Guide

377

Appendix Y Flanges

Hubs/Bolts Tab
Gasket Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. Gasket Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. Hub Thickness - Small End - Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as G0 in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value (for integral types only). For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness may be entered as zero.

Figure 77: Flange Diagram

Hub Thickness - Large End - Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as G1 in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value (for integral types). It is permissible for the hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness may be entered as zero. Hub Length - Enter the hub length. This value is refered to as H in the ASME code. For flange geometries without hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. Bolt Material - Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code. to open the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385). 1. Click The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only information about the selected material. 2. Select the material that you want to use from the list.

378

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendix Y Flanges
The software displays the material properties. 3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material. Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the material database with a matching name. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Diameter of Bolt Circle - Enter the diameter of the bolt circle of the flange. This is dimension C in the ASME Code.

Figure 78: Flange Diagram

Nominal Bolt Diameter - Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the software range from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. This value is used to determine the bolt space correction factor. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field. Also, enter the root area of one bolt in the Root Area cell. Bolt Root Area - If your bolted geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types, you must enter the root area of a single bolt in this field. This option is used only if bolt root area is greater than 0.0. Number of Bolts - Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. The number of bolts is almost always a multiple of four.

CodeCalc User's Guide

379

Appendix Y Flanges

Gasket Tab
Gasket Factor - The values of m and y shown in the following table are listed in ASME Section VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y, please contact your gasket manufacturer.
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Facing Column II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II Gasket Material

0.00

0.50 1.00

0 200 (1.4)

2.00 2.75 3.50 1.25

1600 (11) 3700 (26) 6500 (45) 400 (2.8)

2.25 2.50 2.75 1.75

2200 (15) 2900 (20) 3700 (26) 1100 (7.6)

2.50 3.00

10000 (69) 10000 (69)

2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50

2900 (20) 3700 (26) 4500 (31) 5500 (38) 6500 (45)

2.75

3700 (26)

380

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendix Y Flanges
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Gasket Material

3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75

4500 (31) 5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52)

II II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 8000 (55) 9000 (62) 9000 (62)

II II II II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 9000 (62) 10100 (70)

II II II II II

4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50

8800 (61) 13000 (90) 18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I I I

5.50 6.00 6.50

18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I

CodeCalc User's Guide

Facing Column

381

Appendix Y Flanges
Gasket Design and Seating Stress - The values of m and y shown in the following table are listed in ASME Section VIII Div. 1 code in App. 2. As stated in the code, these are only suggested values. For more accurate values of m and y, please contact your gasket manufacturer.
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Facing Column II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II Gasket Material

0.00

0.50 1.00

0 200 (1.4)

2.00 2.75 3.50 1.25

1600 (11) 3700 (26) 6500 (45) 400 (2.8)

2.25 2.50 2.75 1.75

2200 (15) 2900 (20) 3700 (26) 1100 (7.6)

2.50 3.00

10000 (69) 10000 (69)

2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50

2900 (20) 3700 (26) 4500 (31) 5500 (38) 6500 (45)

2.75 3.00

3700 (26) 4500 (31)

382

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendix Y Flanges
Seating Stress y, psi (MPa) Gasket Factor m Gasket Material

Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steel Flat metal, jacketed, mineral fiber filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steels and nickel-base alloys Ring Joint Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% chrome Stainless steel

3.25 3.50 3.75

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52)

II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 8000 (55) 9000 (62) 9000 (62)

II II II II II II

3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25

5500 (38) 6500 (45) 7600 (52) 9000 (62) 10100 (70)

II II II II II

4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50

8800 (61) 13000 (90) 18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I I I

5.50 6.00 6.50

18000 (124) 21800 (150) 26000 (180)

I I I

Is There a Partition Gasket? - If your exchanger geometry has a pass partition gasket, then check this field. The software opens the Partition Gasket dialog box so that you can define the overall length and width of the gasket. Length of Partition Gasket - This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated with this flange. Width of Partition Gasket - Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using these properties and the known width, the software computes the effective seating width and the gasket loads contributed by the partition gasket. Specify External Loads? - In order to compute the equivalent pressure, the external loads acting on the flange must be specified, if applicable. Normally, there would be no external loads for these types of flanges. When you check this field, the software displays a pop-up form in

CodeCalc User's Guide

Facing Column

383

Appendix Y Flanges
which you enter this loading data. Loading data of this nature typically comes from a stress analysis program, such as CAESAR II. Node Number - Enter the node number of this flange. This entry represents the node point in a stress analysis model from which the loads are obtained. Node Number is an optional entry. Axial Force - Enter the magnitude of the external axial force which acts on this flange. Bending Moment - Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment which acts on this flange.

384

CodeCalc User's Guide

SECTION 23

Material Dialog Boxes

The Material Database and Material Properties dialog boxes are available in many commands throughout the software. Material Database Dialog Box (on page 385) Material Properties Dialog Box (on page 422)

Material Database Dialog Box

Displays materials and material properties. Select the needed material. To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials. Below are examples of standard ASME material names. Plates and Bolting Stainless Steels

SA-516 55 SA-516 60 SA-516 65 SA-516 70 SA-193 B7 SA-182-F1 SA-182 F1 SA-182 F11 SA-182 F12 SA-182 F22 SA-105 SA-36 SA-106 B

SA-240 304 SA-240 304L SA-240 316 SA-240 316L SA-193 B8 Aluminum SB-209 SB-234 Titanium

SB-265 1 SB-265 26H Nickel SB-409 SB-424

If you used old CodeCalc material names in previous CodeCalc versions, see the CodeCalc appendix for comparisons with ASME code names. Material Search String - Enter part of the material name to search against. Find Next Match - Click to go to the next matching material name available. UNS # Search String - Enter part of the UNS # to search against. Select Material - Click to use the selected material.

Cancel - Exit the dialog box without selecting a material.Material Database Notes
These notes are valid for the 2010 edition of ASME Section II Part D. If using an older database, these notes may not be correct or meaningful as they are periodically changed by ASME. Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) - Customary (a) The following abbreviations are used: Applic., Applicability; Cond., Condition; Desig., Designation; Smls., Seamless; and Wld., Welded.

CodeCalc User's Guide

385

Material Dialog Boxes

(b) (c) The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. For Section VIII applications, stress values in restricted shear such as dowel bolts or similar construction in which the shearing member is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without reduction of area shall be 0.80 times the value in the above table. For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the values in the above Table. Stress values for 20 to 100F are applicable for colder temperatures when toughness requirements of Section III or Section VIII are met. An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time dependent properties (see notes T1 - T10 ) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. To these stress values a casting quality factor as specified in PG-25 of Section I or UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1 shall be applied. These stress values include a joint efficiency factor of 0.60. These stress values include a joint efficiency factor of 0.85. For Section I applications, these stresses apply when used for boiler, water wall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed within a setting. A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 is included in values above 850F. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values shown in table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain. Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are increasingly signiificant failure modes at temperatures in excess of 1500F and shall be considered in the design. Deleted Deleted For Section III applications, the stress-rupture test is not required for design temperatures 800F and below. Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800F, the carbide phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite. Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875F, the carbide phase of carbonmolybdenum steel may be converted to graphite.

(d) (e) (f) (h)

G1 G2 G3 G4

G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11

386

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 At temperatures above 1000F, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher on heat analysis. These stress values at 1050F and above shall be used only when the grain size is ASTM No. 6 or coarser. These stress values shall be used when the grain size is not determined or is determined to be finer than ASTM No. 6. For Section I applications, use is limited to stays as defined in PG-13 except as permitted by PG-11. For Section III Class 3 applications, these S values do not include a casting quality factor. Statically and centrifugally cast products meeting the requirements of NC-2570 shall receive a casting quality factor of 1.00. For Section III Class 3 applications, statically and centrifugally cast products meeting the requirements of NC-2571(a) and (b), and cast pipe fittings, pumps, and valves with inlet piping connections of 2 in. nominal pipe size and less, shall receive a casting quality factor of 1.00. Other casting quality factors shall be in accordance with the following: a. for visual examination, 0.80; b. for magnetic particle examination 0.85; c. for liquid penetrant examination, 0.85; d. for radiography, 1.00; e. for ultrasonic examination, 1.00; and f. for magnetic particle or liquid penetrant plus ultrasonic examination or radiography, 1.00. See Table Y-1 for yield strength values as a function of thickness over this range. Allowable stresses are independent of yield strength in this thickness range. Although external pressure chart title is listed for SA-537, use Class 1 curves for this specification. Although external pressure chart title is listed for SA-537, use Class 2 curves for this specification. For external pressure chart listing, use Class 1 curve. For Section I applications, use of external pressure charts for material in the form of barstock is permitted for stiffening rings only. For temperatures above the maximum temperature shown on the external pressure chart for this material, Fig. CS-2 may be used for the design using this material. A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress. For Section III applications, for both Class 2 and Class 3, the completed vessel after final heat treatment shall be examined by the ultrasonic method in accordance with NB-2542 except that angle beam examination in both the circumferential and the axial directions. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted.

G17

G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24

G25

G26 G27

CodeCalc User's Guide

387

Material Dialog Boxes

G28 G29 Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781, Alternate Tension Test Coupons and Specimen Locations for Castings, is mandatory. For Section III applications, impact testing in accordance with the requirements of NC-2300 is required for Class 2 components and in accordance with ND-2300 for Class 3 components. For Section VIII applications, these stress values are based on expected minimum values of 45,000 psi tensile strength and yield strength of 20,000 psi resulting from loss of strength due to thermal treatment required for the glass coating operation. UG-85 does not apply. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the flexibility of the flange and bolts and corresponding relaxation properties. This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement after service at moderately elevated temperature; see Appendix 6. For P-No. 10H Gr. 1 materials, exposure to temperatures in the range of 1100F to 1700F for relatively short periods of time may result in severe loss of ductility due to sigma formation; see 6-340 and 6-360. These stresses are based on weld metal properties. For Section I, use is limited to PEB-5.3. See PG-5.5 for cautionary note. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is solution treated by heating to the minimum temperature specified in the material specification, but not lower than 1900F, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 2000F, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. DELETED DELETED For Section III applications, if heat treatment is performed after forming or fabrication, it shall be performed at 15001850F for a period of time not to exceed 10 min at temperature, followed by rapid cooling. For Section VIII applications involving consideration of heat treatment after forming or welding, see table UHA-32 for P-No. 10K, group No.1 materials. Material shall be solution annealed at 2010F to 2140F, followed by a rapid cooling in water or air. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 850F and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 3 in. O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 900F and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 3 in. O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice.

G30

G31

G32

G33 G34 H1

H3 H4 H5

H6 S1

388

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

S3 For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 1000F and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 3 in. O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 1150F and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 3 in. O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 3/4 in. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 1-1/4 in. The maximum thickness of unheat-treated forgings shall not exceed 3-3/4 in. The maximum thickness as-heat-treated may be 4 in. The maximum section thickness shall not exceed 3 in. for double-normalized-and-tempered forgings, or 5 in. for quenched-and-tempered forgings. Both NPS 8 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier. The maximum pipe size shall be NPS 4 (Dn 100) and the maximum thickness in any pipe size shall be Schedule 80. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 700F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 750F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 850F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 900F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 950F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1000F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1050F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1100F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1150F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 800F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Not for welded construction. Not for welded construction in Section III. Welded.

S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 W1 W2 W3

CodeCalc User's Guide

389

Material Dialog Boxes

W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 Nonwelded, or welded if the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced section tension test is not less than 100 ksi. Welded, with the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced tension test less than 100 ksi but not less than 95 ksi. This material may be welded by the resistance technique. In welded construction for temperatures above 850F, the weld metal has a carbon content of greater than 0.05%. Welding and oxygen or other thermal cutting processes are not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35% by heat analysis. For Section I applications, for pressure retaining welds in 2-1/4Cr1Mo materials, other than circumferential butt welds less than or equal to 3-1/2 in. in outside diameter, when the design metal temperatures exceed 850F, the weld metal shall have a carbon content greater than 0.05%. For Section III applications, material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted for Class 2 and Class 3 construction when a weld efficiency factor of 1.00 is used in accordance with Note W12. For Section VIII applications, Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW-404.12, QW-406.3, QW-407.2, and QW-409.1 shall also apply to this material. These variables shall be applied in accordance with the rules for welding of Part UF. These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor. For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal, ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or eddy current examination, in accordance with NC-2550, shall provide a longitudinal weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors shall be in accordance with the following: a. for single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80; b. for single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85; c. for double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90; d. for single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00. For Section I applications, electric resistance and autogenous welded tubing may be used with these stresses, provided the following additional restrictions and requirements are met: a. The tubing shall be used for boiler, waterwall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed within the setting. b. The maximum outside diameter shell be 3.5 in. c. The weld seam of each tube shall be subjected to an angle beam ultrasonic inspection per SA-450. d. A complete volumetric inspection of the entire length of each tube shall be performed in accordance with SA-450. e. Material test reports shall be supplied. These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII Division 1 applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated tensile strength values should be multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler metal, check UW-12 of Section VIII Division 1.

W10

W11

W12

W13

W14

390

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

W15 The Nondestructive Electric Test requirements of SA-53 Type E pipe are required for all sizes. The pipe sahll be additionally marked "NDE" and so noted on the material certification.

Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) - Metric (a) (b) The following abbreviations are used: Norm. rld., Normalized rolled; Smls., Seamless; Sol. ann., Solution annealed; and Wld., Welded. The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in restricted shear, such as dowel bolts or similar construction in which the shearing member is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without reduction of area, shall be 0.80 times the values in Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) Customary. For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the values in Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) - Customary. Stress values for -30C to 40C are applicable for colder temperatures when the toughness requirements of Section III, VIII, or XII are met. An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time-dependent properties (see Notes T1 through T10). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 are used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. To these stress values a casting quality factor as specified in PG-25 of Section I; UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1; or TM-190 of Section XII is applied. These stress values include a joint efficiency factor of 0.60. These stress values include a joint efficiency factor of 0.85. For Section I applications, these stresses apply when used for boiler, water wall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed within a setting. A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 is included in values above 450C.

(c)

(d) (e) (f) (g)

(h)

G1 G2 G3 G4

CodeCalc User's Guide

391

Material Dialog Boxes

G5 Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain. Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess of 825C and are considered in the design. For Section III applications, the use of these materials shall be limited to materials for tanks covered in Subsections NC and ND, component supports, and for nonpressure-retaining attachments (NC/ND-2190). Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 425C, the carbide phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite. See Appendix A, A-240. Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 475C, the carbide phase of carbonmolybdenum steel may be converted to graphite. See Appendix A, A-240. At temperatures above 550C, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher on heat analysis. These stress values at 575C and above shall be used only when the grain size is ASTM No. 6 or coarser. These stress values shall be used when the grain size is not determined or is determined to be finer than ASTM No. 6. For Section I applications, use is limited to stays as defined in PG-13 except as permitted by PG-11. For Section III Class 3 applications, these S values do not include a casting quality factor. Statically and centrifugally cast products meeting the requirements of NC-2570 shall receive a casting quality factor of 1.00. For Section III Class 3 applications, statically and centrifugally cast products meeting the requirements of NC-2571(a) and (b), and cast pipe fittings, pumps, and valves with inlet piping connections of 2 in. nominal pipe size and less, shall receive a casting quality factor of 1.00. Other casting quality factors shall be in accordance with the following For visual examination, 0.80. For magnetic particle examination 0.85. For liquid penetrant examination, 0.85. For radiography, 1.00. For ultrasonic examination, 1.00. For magnetic particle or liquid penetrant plus ultrasonic examination or radiography, 1.00. See Table Y-1 for yield strength values as a function of thickness over this range. Allowable stresses are independent of yield strength in this thickness range.

G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16

G17

G18

392

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G22 G23 G24 For Section I applications, use of external pressure charts for material in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings only. For temperatures above the maximum temperature shown on the external pressure chart for this material, Fig. CS-2 may be used for the design using this material. A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress. For Section III applications, for both Class 2 and Class 3, the completed vessel after final heat treatment is examined by the ultrasonic method in accordance with NB-2542 except that angle beam examination in both the circumferential and the axial directions may be performed in lieu of the straight beam examination in the axial direction. The tensile strength does not exceed 860 MPa. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted. Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781, Alternate Mechanical Test Coupons and Specimen Locations for Castings, is mandatory. For Section III applications, impact testing in accordance with the requirements of NC-2300 is required for Class 2 components and in accordance with ND-2300 for Class 3 components. For Section VIII applications, these stress values are based on expected minimum values of 310 MPa tensile strength and yield strength of 140 MPa resulting from loss of strength due to thermal treatment required for the glass coating operation. UG-85 does not apply. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the flexibility of the flange and bolts and corresponding relaxation properties. This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement after service at moderately elevated temperature. See Appendix A, A-340 and A-360. These stresses are based on weld metal properties. For Section I, use is limited to PEB-5.3. See PG-5.5 for cautionary note. For temperatures above 550C, these stress values may be used only if the material is solution treated by heating to the minimum temperature specified in the material specification, but not lower than 1040C, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. For temperatures above 550C, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 1095C, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. For Section III applications, if heat treatment is performed after forming or fabrication, it shall be performed at 825C1000C for a period of time not to exceed 10 min at temperature, followed by rapid cooling.

G25

G26 G27 G28 G29

G30

G31

G32 G33 G34 H1

CodeCalc User's Guide

393

Material Dialog Boxes

S1 For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 450C and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 75 mm O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 475C and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 75 mm O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 550C and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 75 mm O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 625C and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 75 mm O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these temperatures is not current practice. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds19 mm. Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 32 mm. The maximum thickness of unheat-treated forgings does exceed 95 mm. The maximum thickness as-heat-treated may be 100 mm. The maximum section thickness does exceed 75 mm for double-normalized-and-tempered forgings, or 125 mm for quenched-and-tempered forgings. Both NPS 8 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier. The maximum pipe size is NPS 4 (DN 100) and the maximum thickness in any pipe size is Schedule 80. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 370C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 400C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 455C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 480C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 510C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 540C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 565C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 595C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 620C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties.

S5 S6 S7 S8

S9 S10 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9

394

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

T10 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 Allowable stresses for temperatures of 425C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Not for welded construction. Not for welded construction in Section III. Welded. Nonwelded, or welded if the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced section tension test is not less than 690 MPa. Welded, with the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced tension test less than 690 MPa but not less than 655 MPa. This material may be welded by the resistance technique. In welded construction for temperatures above 450C, the weld metal has a carbon content of greater than 0.05%. Welding and oxygen or other thermal cutting processes are not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35% by heat analysis. For Section I applications, for pressure retaining welds in 2Cr1Mo materials, other than circumferential butt welds less than or equal to 89 mm in outside diameter, when the design metal temperatures exceed 450C, the weld metal has a carbon content greater than 0.05%. For Section III applications, material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted for Class 2 and Class 3 construction when a weld efficiency factor of 1.00 is used in accordance with Note W12. For Section VIII applications, Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW-404.12, QW-406.3, QW-407.2, and QW-409.1 shall also apply to this material. These variables shall be applied in accordance with the rules for welding of Part UF. These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor. For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal, ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or eddy current examination, in accordance with NC-2550, shall provide a longitudinal weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors shall be in accordance with the following:

W10

W11

W12

For single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80. For single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85. For double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90. For single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00.

CodeCalc User's Guide

395

Material Dialog Boxes

W13 For Section I applications, electric resistance and autogenous welded tubing may be used with these stresses, provided the following additional restrictions and requirements are met:

W14

The tubing is used for boiler, waterwall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed within the setting. The maximum outside diameter is 89 mm. The weld seam of each tube is subjected to an angle beam ultrasonic inspection per SA-450. A complete volumetric inspection of the entire length of each tube is performed in accordance with SA-450. Material test reports are supplied.

These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII, Division 1 and Section XII applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated tensile strength values should be multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII, Division 1, or TW-130.4 for Section XII, as applicable. The Nondestructive Electric Test requirements of SA-53 Type E pipe are required for all sizes. The pipe shall be additionally marked "NDE" and so noted on the material certification.

W15

Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1B (Non-Ferrous Materials) - Customary (a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; Applic., Applicability; Cond., Condition; cond., condenser; Desig., Designation; exch., exchanger; extr., extruded; fin., finished; fr., from; rel., relieved; rld., rolled; Smls., Seamless; Sol., Solution; treat., treated; and Wld., Welded. The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. For Section VIII applications, stress values in restricted shear, such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which the shearing is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without reduction of areas, shall be 0.80 times the values in this table. For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the values in this Table. An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time-dependent properties (see Notes T1-T18). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values listed in this Table shall be applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For steam at 250 psi (406F), the values given for 400F may be used.

(b) (c)

(d) (e) (f)

(g)

396

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G2 G3 At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. In the absence of evidence that the casting is of high quality throughout, values not in excess of 80% of those given in the Table shall be used. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made to recognized standards. Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess of 1500F and shall be considered in the design. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values shown in table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain. Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 350F. Use 350F curve for all temperature values below 350F. The stresses for this material are based on 120 ksi minimum tensile strength because of weld metal strength limitations. Use Fig. NFC-6 up to and including 300F. Use the 600F curve of Fig. NFC-3 above 300F up to and including 400F. Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 400F. Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 450F. Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 700F. Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 800F. For Section VIII applications, use of external pressure charts for material in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings only. A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress. To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Section III, ND-3115 or UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1 shall be applied for castings. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made to recognized standards. Allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the corresponding core material. Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain media and high temperatures, particularly steam above 212F. The user should ensure that the alloy selected is satisfactory for the service for which it is to be used.

G6 G7 G8 G9

G10 G11 G12 G13 G14

G15

G16 G17

CodeCalc User's Guide

397

Material Dialog Boxes

G18 Because of the occasionally contingent danger from the failure of pressure vessels by stress corrosion cracking, the following is pertinent. These materials are suitable for engineering use under a wide variety of ordinary corrosive conditions with no particular hazard in respect to stress corrosion. Few alloys are completely immune to stress corrosion cracking in all combinations of stress and corrosive environments and the supplier of the material should be consulted. Reference may also be made to the following sources: (1) Stress Corrosion Cracking Control Measures B.F. Brown, U.S. National Bureau of Standards (1977), available from NACE, Texas; (2) The Stress Corrosion of Metals, H.L. Logan, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1966. For plate only. The maximum operating temperature is arbitrarily set at 500F because harder temper adversely affects design stress in the creep rupture temperature range. The minimum tensile strength of reduced tension specimens in accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX shall not be less than 110,000 psi. This alloy is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperature after exposure in the range of 1000F to 1400F. For stress relieved tempers (T351, T3510, T3511, T451, T4510, T4511, T651, T6510, T6511), stress values for materials in the basic temper shall be used. The tension test specimen from plate 0.500 in. and thicker is machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the allowable stress values for thickness less than 0.500 in. shall be used. The tension test specimen from plate 0.500 in. and thicker is machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the core material of the same thickness. Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of 1000F to 1250F. For external pressure design, the maximum design temperature is limited to 1000F. The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 9.7 MPa (927C), 7.6 MPs (954C), and 5.0 MPa (982C). The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 5.0 MPa (925C), 4.0 MPa (950C), 3.2 MPa (975C), and 2.6 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only. The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 7.8 MPa (925C), 5.2 MPa (950C), 3.5 MPa (975C), and 2.4 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only.

G19

G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25

G26

G27

G28 G29 (METRIC Database) G30 (METRIC Database) G31 (METRIC Database)

398

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G32 (METRIC Database) H1 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 6.6 MPa (925C), 4.4 MPa (950C), 2.9 MPa (975C), and 2.0 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of 1900F and has a carbon content of 0.04% or higher. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum temperature of 1900F and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. For Section I applications, cold drawn pipe or tube shall be annealed at 1900F minimum. The material shall be given a 1725F to 1825F stabilizing heat treatment. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 250F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 300F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 350F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 400F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 500F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 550F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 600F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 750F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 800F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 850F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 900F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 950F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1000F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1050F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties.

H3 H4 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14

CodeCalc User's Guide

399

Material Dialog Boxes

T15 T16 T17 T18 T19 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1100F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1150F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1200F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 1250F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 450F and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. No welding or brazing permitted. For Section VIII applications, UNF-56(d) shall apply for welded constructions. For welded and brazed constructions, stress values for O (annealed) temper material shall be used. The stress values given for this material are not applicable when either welding or thermal cutting is employed. These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor. For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal, ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or eddy current examination, in accordance with NC 2550, shall provide a longitudinal weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors shall be in accordance with the following: a. for single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80; b. for single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85; c. for double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90; d. for single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00. Filler metal shall not be used in the manufacture of welded pipe or tubing. Strength of reduced-section tensile specimen required to qualify welding procedures. See QW-150, Section IX. After welding, heat treat at 1150-1200F, hold 1-1/2 hr at temperature for the first inch of cross-section thickness and 1/2 hr for each additional inch, and air cool. For castings used in pumps, valves, and fittings 2 in. nominal pipe size and less, PWHT is not required for socket welds and attachment welds when the castings have been temper annealed at 1150 to 1200F prior to welding. If welded or brazed, the allowable stress values for the annealed condition shall be used and the minimum tensile strength of the reduced tension specimen in accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX shall not be less than 30.0 ksi. When nonferrous materials conforming to specifications in Section II, Part B are used in welded or brazed construction, the maximum allowable working stresses shall not exceed the values given herein for annealed material at the metal temperature shown. These maximum allowable stress values are to be used in welded or brazed constructions.

W6 W7 W8

W10

W11

400

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

W12 These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII, Division 1 applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated tensile stress values shall be multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII, Division 1. For service at 1200F or higher, the deposited weld metal shall be of the same nominal chemistry as the base metal. No welding permitted. For Section VIII applications, no welding is permitted. Use NFA-12 when welded with 5356 or 5556 filler metal, all thickness, or 4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness <= 3/8 in. Use NFA-13 when welded with 4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness > 3/8 in.

W13 W14 W15 W16

Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1B (Non-Ferrous Materials) - Metric (a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; cond., condenser; exch., exchanger; extr., extruded; fin., finished; fr., from; rel., relieved; rld., rolled; Smls., Seamless; Sol., Solution; treat., treated; and Wld., Welded. The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in restricted shear, such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which the shearing is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without reduction of areas, are 0.80 times the values in this Table. For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing are 1.60 times the values in this Table. An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time-dependent properties (see Notes T1-T18). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SB-407 Grade N08800 are used when SB-407M Grade N08800 is used in construction. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For steam at 1700 kPa (208C), the values given for 200C may be used. At temperatures over 550C, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. In the absence of evidence that the casting is of high quality throughout, values not in excess of 80% of those given in the Table are used. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made to recognized standards.

(b)

(c)

(d) (e) (f)

(g)

G1 G2 G3

CodeCalc User's Guide

401

Material Dialog Boxes

G4 Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess of 825C and are considered in the design. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain. Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 175C. Use 350F curve for all temperature values below 175C. The stresses for this material are based on 828 MPa minimum tensile strength because of weld metal strength limitations. Use Fig. NFC-6 up to and including 150C. Use the 325C curve of Fig. NFC-3 above 150C up to and including 200C. Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 200C. Maximum temperature for external pressure does not exceed 225C. Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 375C. Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 425C. For Section VIII and XII applications, use of external pressure charts for material in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings only. For Section VIII applications, a factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress. To these stress values a quality factor as specified in ND-3115 of Section III; UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1; or TM-190 of Section XII shall be applied for castings. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made to recognized standards. Allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the corresponding core material. Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain media and high temperatures, particularly steam above 100C. The user should ensure that the alloy selected is satisfactory for the service for which it is to be used. Because of the occasionally contingent danger from the failure of pressure vessels by stress corrosion cracking, the following is pertinent. These materials are suitable for engineering use under a wide variety of ordinary corrosive conditions with no particular hazard in respect to stress corrosion.

G6 G7 G8 G9

G10 G11 G12 G13 G14

G15

G16 G17

G18

402

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G19 Few alloys are completely immune to stress corrosion cracking in all combinations of stress and corrosive environments and the supplier of the material should be consulted. Reference may also be made to the following sources:

G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25

Stress Corrosion Cracking Control Measures B.F. Brown, U.S. National Bureau of Standards (1977), available from NACE, Texas The Stress Corrosion of Metals, H.L. Logan, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1966.

For plate only. The maximum operating temperature is arbitrarily set at 250C because harder temper adversely affects design stress in the creep rupture temperature range. The minimum tensile strength of reduced tension specimens in accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX is not less than 760 MPa. This alloy is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperature after exposure in the range of 550C to 750C.. For stress relieved tempers (T351, T3510, T3511, T451, T4510, T4511, T651, T6510, T6511), stress values for materials in the basic temper are used. The tension test specimen from plate 13 mm and thicker is machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the allowable stress values for thickness less than 13 mm are used. The tension test specimen from plate 13 mm and thicker is machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the core material of the same thickness. Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of 550C to 675C. For external pressure design, the maximum design temperature is limited to 550C. The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 9.7 MPa (927C), 7.6 MPa (954C), and 5.0 MPa (982C). The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 5.0 MPa (925C), 4.0 MPa (950C), 3.2 MPa (975C), and 2.6 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only. The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 7.8 MPa (925C), 5.2 MPa (950C), 3.5 MPa (975C), and 2.4 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only. The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are 6.6 MPa (925C), 4.4 MPa (950C), 2.9 MPa (975C), and 2.0 MPa (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only. For temperatures above 550C, these stress values may be used only if the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of 1040C and has a carbon content of 0.04% or higher.

G26

G27 G28 G29 G30

G31

G32

CodeCalc User's Guide

403

Material Dialog Boxes

H2 For temperatures above 550C, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum temperature of 1040C and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. For Section I applications, cold drawn pipe or tube is annealed at 1038C minimum. The material is given a 940C to 995C stabilizing heat treatment. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 125C and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 150C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 175C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 205C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 260C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 290C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 315C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 400C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 425C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 455C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 480C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 510C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 540C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 565C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 595C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 620C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 650C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 675C and above are values obtained from time dependent properties.

H3 H4 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17 T18

404

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 No welding or brazing permitted. For Section VIII applications, UNF-56(d) applies for welded constructions. For welded and brazed constructions, stress values for O (annealed) temper material are used. The stress values given for this material are not applicable when either welding or thermal cutting is employed. These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor. For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal, ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or eddy current examination, in accordance with NC 2550, shall provide a longitudinal weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors are in accordance with the following:

W6 W7 W8

Filler metal is not used in the manufacture of welded pipe or tubing. Strength of reduced-section tensile specimen required to qualify welding procedures. See QW-150, Section IX. After welding, heat treat at 625C - 650C, hold 1 hr at temperature for the first 25 mm of cross-section thickness and hr for each additional 25 mm, and air cool. For castings used in pumps, valves, and fittings DN 50 and less, PWHT is not required for socket welds and attachment welds when the castings have been temper annealed at 625C - 650C prior to welding. If welded or brazed, the allowable stress values for the annealed condition are used and the minimum tensile strength of the reduced tension specimen in accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX is not less than 205 MPa. When nonferrous materials conforming to specifications in Section II, Part B are used in welded or brazed construction, the maximum allowable working stresses do not exceed the values given herein for annealed material at the metal temperature shown. These maximum allowable stress values are to be used in welded or brazed constructions. These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII, Division 1 applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated tensile stress values are multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII, Division 1. For service at 650C or higher, the deposited weld metal is of the same nominal chemistry as the base metal. No welding permitted. For Section VIII applications, no welding is permitted. Use NFA-12 when welded with 5356 or 5556 filler metal, all thicknesses, or 4043 or 5554 filler material, thickness <= 10 mm. Use NFA-13 when welded with 4043 or 5554 filler material, thickness > 10 mm.

W10

W11 W12

W13 W14 W15 W16

CodeCalc User's Guide

405

Material Dialog Boxes

Division 1 Superseded Material Notes

Notes for the year 1943

(a) (b) (c) (d) Allowable working stresses in single shear = 0.8 times the given values. Allowable working stresses in double shear = 1.6 times the given values. Allowable working stresses in bearing = 1.8 times the given values. The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last place retained. Values of stresses above 700 F are based upon steel in annealed condition. Limited to plates not over 3/4 in. in thickness and to temperatures not above 750 F. Maximum value for tensile strength permitted in design, 55,000 psi. For present, limited to temperatures not above 750 F. Only seamless steel pipe or tubing, or electric-fusion-welded pipe may be used for temperatures above 750 F. Limited to temperatures not above 450 F. Limited to temperatures not above 750 F. Limited to temperatures not above 850 F.

(e) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Notes for the year 1952

(a) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last place retained. See Par. UG-6 Flange quality in this specification not permitted over 850 F. These stress values are one-fourth the specified minimum tensile strength multiplied by a quality factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D. and SA-7. For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels containing not less than 0.19% residual silicon be used. Killed steels which have been deoxidized with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels may have creep and stress-rupture properties in the temperature range above 850 F, which are somewhat less than those on which the values in the above table are based.

1 2 3 4

406

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

5 6 7 8 9 Between temperatures of 650 F and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-201, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test data become available. Only (silicon) killed steel shall be used above 900 F. To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be applied. These stress values apply to normalized and drawn material only. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation properties. Between temperatures of 20 to 400 F, stress values equal to the lower of the following will be permitted: 20% of the specified tensile strength, or 25% of the specified yield strength. Not permitted above 450 F; allowable stress value 7000 psi. Between temperatures 0( 750 F to 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-212, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test data become available. The stress values to be used for temperatures below 20 F when steels are made to conform with Specification SA-300 shall be those that are given in the column for 20 to 650 F.

11 12 13

Notes for the year 1965: (TABLE UCS-23)

(a) Stress values in restricted shear such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which the shearing member is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without reduction of area shall be 0.80 times the given values. Stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the given values. The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last place retained. See Par. UCS-6(b). Flange quality in this specification not permitted over 850 F. These stress values are one-fourth the specified minimum tensile strength multiplied by a quality factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D. SA-7 and SA-36. For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels containing not less than 0.10% residual silicon be used. Killed steels which have been deoxidized with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels may have creep and stress-rupture properties in the temperature range above 850 F:, which are somewhat less than those on which the values in the above table are based. Between temperatures of 650 F and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-201, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test data become available.

(b) (c)

1 2 3 4

CodeCalc User's Guide

407

Material Dialog Boxes

6 7 8 9 Only (silicon) killed steel shall be used above 900 F. To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be applied. These stress values apply to normalized and drawn material only. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary JS determined from the relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation properties. Between temperatures of 20 to 400 F, Stress values equal to the lower of the following will be permitted: 20% of the specified tensile strength, or 25% of the specified yield strength. Not permitted above 450 F; allowable stress value 7000 psi. Between temperatures of 750 F to 1000 F. inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-212, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test data become available. The stress values to be used for temperatures below 20 F when steels are made to conform with Specification SA-300 shall be those that are given in the column for 20 to 650 F. For temperatures below 400 F, stress values equal to 20 per cent of the specified minimum tensile strength will be permitted. These allowable stress values apply also to structural shapes and bars. Stress values apply to normalized, or normalized and tempered or oil quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable specification. Stress values apply to quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable specification. Welding not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35 per cent by ladle analysis except for repairs or non-pressure attachments as outlined in Part UF. Welding or brazing not permitted on liquid quenched and tempered material. Maximum allowable stress values shall be as follows: Grade I II III IV V(A,B&E) V(C&D) 25 26 Liquid Quenched and Tempered (-20 to 200F) 15,000 18,750 22,500 26,250 30,000 30,000 Other Than Liquid Quenched and Tempered (-20 to 200F) 15,000 18,750 22,500 26,250

11 12 13

15 19 20 21 22 23 24

See Par. UCS-6 (c). This material shall not be used in thicknesses above 0.58 in.

408

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes Notes for the year 1965:(TABLE UHA-23)

1 Due to the relatively low yield strength of this material, the higher stress values at temperatures from 200 through 1050F" were established to permit the use of this material where slip-hay greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values within the above range exceed 621/2 per cent, but do not exceed 90 percent of the yield strength at temperature. These stress values are not recommended for the design of flanges or piping. These stress values at temperatures of 1050F and above should be used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a predominant grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. These stress values shall be considered basic values to be used when no effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel. These stress values are the basic values multiplied by a joint efficiency factor of 0.85. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower values may be necessary as determined from the flexibility of the flange and bolts and corresponding relaxation. These stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be applied. These stress values permitted for material that has been carbide-solution treated. For temperatures below 100F, stress values equal to 20 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength will be permitted. This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement at room temperature after service at temperatures above 800F: consequently, its use at higher temperatures is not recommended unless due caution is observed. At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04 percent or higher. For temperatures above 800F, the stress values apply only when the carbon content is 0.04 percent and above. These stress values shall be applicable to forgings over 5 inches in thickness.

3 4 5

6 7 8 9

10 11 12

Notes for the year 1974

(b) (c)

CodeCalc User's Guide

409

Material Dialog Boxes

3 4 These stress values are one fourth the specified minimum tensile strength multiplied by a qualify factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D, and SA-36. For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels containing not less than 0.10 percent residual silicon be used. Killed steels which have been deoxidized with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels may have creep and stress rupture properties in the temperature range above 850 F. which are somewhat less than those on which the values in the above Table are based. Between temperatures of 650 and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-201. Grade B. may be used until high temperature test data become available. Only killed steel shall be used above 850 F. To these stress values a quality factor as specified in UG-24 shall be applied for castings. These stress values apply to normalized and drawn material only. These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation properties. Not permitted above 450F; allowable stress value 7000 psi. Between temperatures of 750 and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification SA-515, Grade 70. May be used until high temperature test data become available. The stress values to be used for temperatures below 20F when steels are made to conform with supplement (5)SA-20 shall be those that are given in the column for 20 to 650 F. For temperatures below 400 F, stress values equal to 20 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength will be permitted. These allowable stress values apply also to structural shapes and bars. Stress values apply to normalized, or normalized and tempered or oil quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable specification. Stress values apply to quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable specification. Welding or brazing is not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35 percent by ladle analysis except for limited types of welding as allowed in Part UF. Welding or brazing not permitted on liquid quenched and tempered material.

5 6 7 8 9

11 12 13

15 19 20 21 22 23

410

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

24 Maximum allowable stress values shall be as follows: Grade Normalized or Normalized and Liquid Quenched and Tempered Tempered -20 to 650 -20 to 100 200 I II III IV VA VB VE VC&D VIII 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 15,000 18,750 22,500 26,250 30,000 30,000 30,000 15,000 18,750 22,500 26,250 28,850 29,050 29,800 30,000 33,700 15,000 18,750 22,500 25,050 28,850 28,500 28,700 30,000 32,300 32,100 31,900 31,600 31,400 30,000 24,600 28,850 28,500 28,700 24,600 28,850 28,200 28,700 24,600 24,600 28,850 28,850 27,800 26,750 28,700 27,500 24,600 300 400 500 600 650

This material shall not be used in thicknesses above 0.58 in. Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800 F. the carbide phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite. Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875 F, the carbine phase of carbon-molybdenum steel may be converted to graphite. The material shall not be used in thickness above 0.375 in. For temperatures above which stresses are given, the allowable stresses for the annealed plate shall be used. Where the fabricator performs the heat treatment the requirements of UHT-81 shall be met. Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW404.12, QW406.3, QW407.2, and QW-409.1 of QW-422 shall also apply to this material. These variables shall be applied in accordance with the rules for welding of Part UF of Division I.

Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2A (Ferrous Materials) - Customary (a) (b) (c) The following abbreviations are used: Smls., Seamless; Temp., Temperature; and Wld., Welded. An alternative typeface is used for stress values based on successful experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2 ). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 are used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction.

CodeCalc User's Guide

411

Material Dialog Boxes

(d) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For values at 650F and above, the design stress intensity values are based on successful experience in service. For values at 700F and above, the design stress intensity values are based on successful experience in service. Material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds in. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 1 in. A product analysis is required on this material. SA-723 is not used for minimum permissible temperature below 40F. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, give allowable stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain. This material has reduced toughness at room temperature after exposure at high temperature. The degree of embrittlement depends on composition, heat treatment, time and temperature. The lowest temperature of concern is about 500F. See Appendix A, A-360. At temperatures over 1000F, these stress intensity values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only when stresses above 1000F are published. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress intensity values may be used only if the material has been heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 1900F and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. This note is applicable only when stresses above 1000F are published.

(e)

E1 E2 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7

G10

412

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G11 These stress intensity values at temperatures of 1050F and above should be used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a predominant grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. This note is applicable only when stresses above 1000F are published. These stress intensity values are considered basic values to be used when no effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel. This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement after service at moderately elevated temperature. See Appendix A, A-340 and A-360. All forgings have a maximum tensile strength not in excess of 35 ksi above the specified minimum. Fabricated from SA-387 Grade 12 Class 1 plate. Fabricated from SA-387 Grade 12 Class 2 plate. Annealed. Normalized and tempered. Pieces that are formed (after quenching and tempering) at a temperature lower than 25F below the final tempering temperature are heat-treated after forming when the extreme fiber strain from forming exceeds 3%. Heat treatment shall be 1075F minimum, but not higher than 25F below the final tempering temperature for a minimum time of one hour per inch of thickness. Pieces formed at temperatures within 25F higher than the original tempering temperature are requenched and tempered, either before or after welding into the vessel. The maximum thickness of forgings does not exceed 3 in. (4 in. as heat treated). Both NPS 8 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier. The minimum thickness of pressure-retaining parts is in.. The minimum thickness of shells, heads, and other pressure-retaining parts is in.. The maximum thickness is limited only by the ability to develop the specified mechanical properties. Not for welded construction. In welded construction, for temperatures above 850F, the weld metal has a carbon content of greater than 0.05%. The following, in addition to the variables in Section IX, QW-250, are considered as essential variables requiring requalification of the welding procedure.

G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 H1 H2 H3

S1 S2 S3 S4

W1 W2 W3

An increase in the maximum or a decrease in the minimum specified preheat or interpass temperatures. The specified range of preheat temperatures does not exceed 150F. A change in the thickness T of the welding procedure qualification test plate as follows: a. For welded joints that are quenched and tempered after welding, any increase in thickness (the minimum thickness qualified in all cases is in.). b. For welded joints that are not quenced and tempered after welding, any changes as follows: (a) For T less than 5/8 in., any decrease in thickness (the maximum thickness qualified is 2T); (b) for T equal to 5/8 in. and over, any departure from the range of 5/8 in. to 2T.

CodeCalc User's Guide

413

Material Dialog Boxes

Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2A (Ferrous Materials) - Metric (a) (b) (c) The following abbreviations are used: Smls., Seamless; Temp., Temperature; and Wld., Welded. An alternative typeface is used for stress values based on successful experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 shall be used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction. The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For values at 350C and above, the design stress intensity values are based on successful experience in service. For values at 375C and above, the design stress intensity values are based on successful experience in service. Material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 19 mm. Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted when the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 32 mm. A product analysis is required on this material. SA-723 is not used for minimum permissible temperature below +5C. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short-time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may result in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower levels of permanent strain. This material has reduced toughness at room temperature after exposure at high temperature. The degree of embrittlement depends on composition, heat treatment, time, and temperature. The lowest temperature of concern is about 250C. See

(d)

(e)

E1 E2 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7

414

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

Appendix A, A-360. G9 At temperatures over 550C, these stress intensity values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only when stresses above 550C are published. For temperatures above 550C, these stress intensity values may be used only if the material has been heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 1040C and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. This note is applicable only when stresses above 550C are published. These stress intensity values at temperatures of 575C and above should be used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a predominant grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. This note is applicable only when stresses above 550C are published. These stress intensity values are considered basic values to be used when no effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel. This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement after service at moderately elevated temperature; see Appendix A, A-340 and A-360. All forgings have a maximum tensile strength not in excess of 175 MPa above the specified minimum. Fabricated from SA-387 Grade 12 Class 1 plate. Fabricated from SA-387 Grade 12 Class 2 plate. Annealed. Normalized and tempered. Pieces that are formed (after quenching and tempering) at a temperature lower than 15C below the final tempering temperature are heat treated after forming when the extreme fiber strain from forming exceeds 3%. Heat treatment shall be 580C minimum, but not higher than 15C below the final tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1 h per 25 mm of thickness. Pieces formed at temperatures within 15C higher than the original tempering temperature are requenched and tempered, either before or after welding into the vessel. The maximum thickness of forgings does not exceed 95 mm (100 mm as heat treated). Both DN 200 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier. The minimum thickness of pressure-retaining parts is 6 mm. The minimum thickness of shells, heads, and other pressure-retaining parts is 6 mm. The maximum thickness is limited only by the ability to develop the specified mechanical properties. Not for welded construction. In welded construction, for temperatures above 450C, the weld metal has a carbon content of greater than 0.05%. The following, in addition to the variables in Section IX, QW-250, is considered as essential variables requiring requalification of the welding procedure:

G10

G11

G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 H1 H2 H3

S1 S2 S3 S4

W1 W2 W3

An increase in the maximum or a decrease in the minimum specified preheat or interpass temperatures. The specified range of preheat temperatures shall not exceed 85C.

CodeCalc User's Guide

415

Material Dialog Boxes

A change in the thickness T of the welding procedure qualification test plate as follows: a. For welded joints that are quenched and tempered after welding, any increase in thickness (the minimum thickness qualified in all cases is 6 mm). b. For welded joints that are not quenched and tempered after welding, any change as follows: (a) for T less than 16 mm, any decrease in thickness (the maximum thickness qualified is 2T) (b) for T equal to 16 mm and over, any departure from the range of 16 mm to 2T.

Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2B (Non-Ferrous Materials) (a) (b) (c) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; fin., finished; rel., relieved; Smls., Seamless; and Wld., Welded. An alternative typeface is used for stress values based on successful experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SB-407 Grade N08800 are used when SB-407M Grade N08800 is used in construction. The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For values at 800F, the design stress intensity values are based on successful experience in service. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short-time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may result in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower levels of permanent strain. Use of external pressure charts for material in the form of barstock is permitted for stiffening rings only. SB-163 Supplementary Requirement S2 is met. Design stress intensity values for 100F may be used at temperatures down to 325F without additional specification requirements.

(d)

(e)

E2 G1

G2 G3 G4

416

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

G5 S1 W1 A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable design stress intensity values for this material. Thickness <= 0.100 in. Welding except for seal welds is not permitted.

ASME Section VIII Division 2, Table 5A Notes for Ferrous Materials (a) (b) (c) The following abbreviations are used: Smls., Seamless; Temp., Temperature; and Wld., Welded. An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time-dependent properties (see Notes T1 through T10). Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed in this Table shall be applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI units version of the material specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 shall be used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction. The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last place retained. The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 2000F, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher stress values were established at temperatures where the short-time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may result in dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower levels of permanent strain. At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only when stresses above 1000F are published. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material has been heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 1900F and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. This note is applicable only when stresses above 1000F are published.

(d)

(e)

G3 G4

CodeCalc User's Guide

417

Material Dialog Boxes

G8 G9 For stress relieved tempers (T451, T4510, T4511, T651, T6510, T6511), stress values for materials in the basic temper shall be used. Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain media and high temperature, particularly steam above 212F. The user should satisfy him/herself that the alloy selected is satisfactory for the service for which it is to be used. At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This alloy is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of 1000F to 1400F. Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of 1000F to 1250F. Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess of 1500F and shall be considered in the design. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of 1900F and has a carbon content of 0.04% or higher. For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum temperature of 1900F and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 250F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 300F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 350F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 400F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 500F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 700F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 750F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 800F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 850F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 900F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties. Allowable stresses for temperatures of 950F and above are values obtained from time-dependent properties.

G10 G11 G12 G13

430

CodeCalc User's Guide

Material Dialog Boxes

L CYLLEN D T CA

INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: EX1CHCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (200.00*(46.0000/2+0.1250))/(20000.00*0.85-0.6*200.00) = 0.2740 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): = (S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*(0.3750))/((46.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*0.3750) = 273.02 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (SA*E*T)/(D/2+0.6*T) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*0.5000)/(46.0000/2+0.6*0.5000) = 364.81 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA)) = (200.00*((46.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*(0.3750)))/(0.85*(0.3750)) = 14650.98 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.3990 0.5000 273.019 200.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %

Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 354.93 * MAPN 474.25 * MAWP * Sa/S 300.32 )

Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 50t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66

1.075 -55 F

434

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: of Shell Component VOLMET of Shell Component WMET Volume of Component VOLID of Water in Component WWAT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA -20 1460.8 413.4 33238.1 1200.3 1098.6 310.9 33600.3 1213.3 F in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb.

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: EX1CHCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi B

Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.3750 47.0000 20.00 125.33 0.4255 0.0024044 15619.96 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*15619.9551)/(3*125.3333)=166.1697 psig Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.1059 47.0000 20.00 443.64 0.4255 0.0003442 4991.14 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*4991.1372)/(3*443.6432)=15.0005 psig Results for Maximum Length Between Stiffeners (Slen): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.3750 47.0000 449.66 125.33 9.5672 0.0000972 1410.12 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*1410.1167)/(3*125.3333)=15.0012 psig SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure Actual Length as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software

166.17 15.00 0.2309 0.5000 449.658 20.00

psig psig in. in. in. in.

Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 5 Shell Analysis : EX1CHCYL Item: 2 2:38p Dec 16,2002

CodeCalc User's Guide

435

Appendices
Input Echo, Component 2, Description: EX1CHCYL P PEXT 275.00 150.00 15.00 150.00 CS-2 NO SA-516 70 K02700 20000.00 20000.00 D 0.85 1.2500 218.2500 218.2500 46.0000 0.6250 0.1250 NO Cylindrical Shell psig F psig F

Design Internal Pressure Temperature for Internal Pressure Design External Pressure Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Material Specification (Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Shell Joint Maximum Thickness before Full Radiography Design Length of Section Length of Cylinder for Volume Calcs. Inside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation Type of Element:

S SA E

psi psi in. in. in. in. in. in.

L CYLLEN D T CA

INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: EX1CHCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (275.00*(46.0000/2+0.1250))/(20000.00*0.85-0.6*275.00) = 0.3777 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): = (S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*(0.5000))/((46.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*0.5000) = 362.86 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (SA*E*T)/(D/2+0.6*T) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*0.6250)/(46.0000/2+0.6*0.6250) = 454.55 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA)) = (275.00*((46.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*(0.5000)))/(0.85*(0.5000)) = 15157.35 psi

436

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1

0.5027 0.6250 362.860 275.000

in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %

Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 471.72 * MAPN 590.91 * MAWP * Sa/S 399.15 )

Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 50t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: of Shell Component VOLMET of Shell Component WMET Volume of Component VOLID of Water in Component WWAT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA

1.340 -48 F -55 F -20 F

19980.4 5654.4 362710.2 13097.9 16027.2 4535.7 366663.4 13240.6

in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 lb.

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: EX1CHCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi B

Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.5000 47.2500 218.25 94.50 4.6190 0.0003095 4487.30 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*4487.3042)/(3*94.5000)=63.3129 psig Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.2814 47.2500 218.25 167.94 4.6190 0.0001303 1889.40 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*1889.3954)/(3*167.9354)=15.0010 psig Results for Maximum Length Calculation: No Conversion TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.5000 47.2500 0.28E+13 94.50 .5834E+11 0.0001232 1786.06 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*1786.0642)/(3*94.5000)=25.2002 psig

CodeCalc User's Guide

437

Appendices
SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure Actual Length as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software al - Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 8 Shell Analysis : EX1CVCYL Item: 3 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Component 3, Description: EX1CVCYL P PEXT 275.00 150.00 15.00 150.00 CS-2 NO SA-516 70 K02700 20000.00 20000.00 D 0.85 1.2500 20.0000 20.0000 50.0000 0.6250 0.1250 NO Cylindrical Shell psig F psig F 63.31 15.00 0.4064 0.6250 0.2757E+13 218.25 psig psig in. in. in. in.

S SA E

psi psi in. in. in. in. in. in.

L CYLLEN D T CA

INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: EX1CVCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (275.00*(50.0000/2+0.1250))/(20000.00*0.85-0.6*275.00) = 0.4104 in.

438

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): = (S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*(0.5000))/((50.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*0.5000) = 334.32 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (SA*E*T)/(D/2+0.6*T) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (20000.00*0.85*0.6250)/(50.0000/2+0.6*0.6250) = 418.72 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA)) = (275.00*((50.0000/2+0.1250)+0.6*(0.5000)))/(0.85*(0.5000)) = 16451.47 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.5354 0.6250 334.317 275.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %

Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 434.61 * MAPN 544.33 * MAWP * Sa/S 367.75 )

1.235 -48 F -55 F -20 F

1988.0 562.6 39269.9 1418.1 1594.4 451.2 39663.6 1432.3

in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 lb.

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: EX1CVCYL ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi B

Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.5000 51.2500 20.00 102.50 0.3902 0.0036227 16683.28

CodeCalc User's Guide

439

Appendices
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*16683.2773)/(3*102.5000)=217.0182 psig Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.1114 51.2500 20.00 459.96 0.3902 0.0003569 5174.80 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*5174.8022)/(3*459.9623)=15.0007 psig Results for Maximum Length Calculation: No Conversion TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A 0.5000 51.2500 0.10E+09 102.50 .2019E+07 0.0001047 1518.14 EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*(D/T))=(4*1518.1440)/(3*102.5000)=19.7482 psig SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure Actual Length as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 11 Shell Analysis : EX1CVCHEA Item: 4 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Component 4, Description: EX1CVCHEA Design Internal Pressure Temperature for Internal Pressure Design External Pressure Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Material Specification (Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Head Joint Maximum Thickness before Full Radiography Inside Diameter of Elliptical Head P PEXT 275.00 150.00 15.00 150.00 CS-2 NO SA-516 70 K02700 20000.00 20000.00 D 0.85 1.2500 50.0000 0.6900 0.1250 2.0000 0.0000 psig F psig F B

217.02 15.00 0.2364 0.6250 0.1035E+09 20.00

psig psig in. in. in. in.

S SA E D

psi psi in. in. in. in. in.

Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance Aspect Ratio Length of Straight Flange

T CA AR STRTFLG

440

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation NO

Type of Element: Elliptical Head INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 4, Desc.: EX1CVCHEA ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D+2*CA)*K)/(2*S*E-0.2*P) Appendix 1-4(c) = (275.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)*1.00)/(2*20000.00*0.85-0.2*275.00) = 0.4071 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): = (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*20000.00*0.85*(0.5650))/(1.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)+0.2*(0.5650)) = 381.43 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (2*SA*E*T)/(K*D+0.2*T) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*20000.00*0.85*0.6900)/(1.00*50.0000+0.2*0.6900) = 467.91 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA)) = (275.00*(1.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)+0.2*(0.5650)))/(2*0.85*(0.5650)) = 14419.39 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.5321 0.6900 381.431 275.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %

Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 495.86 * MAPN 608.28 * MAWP * Sa/S 419.57 )

Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 75t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) WEIGHT and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: Volume of Shell Component VOLMET Weight of Shell Component WMET Inside Volume of Component VOLID Weight of Water in Component WWAT Inside Vol. of 0.00 in. Straight VOLSCA Total Volume for Head + Straight VOLTOT WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA

6.005 -45 F -55 F -20 F

2121.9 600.5 16362.5 590.9 0.0 16362.5 1737.5 491.7 16609.1

in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 in.3 in.3 lb. in.3

CodeCalc User's Guide

441

Appendices
Weight of Water in Component, Corroded Inside Vol. of 0.00 in. Straight, Corr. Total Volume for Head + Straight Corroded WWATCA VOLSCA VOLTCA 599.8 0.0 16609.1 lb. in.**3 in.**3

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 4, Desc.: EX1CVCHEA ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi

Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): TCA OD D/T Factor A B 0.5650 51.3800 90.94 0.0015273 14105.11 EMAWP=B/(K0*(D/T))=14105.1133/(0.9000*90.9381)=172.3409 psig Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): TCA OD D/T Factor A B 0.1330 51.3800 386.22 0.0003596 5214.29 EMAWP=B/(K0*(D/T))=5214.2935/(0.9000*386.2247)=15.0007 psig SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 14 Shell Analysis : EX1HEEXT Item: 5 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Component 5, Description: EX1HEEXT Design Internal Pressure Temperature for Internal Pressure Design External Pressure Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Material Specification (Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Head Joint Maximum Thickness before Full Radiography Inside Diameter of Elliptical Head Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance P PEXT 275.00 300.00 15.00 150.00 CS-2 NO SA-516 70 K02700 20000.00 20000.00 D 0.85 1.2500 50.0000 0.6900 0.1250 psig F psig F 172.34 15.00 0.2580 0.6900 psig psig in. in.

S SA E D T CA

psi psi in. in. in. in.

442

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Aspect Ratio Length of Straight Flange AR STRTFLG 2.0000 0.0000 NO in.

Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation

Type of Element: Elliptical Head INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 5, Desc.: EX1HEEXT ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D+2*CA)*K)/(2*S*E-0.2*P) Appendix 1-4(c) = (275.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)*1.00)/(2*20000.00*0.85-0.2*275.00) = 0.4071 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): = (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*20000.00*0.85*(0.5650))/(1.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)+0.2*(0.5650)) = 381.43 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (2*SA*E*T)/(K*D+0.2*T) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*20000.00*0.85*0.6900)/(1.00*50.0000+0.2*0.6900) = 467.91 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA)) = (275.00*(1.00*(50.0000+2*0.1250)+0.2*(0.5650)))/(2*0.85*(0.5650)) = 14419.39 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.5321 0.6900 381.431 275.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %

Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 495.86 * MAPN 608.28 * MAWP * Sa/S 419.57 )

6.005 -45 F -55 F -20 F

2121.9 600.5 16362.5 590.9 0.0 16362.5

in.3 lb. in.3 lb. in.3 in.3

CodeCalc User's Guide

443

Appendices
Volume of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA Weight of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Inside Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA Weight of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA Inside Vol. of 0.00 in. Straight, Corr. VOLSCA Total Volume for Head + Straight Corroded VOLTCA 1737.5 491.7 16609.1 599.8 0.0 16609.1 in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb. in.**3 in.**3

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 5, Desc.: EX1HEEXT ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi

Design Internal Pressure ( Case 1 ) Temperature for Internal Pressure Include Hydrostatic Head Components Shell Material (Not Normalized or NA) Material UNS Number Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature Shell Allowable Stress At Ambient Inside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell Actual Thickness of Shell or Head Corrosion Allowance for Shell or Head Is this Nozzle a Radial Nozzle

S SA D T CAS

psi psi in. in. in.

444

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Is this Nozzle a Lateral Nozzle (Y-angle) The Attached Flange is Class CL 150 Grade GR 1.1 SA-106 B K03006 17100.00 17100.00 ID 11.7500 NO

Nozzle Material (Not Normalized or NA) Material UNS Number Nozzle Allowable Stress at Temperature Nozzle Allowable Stress At Ambient Diameter Basis for Nozzle Inside Diameter of Nozzle Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis Actual Thickness of Nozzle Corrosion Allowance for Nozzle Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam at Nozzle Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck

SN SNA BASISN DIA DBN THK CAN ES EN

psi psi in.

Actual 0.5000 in. 0.1250 in. 1.00 1.00 Abutting 10.0000 in. 0.5000 in. 0.5000 in. SA-516 70 20000.00 20000.00 15.7500 0.5000 0.5000 0.5000 No No psi psi in. in. in. in.

Insert or Abutting Nozzle Type NTYP Outward Projection of Nozzle HO Weld leg size between Nozzle and Pad/Shell WO Groove weld depth between Nozzle and Vessel WGNV Pad Material (Not Normalized or NA) Pad Allowable Stress at Temperature Pad Allowable Stress At Ambient Diameter of Pad along vessel surface Thickness of Pad Weld leg size between Pad and Shell Groove weld depth between Pad and Nozzle SN SNA DP TP WP WGPN

Is this is Manway/Access/Inspection Opening Skip Iterative Failure Thickness Calculations

NOZZLE CALCULATION, NOZZLE NUMBER 1, Description: EX1NOZAB ASME Code, Section VIII, Div. 1, Ed-2001, A-02, UG-37 to UG-45 Actual Nozzle Inside Diameter Used in Calculation Actual Nozzle Thickness Used in Calculation Internal Pressure Results for SHELL/HEAD : Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Cylindrical Shell, Tr Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (200.00*(46.0000/2+0.1250))/(20000.00*1.00-0.6*200.00) = 0.2326 in. Internal Pressure Results for NOZZLE : Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Nozzle Wall, Tr Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (200.00*(11.7500/2+0.1250))/(17100.00*1.00-0.6*200.00) CASE 1 CASE 1 11.750 0.500 in. in.

CodeCalc User's Guide

445

Appendices
= 0.0707 in. UG-40, Thickness and Diameter Limit Results : CASE 1 Effective material diameter limit, DL 24.0000 Effective material thickness limit, no pad TLNP 0.9375 Effective material thickness limit, pad side TLWP 0.9375 RESULTS of NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT AREA CALCULATIONS: AREA AVAILABLE, A1 to A5 Design External Area Required AR 2.792 NA Area in Shell A1 1.708 NA Area in Nozzle Wall A2 0.488 NA Area in Inward Nozzle A3 0.000 NA Area in Welds A4 0.460 NA Area in Pad A5 1.500 NA TOTAL AREA AVAILABLE ATOT 4.157 NA Pressure Case 1 Governs the Analysis Nozzle Tangent Angle Used in Area Calculations The area available without a pad is Insufficient. The area available with the given pad is Sufficient. SELECTION OF POSSIBLE REINFORCING PADS: Based on given Pad Thickness: Based on given Pad Diameter: Based on Shell or Nozzle Thickness: Diameter 13.1250 15.7500 13.1250 Thickness 0.5000 in. 0.0625 in. 0.5000 in. 90.00 Degs. Mapnc NA NA NA NA NA NA NA in. in. in.

sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in.

Reinforcement Area Required for Nozzle: AR = (DLR*TR+2*THK*TR*(1-FFR1)) UG-37(c) or UG-39 AR = (12.0000*0.2326+2*(0.5000-0.1250)*0.2326*(1.0-1.00)) AR = 2.792 sq.in. Areas per UG-37.1 but with DL = Diameter Limit, DLR = Corroded ID: Area Available in Shell (A1): A1 = (DL-DLR)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)-2*(THK-CAN)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)*(1-FFR1) A1 = (24.000-12.000)*(1.00*(0.5000-0.125)-0.233)-2*(0.500-0.125) *(1.00*(0.5000-0.1250)-0.2326)*(1.0-1.00) A1 = 1.708 sq.in. Area A2NP A2NP A2NP Area A2WP A2WP A2WP Available in Nozzle Wall, no Pad: = ( 2 * MIN(TLNP,HO) ) * ( THK - CAN - TRN ) * FFR2 = ( 2 * 0.9375 ) * ( 0.5000 - 0.1250 - 0.0707 ) * 0.86 ) = 0.488 sq.in. Available in Nozzle Wall, with Pad: = (2*MIN(TLWP,HO))*(THK-CAN-TRN)*FFR2 = ( 2 * 0.9375 ) * ( 0.5000 - 0.1250 - 0.0707 ) * 0.86 ) = 0.488 sq.in.

Area Available in Welds, no Pad: A4NP = Wo^2*FFR2 + ( Wi-Can/0.707 )^2*FFR2 A4NP = 0.5000^2 * 0.8550 + ( 0.0000 )^2 * 0.8550

446

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
A4NP = 0.214 sq.in. Area A4wp A4wp A4WP Available in Welds, with Pad: = (Wo^2 - Ar Lost)*FFR3 + ((Wi-Can/0.707)^2 - Ar Lost)*FFR2 + Wp^2*FFR4 = ( 0.2461 ) * 0.86 + ( 0.0000 ) * 0.86 + 0.2500 * 1.00 = 0.460 sq.in.

Area Available in Pad: A5 = (MIN(DP,DL)-(DIA+2*THK))*(Min(TP,TLWP,TE))*FFR4 A5 = ( 15.7500 - 12.7500 ) * 0.5000 * 1.00 A5 = 1.500 sq.in. UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness Requirement: = Max(Min(Max(Max(UG45B1,UG16B),Max(UG45B2,UG16B)),UG45B4),UG45A) = Max(Min(Max(Max( 0.3576, 0.1875),Max( 0.1250, 0.1875)), 0.4531), 0.1957) = 0.3576 < Minimum Nozzle Thickness 0.5000 in. OK M.A.W.P. RESULTS FOR THIS NOZZLE GEOMETRY Approximate M.A.W.P. for given geometry Pressure Rating for B16.5 Flange at Pressure Rating for B16.5 Flange at AMAP 247.914 285.0 272.5 121.81 108.54 Shell -6 -44 -20 psig psig psig lb. lb. Pad -6 -44 -20 F F F F F F

100.00 F is 150.00 F is

Weight of Nozzle, with Flange and Pad, Uncorroded Weight of Nozzle, with Flange and Pad, Corroded MINIMUM Minimum Minimum Minimum DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE RESULTS: Nozzle Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 -6 Temp. at operating stress -146 Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) -20

Nozzle MDMT Thickness Calc. per UCS-66 1(b), MIN(tn,t,te) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 -6 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) -146 Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) -20 WELD SIZE CALCULATIONS, NOZZLE NUMBER Intermediate Calcs. for nozzle/shell welds in. Intermediate Calcs. for pad/shell welds in. 1, Desc.: EX1NOZAB Tmin TminPad

0.3750 0.3750

Results Per UW-16.1, Required Thickness Actual Thickness Nozzle Weld 0.2500 = Min per Code 0.3535 = 0.7 * WO Pad Weld 0.1875 = 0.5*TminPad 0.3535 = 0.7 * WP WELD STRENGTH AND WELD LOADS PER UG-41.1, SKETCH (a) OR (b) W = (AR-A1)*S W = ( 2.7918 - 1.7082 ) * 20000 W = 21670. lb. W1 = (A2+A5+A4-(WII-CAN/.707)^2*FFR2)*S W1 = ( 0.4879 + 1.5000 + 0.4604 - 0.0313 * 0.86 ) * 20000

, in. , in.

CodeCalc User's Guide

447

Appendices
W1 = 48431. lb. STRENGTH OF CONNECTION ELEMENTS FOR FAILURE PATH ANALYSIS SHEAR, OUTWARD NOZZLE WELD: SONW = (PI/2)*DLO*WO*0.49*SNW SONW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 12.7500 * 0.5000 * 0.49 * 17100 SONW = 83906. lb. SHEAR, PAD ELEMENT WELD: SPEW = (PI/2)*DP*WP*0.49*SEW SPEW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 15.7500 * 0.5000 * 0.49 * 20000 SPEW = 121226. lb. TENSION, PAD GROOVE WELD: TPGW = (PI/2.0)*DLO*WGPN*0.74*SEG TPGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 12.7500 * 0.5000 * 0.74 * 17100 TPGW = 126715. lb. SHEAR, NOZZLE GROOVE WELD: SNGW = (PI/2)*(DLR+WGNVA)*(WGNVA-CAN)*0.60*SNG SNGW = ( 3.14/2)*( 12.000+ 0.500)*( 0.500- 0.1250)*0.6* 17100 SNGW = 75545. lb. STRENGTH OF FAILURE PATHS: PATH11 = ( SPEW + SNGW ) = ( 121226 + 75545 ) = 196771 lb. SUMMARY OF FAILURE PATH CALCULATIONS: Path 1-1 = 196771 lb., must exceed W = 21670 lb. or W1 = 48431 lb. Iterative Results per Pressure, Area and UG-45: ( Assuming same Corr. All. for Shell and Nozzle) Maximum (failure) Corrosion Allowance: 0.2107 in. Minimum (failure) Nozzle Thickness: 0.2893 in. Minimum (failure) Shell Thickness: 0.2893 in. PVElite by COADE Engineering Software Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 22 Nozzle Analysis : EX1NOZAC Item: 2 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Nozzle Item 2, Description: EX1NOZAC P TEMP 275.00 150.00 NO SA-516 70 K02700 psig F

Design Internal Pressure ( Case 1 ) Temperature for Internal Pressure Include Hydrostatic Head Components Shell Material (Not Normalized or NA) Material UNS Number

448

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature Shell Allowable Stress At Ambient Inside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell Actual Thickness of Shell or Head Corrosion Allowance for Shell or Head Is this Nozzle a Radial Nozzle Is this Nozzle a Lateral Nozzle (Y-angle) The Attached Flange is Class CL 300 Grade GR 1.1 SA-106 B K03006 17100.00 17100.00 ID 10.0000 S SA D T CAS 20000.00 20000.00 46.0000 0.6250 0.1250 YES NO psi psi in. in. in.

Nozzle Material (Not Normalized or NA) Material UNS Number Nozzle Allowable Stress at Temperature Nozzle Allowable Stress At Ambient Diameter Basis for Nozzle Nominal Diameter of Nozzle Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis Nominal Thickness of Nozzle Corrosion Allowance for Nozzle Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam at Nozzle Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck

SN SNA BASISN DIA DBN THKNOM CAN ES EN

psi psi in.

Nominal SCH 80 0.1250 in. 1.00 1.00 Abutting 10.0000 in. 0.5000 in. 0.5930 in. SA-516 70 20000.00 20000.00 14.6250 0.6250 0.5000 0.5000 No No psi psi in. in. in. in.

Is this is Manway/Access/Inspection Opening Skip Iterative Failure Thickness Calculations

NOZZLE CALCULATION, NOZZLE NUMBER 2, Description: EX1NOZAC ASME Code, Section VIII, Div. 1, Ed-2001, A-02, UG-37 to UG-45 Actual Nozzle Inside Diameter Used in Calculation Actual Nozzle Thickness Used in Calculation Internal Pressure Results for SHELL/HEAD : Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Cylindrical Shell, Tr Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (275.00*(46.0000/2+0.1250))/(20000.00*1.00-0.6*275.00) CASE 1 9.564 0.593 in. in.

CodeCalc User's Guide

449

Appendices
= 0.3206 in. Internal Pressure Results for NOZZLE : Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Nozzle Wall, Tr Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(1) = (275.00*(9.5640/2+0.1250))/(17100.00*1.00-0.6*275.00) = 0.0797 in. UG-40, Thickness and Diameter Limit Results : CASE 1 Effective material diameter limit, DL 19.6280 Effective material thickness limit, no pad TLNP 1.1700 Effective material thickness limit, pad side TLWP 1.2500 RESULTS of NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT AREA CALCULATIONS: AREA AVAILABLE, A1 to A5 Design External Area Required AR 3.147 NA Area in Shell A1 1.760 NA Area in Nozzle Wall A2 0.830 NA Area in Inward Nozzle A3 0.000 NA Area in Welds A4 0.464 NA Area in Pad A5 2.422 NA TOTAL AREA AVAILABLE ATOT 5.476 NA Pressure Case 1 Governs the Analysis Nozzle Tangent Angle Used in Area Calculations The area available without a pad is Insufficient. The area available with the given pad is Sufficient. SELECTION OF POSSIBLE REINFORCING PADS: Based on given Pad Thickness: Based on given Pad Diameter: Based on Shell or Nozzle Thickness: Diameter 11.0000 14.6250 11.0000 Thickness 0.6250 in. 0.0625 in. 0.6250 in. 90.00 Degs. Mapnc NA NA NA NA NA NA NA CASE 1

in. in. in.

sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in. sq.in.

Reinforcement Area Required for Nozzle: AR = (DLR*TR+2*THK*TR*(1-FFR1)) UG-37(c) or UG-39 AR = (9.8140*0.3206+2*(0.5930-0.1250)*0.3206*(1.0-1.00)) AR = 3.147 sq.in. Areas per UG-37.1 but with DL = Diameter Limit, DLR = Corroded ID: Area Available in Shell (A1): A1 = (DL-DLR)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)-2*(THK-CAN)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)*(1-FFR1) A1 = (19.628-9.814)*(1.00*(0.6250-0.125)-0.321)-2*(0.593-0.125) *(1.00*(0.6250-0.1250)-0.3206)*(1.0-1.00) A1 = 1.760 sq.in. Area A2NP A2NP A2NP Available in Nozzle Wall, no Pad: = ( 2 * MIN(TLNP,HO) ) * ( THK - CAN - TRN ) * FFR2 = ( 2 * 1.1700 ) * ( 0.5930 - 0.1250 - 0.0797 ) * 0.86 ) = 0.777 sq.in.

450

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Area A2WP A2WP A2WP Area A4NP A4NP A4NP Area A4wp A4wp A4WP Available in Nozzle Wall, with Pad: = (2*MIN(TLWP,HO))*(THK-CAN-TRN)*FFR2 = ( 2 * 1.2500 ) * ( 0.5930 - 0.1250 - 0.0797 ) * 0.86 ) = 0.830 sq.in. Available in Welds, no Pad: = Wo^2*FFR2 + ( Wi-Can/0.707 )^2*FFR2 = 0.5000^2 * 0.8550 + ( 0.0000 )^2 * 0.8550 = 0.214 sq.in. Available in Welds, with Pad: = Wo^2*FFR3 + (Wi-Can/0.707)^2*FFR2 + Wp^2*FFR4 = ( 0.5000 )^2 * 0.86 + ( 0.0000 )^2 * 0.86 + 0.5000^2 * 1.00 = 0.464 sq.in.

Area Available in Pad: A5 = (MIN(DP,DL)-(DIA+2*THK))*(Min(TP,TLWP,TE))*FFR4 A5 = ( 14.6250 - 10.7500 ) * 0.6250 * 1.00 A5 = 2.422 sq.in. UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness Requirement: = Max(Min(Max(Max(UG45B1,UG16B),Max(UG45B2,UG16B)),UG45B4),UG45A) = Max(Min(Max(Max( 0.4456, 0.1875),Max( 0.1250, 0.1875)), 0.4444), 0.2047) = 0.4444 < Minimum Nozzle Thickness 0.5189 in. OK M.A.W.P. RESULTS FOR THIS NOZZLE GEOMETRY Approximate M.A.W.P. for given geometry Pressure Rating for B16.5 Flange at Pressure Rating for B16.5 Flange at AMAP 374.121 740.0 707.5 150.03 139.44 Shell 6 -30 -20 psig psig psig lb. lb. Pad 6 -30 -20 F F F F F F

100.00 F is 150.00 F is

Weight of Nozzle, with Flange and Pad, Uncorroded Weight of Nozzle, with Flange and Pad, Corroded MINIMUM Minimum Minimum Minimum DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE RESULTS: Nozzle Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 3 Temp. at operating stress -137 Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) -20

Nozzle MDMT Thickness Calc. per UCS-66 1(b), MIN(tn,t,te) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 3 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) -137 Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) -20 WELD SIZE CALCULATIONS, NOZZLE NUMBER Intermediate Calcs. for nozzle/shell welds in. Intermediate Calcs. for pad/shell welds in. 2, Desc.: EX1NOZAC Tmin TminPad

0.4680 0.5000

Results Per UW-16.1, Required Thickness Actual Thickness Nozzle Weld 0.2500 = Min per Code 0.3535 = 0.7 * WO

, in.

CodeCalc User's Guide

451

Appendices
Pad Weld 0.2500 = 0.5*TminPad 0.3535 = 0.7 * WP , in.

WELD STRENGTH AND WELD LOADS PER UG-41.1, SKETCH (a) OR (b) W = (AR-A1)*S W = ( 3.1465 - 1.7605 ) * 20000 W = 27720. lb. W1 = (A2+A5+A4-(WII-CAN/.707)^2*FFR2)*S W1 = ( 0.8300 + 2.4219 + 0.4638 - 0.0313 * 0.86 ) * 20000 W1 = 73779. lb. STRENGTH OF CONNECTION ELEMENTS FOR FAILURE PATH ANALYSIS SHEAR, OUTWARD NOZZLE WELD: SONW = (PI/2)*DLO*WO*0.49*SNW SONW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 10.7500 * 0.5000 * 0.49 * 17100 SONW = 70744. lb. SHEAR, PAD ELEMENT WELD: SPEW = (PI/2)*DP*WP*0.49*SEW SPEW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 14.6250 * 0.5000 * 0.49 * 20000 SPEW = 112567. lb. TENSION, PAD GROOVE WELD: TPGW = (PI/2.0)*DLO*WGPN*0.74*SEG TPGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 10.7500 * 0.5000 * 0.74 * 17100 TPGW = 106838. lb. SHEAR, NOZZLE GROOVE WELD: SNGW = (PI/2)*(DLR+WGNVA)*(WGNVA-CAN)*0.60*SNG SNGW = ( 3.14/2)*( 9.814+ 0.593)*( 0.593- 0.1250)*0.6* 17100 SNGW = 78494. lb. STRENGTH OF FAILURE PATHS: PATH11 = ( SPEW + SNGW ) = ( 112567 + 78494 ) = 191061 lb. SUMMARY OF FAILURE PATH CALCULATIONS: Path 1-1 = 191061 lb., must exceed W = 27720 lb. or W1 = 73778 lb. Iterative Results per Pressure, Area and UG-45: ( Assuming same Corr. All. for Shell and Nozzle) Maximum (failure) Corrosion Allowance: 0.1990 in. Minimum (failure) Nozzle Thickness: 0.3940 in. Minimum (failure) Shell Thickness: 0.4260 in. PVElite by COADE Engineering Software Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 32 Flohead Analysis : FLOATING HEAD Item: 1 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Floating Head Item 1, Description: FLOATING HEAD

452

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Floating Head Type Appendix 1-6 type (d) Tube Side ( Internal ) Design Pressure PTS 215.00 Shell Side ( External ) Design Pressure PSS 275.00 Design Temperature for Spherical Head TEMP 300.00 Head Head Head Head Material Material UNS Number Allowable Stress at Temperature Allowable Stress at Ambient SA-516 70 K02700 20000.00 20000.00 45.0000 1.1250 0.1250 0.1250 SA-105 K03504 20000.00 20000.00 49.3750 45.1250 7.7500 SA-193 B7 G41400 23000.00 23000.00 psig psig F

SOH SAH

psi psi in. in. in. in.

Crown Radius for Spherical Head CR Head Thickness TH Tube Side ( Internal ) Corrosion Allowance CATS Shell Side ( External ) Corrosion Allowance CASS Flange Flange Flange Flange Material Material UNS Number Allowable Stress at Temperature Allowable Stress at Ambient

SOC SAC FOD FID TC

psi psi in. in. in.

Flange Outside Diameter Flange Inside Diameter Flange Thickness Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Material Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient

SBO SBA

psi psi in. in.

Diameter of Bolt Circle Nominal Bolt Diameter Type of Threads Number of Bolts Full Face Gasket ( Yes or No ) Flange Flange Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Flange Column Gasket Flange Face Outside Diameter Face Inside Diameter Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Factor, m, Design Seating Stress Facing Sketch for Gasket Seating Thickness Face Nubbin Width

DB 46.7500 DBOLT 0.7500 TEMA Thread Series 52 No FOD FID GOD GID 45.6880 45.1250 45.7500 45.1250

in. in. in. in. psi in. in. in.

M 5.5000 Y 18000.00 5, Code Sketch 2 2, Code Column II 0.1250 0.1250 1.5000

Distance from Head Centerline to Flange Centroid The Flange is not Slotted. Backing Ring Material Specification

SA-105

CodeCalc User's Guide

453

Appendices
Backing Ring Material UNS Number Backing Ring Allowable Stress, Temperature SOTS Backing Ring Allowable Stress, Ambient SATS Backing Ring Inside Diameter DR Backing Ring Thickness TR Number of Splits in Backing Ring NSPLIT K03504 20000.00 20000.00 45.6875 4.2500 1 psi psi in. in.

INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS FOR SPHERICAL HEADS ASME Code, Section VIII, Div. 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Appendix 1-6 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure: t = 5PL / 6S per Appendix 1-6 t = ( 5 * 215.00 * 45.1250 ) / ( 6 * 20000 ) t = 0.4042 in. Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness: Pa = 6S(T-Cass-Cats) / 5L per Appendix 1-6 Pa = ( 6 * 20000 * 0.8750 ) / ( 5 * 45.1250 ) Pa = 465.37 psig Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New and Cold: Pnc = 6ST / 5L per Appendix 1-6 Pnc = ( 6 * 20000 * 1.1250 ) / ( 5 * 45.0000 ) Pnc = 600.00 psig Actual Sact Sact Sact stress at given pressure and thickness: = 5PL / 6(T-Cass-Cats) per Appendix 1-6 = ( 5 * 215.00 * 45.1250 ) / ( 6 * 0.8750 ) = 9240. psi

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SPHERICAL HEAD ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 300.00 29000000.00 F psi

Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure: TCA OD D/T Factor A B 0.8750 46.0000 105.14 0.0023777 15586.98 EMAWP = B/( (0D/T)/ 2 ) = 15586.9805 /( 105.1429/2.0) = 296.4915 Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): TCA OD D/T Factor A B 0.8217 92.0000 111.97 0.0022328 15397.09 EMAWP=B/((D/T)/2)=15397.0898/(111.9651/2)=275.0337 psig

INTERMEDIATE CALCULATIONS FOR ASME Code, Section VIII, Div. Gasket Contact Width, N Basic Gasket Width, B0 Effective Gasket Width, BE Gasket Reaction Diameter, G

FLANGED PORTION: 1, Ed-2001, A-02 App. 2 = (GOD-GID) / 2 = (GNBWTH+3*N) / 8.0 = B0 = (GOD+GID) / 2.0

0.312 0.133 0.133 45.407

in. in. in. in.

454

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Bolting Information for TEMA Thread Series : Total Area of Bolts Minimum radial distance between hub and bolts Minimum radial distance between bolts and edge Minimum circumferential spacing between bolts Actual circumferential spacing between bolts Maximum circumferential spacing between bolts Basic Flange and Bolt loads: Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID Pressure Force on Flange Face Radial Component of Head Membrane Force Operating Bolt Load: Gasket Seating Bolt Load Required Bolt Area Flange Design Bolt Load (Seating) Gasket Seating Force (Operating) Distance to Gasket Load Reaction Distance to Face Pressure Reaction Distance to End Pressure Reaction SUMMARY OF MOMENTS LOADING End Pressure, Face Pressure, Gasket Load, Floating Hd. Load, Gasket Seating, FOR INTERNAL PRESSURE: Force Distance Md 347666. 0.6875 Mt 483. 0.6796 Mg 44806. 0.6717 Mh 609473. 1.5000 Ma 377073. 0.6717 H HP HD HT HH WM1 WM2 AM W HG DHG DHT DHD Bolt Corr 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000

15.704 1.125 0.813 1.750 2.823 9.250 348148.4 44806.2 347665.5 482.9 609473.4 392954.6 341019.6 17.085 377073.3 44806.2 0.6717 0.6796 0.6875

sq.in. in. in. in. in. in. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. sq.in. lb. lb. in. in. in.

Moment 19918. 27. 2508. -76184. 21108.

ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb.

TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION ( Internal Pressure ) TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING ( Int. Pressure ) Basic Flange and Bolt loads: Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID Pressure Force on Flange Face Radial Component of Head Membrane Force Operating Bolt Load: Gasket Seating Bolt Load Required Bolt Area Flange Design Bolt Load (Seating) Gasket Seating Force (Operating) Distance to Gasket Load Reaction Distance to Face Pressure Reaction Distance to End Pressure Reaction SUMMARY OF MOMENTS FOR EXTERNAL PRESSURE: LOADING Force Distance End Pressure, Md 444688. 0.0158 H HP HD HT HH WM1 WM2 AM W HG DHG DHT DHD Bolt Corr 1.0000

53730. ft.lb. 21108. ft.lb. 445306.1 57310.2 444688.5 617.7 779559.0 392954.6 341019.6 17.085 377073.3 445306.1 0.6717 0.6796 0.6875 lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. sq.in. lb. lb. in. in. in.

Moment 584. ft.lb.

CodeCalc User's Guide

455

Appendices
Face Pressure, Mt 618. 0.0079 1.0000 Floating Hd. Load, Mh 779559. 1.5000 1.0000 Gasket Seating, Ma 377073. 0.6717 1.0000 TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION ( External Pressure ) TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING ( Ext. Pressure ) Required T = T = T = Required T = T = T = Required T = T = T = Required T = T = T = Required T = T = T = Required T = T = T = 0. -97445. 21108. 96861. 21108. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb.

thickness for Main Flange, internal operating conditions: F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g) 1.268 + SQRT( 1.268 * 1.268 + 17.904 ) 5.6858 in. thickness for Main Flange, internal bolt-up conditions: F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g) 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 7.034 ) 2.6521 in. thickness for Main Flange, external operating conditions: F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g) 1.622 + SQRT( 1.622 * 1.622 + 32.276 ) 7.5308 in. thickness for Main Flange, external bolt-up conditions: F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g) 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 7.034 ) 2.6521 in. thickness for Backing Ring, internal operating conditions: SQRT( M Y / S B ) Per App 2-7(b)(9) SQRT( 417514.3 * 24.888 / ( 20000.0 * 45.688 ) ) 3.3722 in. thickness for Backing Ring, internal bolt-up conditions: SQRT( M Y / S B ) Per App 2-7(b)(9) SQRT( 400640.4 * 24.888 / ( 20000.0 * 45.688 ) ) 3.3034 in. Flange 5.6858 7.5308 2.6521 2.6521 7.7808 7.7500 WHD WHDCA WFL WFLCA WBR WBRCA Backing Ring 3.3722 in. in. 3.3034 in. in. 3.3722 in. 4.2500 in. 544.9 428.9 691.8 610.4 331.1 286.2 lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb.

SUMMARY OF REQUIRED THICKNESSES: Head Tubeside (Internal) Pressure 0.4042 Shellside (External) Pressure 0.8217 Tubeside Gasket Seating Load Shellside Gasket Seating Load Maximum + Corrosion Allowance 1.0717 Actual Thickness as Given 1.1250 WEIGHT OF HEAD AND FLANGE: Weight of Spherical Head, Uncorroded Weight of Spherical Head, Corroded Weight of Flange Ring, Uncorroded Weight of Flange Ring, Corroded Weight of Backing Ring, Uncorroded Weight of Backing Ring, Corroded PVElite by COADE Engineering Software al - Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock

456

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 37 Flange Analysis : EX1CHLF1 Item: 1 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Flange Item 1, Description: EX1CHLF1 Integral Weld Neck Partial, Thickness P 200.00 150.00 FCOR 0.0000 46.2500 51.2500 0.3750 0.5625 1.5000 No SA-105 K03504 20000.00 20000.00 SA-193 B7 G41400 25000.00 25000.00

Description of Flange Geometry (Type) Description of Flange Analysis Design Pressure Design Temperature Corrosion Allowance

psig F in. in. in. in. in. in.

Flange Inside Diameter B Flange Outside Diameter A Thickness of Hub at Small End G0 Thickness of Hub at Large End G1 Length of Hub HL Perform thickness calcs. based on rigidity Flange Flange Flange Flange Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Material (Not Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient

SFO SFA

psi psi

Material Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient

SBO SBA

psi psi in. in.

Diameter of Bolt Circle Nominal Bolt Diameter Type of Threads Number of Bolts Flange Face Outside Diameter Flange Face Inside Diameter Flange Facing Sketch Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Factor, m, Design Seating Stress

C 49.6250 DB 0.7500 TEMA Thread Series 92 FOD 48.0000 FID 46.2500 5, Code Sketch 2 GOD GID M Y 47.7500 46.7500 3.7600 7600.00

in. in. in. in. psi in. in.

Column for Gasket Seating Gasket Thickness Flange Face Nubbin Width

2, Code Column II 0.1250 0.1250

FLANGE ANALYSIS, FLANGE NUMBER 1, Description: EX1CHLF1 ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, App. 2, Ed-2001, A-02

CodeCalc User's Guide

457

Appendices
Corroded Flange ID, Corroded Large Hub, Corroded Small Hub, Code R Dimension, BCOR G1COR G0COR R N B0 BE G = = = = = = = = B+2.0*FCOR G1-FCOR G0-FCOR (C-B)/2.0 - G1 (GOD-GID) / 2 (GNBWTH+3*N) / 8.0 B0 (GOD+GID) / 2.0 46.250 0.562 0.375 1.125 0.500 0.203 0.203 47.250 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in.

Gasket Contact Width, Basic Gasket Width, Effective Gasket Width, Gasket Reaction Diameter,

Basic Flange and Bolt loads: Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure: H = 0.785 * G * G * PEQ H = 0.7854 * 47.2500 * 47.2500 * 200.0000 H = 350690. lb. Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces: HP = 2 * BE * PI * G * M * P HP = 2 * 0.2031 * 3.1416 * 47.2500 * 3.7600 * 200.00 HP = 45348. lb. Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID: HD = 0.785 * Bcor * Bcor * P HD = 0.785 * 46.2500 * 46.2500 * 200.0000 HD = 336003. lb. Pressure Force on Flange Face: HT = H - HD HT = 350690 - 336003 HT = 14687. lb. Operating Bolt Load: WM1 = H + HP + HPP WM1 = ( 350690 + 45348 + 0 ) WM1 = 396039. lb. Gasket Seating Bolt Load: WM2 = Y * BE * PI * G + Ypart * BEpart * GLPG + HPGY WM2 = 7600.00*0.2031*3.141*47.250+7600.00*0.0000*0.00 WM2 = 229155. lb. Required Bolt Area: AM = Maximum of WM1/SBO, WM2/SBA AM = Maximum of 396038 / 25000 , 229154 / 25000 AM = 15.8415 sq.in. Bolting Information for Total Area of Bolts, AB Minimum radial distance Minimum radial distance Minimum circumferential Actual circumferential Maximum circumferential TEMA Thread Series: between between spacing spacing spacing hub and bolts bolts and edge between bolts between bolts between bolts 27.784 1.125 0.813 1.750 1.694 5.667 sq.in. in. in. in. in. in.

Min. Gasket Contact Width (Brownell Young): Nmin = AB * SBA/(Y * PI * (GOD+GID) ) = 27.784 * 25000.00/( 7600.00 * 3.14 * ( 47.75 + 46.75) ) Nmin = 0.308 in.

458

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Flange W W W Gasket HG HG HG Design Bolt Load, Gasket Seating: = SBA * ( AM + AB ) / 2.0 = 25000.00 * ( 15.8415 + 27.7840 ) / 2.0 = 545319.31 lb. Seating Force: = WM1 - H = 396038 - 350690 = 45348.50 lb.

MOMENT ARM CALCULATIONS: Distance to Hub Large End: R = (C - BCOR) / 2 - G1COR R = ( 49.625 - 46.250) / 2 - 0.562 R = 1.1250 in. Distance to Gasket Load Reaction: DHG = (C - G ) / 2.0 DHG = ( 49.6250 - 47.2500 ) / 2.0 DHG = 1.1875 in. Distance to Face Pressure Reaction: DHT = ( R + G1COR + DHG ) / 2.0 DHT = ( 1.1250 + 0.5625 + 1.1875 ) / 2.0 DHT = 1.4375 in. Distance to End Pressure Reaction: DHD = R + ( G1COR / 2.0 ) DHD = 1.1250 + ( 0.5625 / 2.0 ) DHD = 1.4062 in. SUMMARY OF MOMENTS FOR INTERNAL PRESSURE: LOADING Force Distance Bolt Corr End Pressure, MD 336003. 1.4062 1.0000 Face Pressure, MT 14687. 1.4375 1.0000 Gasket Load, MG 45348. 1.1875 1.0000 Gasket Seating, MA 545319. 1.1875 1.0000 TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION, RMO TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING, RMA Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(BCOR*G0COR) Hub Ratio, HRAT = HL / H0 Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR)

Moment 39375. 1759. 4488. 53964.

ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb. ft.lb.

45622. ft.lb. 53964. ft.lb. 4.165 0.360 1.500 in.

Flange Factors for Integral Flange: Factor F per 2-7.2 0.870 Factor V per 2-7.3 0.349 Factor f per 2-7.6 1.000 Factors from Figure 2-7.1 K = 1.108 T = 1.874 U = 20.753 Y = 18.885 Z = 9.776 d = 34.776 in.^3 e = 0.209 in.^-1 Stress Factors ALPHA = 1.618 BETA = 1.824 GAMMA = 0.863 DELTA = 0.745 LAMBDA = 1.608 Longitudinal Hub Stress, Operating: SHO = ( f * RMO / BCOR ) / ( Rlambda * G1COR^2 ) SHO = ( 1.0000 * 547468 / 46.2500 ) / ( 1.6078 * 0.5625^2 )

CodeCalc User's Guide

459

Appendices
SHO = 23268. psi Longitudinal Hub Stress, Seating: SHA = ( f * RMA / BCOR ) / ( Rlambda * G1COR^2 ) SHA = ( 1.0000 * 647566 / 46.2500 ) / ( 1.6078 * 0.5625^2 ) SHA = 27523. psi Radial Flange Stress, Operating: SRO = ( BETA * RMO / BCOR ) / ( Rlambda * TH^2 ) SRO = ( 1.8239 * 547468 / 46.2500 ) / ( 1.6078 * 2.9585^2 ) SRO = 1534. psi Radial Flange Stress, Seating: SRA = ( BETA*RMA/BCOR ) / ( Rlambda*TH^2 ) SRA = ( 1.8239 * 647566/ 46.2500 ) / ( 1.6078 * 2.9585^2 ) SRA = 1815. psi Tangential Flange Stress, Operating: STO = ( Y*RMO / (TH*TH*BCOR) ) - Z*SRO STO = ( 18.8853 * 547468 / ( 2.9585^2 * 46.2500) ) - 9.7756 * 1534 STO = 10543. psi Tangential Flange Stress, Seating: STA = ( Y*RMA / (TH^2*BCOR) ) - Z*SRA STA = ( 18.8853 * 647566 / ( 2.9585^2 * 46.2500) ) - 9.7756 * 1814 STA = 12471. psi Average Flange Stress, Operating: SAO = ( SHO + MAX( SRO, STO ) ) / 2 SAO = ( 23268 + MAX( 1534, 10543 ))/ 2 SAO = 16906. psi Average Flange Stress, Seating: SAA = ( SHA + MAX( SRA, STA ) ) / 2 SAA = ( 27522 + MAX( 1814, 12471 ))/ 2 SAA = 19997. psi Bolt Stress, Operating: BSO = ( WM1 / AB ) BSO = ( 396038 / 27.7840 ) BSO = 14254. psi Bolt Stress, Seating: BSA = ( WM2 / AB ) BSA = ( 229154 / 27.7840 ) BSA = 8248. psi Stress Computation Results: OPERATING GASKET SEATING Actual Allowed Actual Allowed Longitudinal Hub 23268. 30000. 27523. 30000. psi Radial Flange 1534. 20000. 1815. 20000. psi Tangential Flange 10543. 20000. 12471. 20000. psi Maximum Average 16906. 20000. 19997. 20000. psi Bolting 14254. 25000. 8248. 25000. psi Minimum Required Flange Thickness + CA Estimated M.A.W.P. ( Operating ) Estimated M.A.W.P. ( Gasket Seating ) Estimated Finished Weight of Flange Estimated Unfinished Weight of Forging APP. S Flange Rigidity Index for Seating Case APP. S Flange Rigidity Index for Operating Case Minimum Design Metal Temperature Results: Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 2.958 236.6 200.1 349.8 483.1 1.431 1.228 15 in. psig psig lb. lb.

460

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) PVElite by COADE Engineering Software 15 -20 F F

Example Shell Analysis PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : VESEXMPL -------------------------------------- Page 42 Flange Analysis : EX1CHLF2 Item: 2 2:38p Dec 16,2002 Input Echo, Flange Item 2, Description: EX1CHLF2 Integral Weld Neck Partial, Thickness P 200.00 150.00 FCOR 0.0000 46.2500 51.2500 0.3750 0.5625 1.5000 No SA-105 K03504 20000.00 20000.00 SA-193 B7 G41400 25000.00 25000.00

Description of Flange Geometry (Type) Description of Flange Analysis Design Pressure Design Temperature Corrosion Allowance

psig F in. in. in. in. in. in.

SFO SFA

psi psi

Material Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient

SBO SBA

psi psi in. in.

C 49.6250 DB 0.7500 TEMA Thread Series 92 FOD 48.0000 FID 46.2500 5, Code Sketch 2 GOD GID M Y 47.7500 46.7500 3.7600 7600.00

in. in. in. in. psi in. in. lb.

Column for Gasket Seating Gasket Thickness Flange Face Nubbin Width Mating Flange Operating Bolt Load

2, Code Column II 0.1250 0.1250 563270.00

CodeCalc User's Guide

461

Appendices
Mating Flange Seating Bolt Load Mating Flange Design Bolt Load 233280.00 583369.00 lb. lb.

FLANGE ANALYSIS, FLANGE NUMBER 2, Description: EX1CHLF2 ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, App. 2, Ed-2001, A-02 Corroded Flange ID, Corroded Large Hub, Corroded Small Hub, Code R Dimension, BCOR G1COR G0COR R N B0 BE G = = = = = = = = B+2.0*FCOR G1-FCOR G0-FCOR (C-B)/2.0 - G1 (GOD-GID) / 2 (GNBWTH+3*N) / 8.0 B0 (GOD+GID) / 2.0 46.250 0.562 0.375 1.125 0.500 0.203 0.203 47.250 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in.

Gasket Contact Width, Basic Gasket Width, Effective Gasket Width, Gasket Reaction Diameter,

Basic Flange and Bolt loads: Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure: H = 0.785 * G * G * PEQ H = 0.7854 * 47.2500 * 47.2500 * 200.0000 H = 350690. lb. Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces: HP = 2 * BE * PI * G * M * P HP = 2 * 0.2031 * 3.1416 * 47.2500 * 3.7600 * 200.00 HP = 45348. lb. Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID: HD = 0.785 * Bcor * Bcor * P HD = 0.785 * 46.2500 * 46.2500 * 200.0000 HD = 336003. lb. Pressure Force on Flange Face: HT = H - HD HT = 350690 - 336003 HT = 14687. lb. Operating Bolt Load: WM1 = H + HP + HPP WM1 = ( 350690 + 45348 + 0 ) WM1 = 396039. lb. WM1 = 563270. lb., Mating Flange Load Governs Gasket Seating Bolt Load: WM2 = Y * BE * PI * G + Ypart * BEpart * GLPG + HPGY WM2 = 7600.00*0.2031*3.141*47.250+7600.00*0.0000*0.00 WM2 = 229155. lb. WM2 = 233280. lb., Mating Flange Load Governs Required Bolt Area: AM = Maximum of WM1/SBO, WM2/SBA AM = Maximum of 563270 / 25000 , 233280 / 25000 AM = 22.5308 sq.in. Bolting Information for Total Area of Bolts, AB Minimum radial distance Minimum radial distance Minimum circumferential Actual circumferential TEMA Thread Series: between between spacing spacing hub and bolts bolts and edge between bolts between bolts 27.784 1.125 0.813 1.750 1.694 sq.in. in. in. in. in.

462

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Maximum circumferential spacing between bolts 6.149 in.

Min. Gasket Contact Width (Brownell Young): Nmin = AB * SBA/(Y * PI * (GOD+GID) ) = 27.784 * 25000.00/( 7600.00 * 3.14 * ( 47.75 + 46.75) ) Nmin = 0.308 in. Flange Design Bolt Load, Gasket Seating: W = SBA * ( AM + AB ) / 2.0 W = 25000.00 * ( 22.5308 + 27.7840 ) / 2.0 W = 628935.00 lb. Gasket Seating Force: HG = WM1 - H HG = 563270 - 350690 HG = 212579.91 lb. MOMENT ARM CALCULATIONS: Distance to Hub Large End: R = (C - BCOR) / 2 - G1COR R = ( 49.625 - 46.250) / 2 - 0.562 R = 1.1250 in. Distance to Gasket Load Reaction: DHG = (C - G ) / 2.0 DHG = ( 49.6250 - 47.2500 ) / 2.0 DHG = 1.1875 in. Distance to Face Pressure Reaction: DHT = ( R + G1COR + DHG ) / 2.0 DHT = ( 1.1250 + 0.5625 + 1.1875 ) / 2.0 DHT = 1.4375 in. Distance to End Pressure Reaction: DHD = R + ( G1COR / 2.0 ) DHD = 1.1250 + ( 0.5625 / 2.0 ) DHD = 1.4062 in. SUMMARY OF MOMENTS FOR INTERNAL PRESSURE: LOADING Force Distance End Pressure, MD 336003. 1.4062 Face Pressure, MT 14687. 1.4375 Gasket Load, MG 212580. 1.1875 Gasket Seating, MA 628935. 1.1875 TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION, RMO TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING, RMA Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(BCOR*G0COR) Hub Ratio, HRAT = HL / H0 Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR) Flange Factors for Integral Flange: Factor F per 2-7.2 Factor V per 2-7.3 Factor f per 2-7.6 Factors from Figure 2-7.1 T = 1.874 Y = 18.885 d = 34.776 in.^3 Bolt Corr 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 Moment 39375. 1759. 21037. 62238. 62171. 62238. 4.165 0.360 1.500

465

Appendices
ASME Floating Head Results Summary for : FLOATING HEAD Required Thicknesses: Tubeside (Internal) Pressure Shellside (External) Pressure Tubeside Gasket Seating Load Shellside Gasket Seating Load Maximum + Corrosion Allowance Actual Thickness as Given Head 0.4042 0.8217 1.0717 1.1250 Flange 5.6858 7.5308 2.6521 2.6521 7.7808 7.7500 Backing Ring 3.3722 in. 0.0000 in. 3.3034 in. 0.0000 in. 3.6222 in. 4.2500 in. 600.000 psig 465.374 psig 296.491 psig

MAWP Results for Spherical Head : MAWP New and Cold ( Internal Pressure ) MAWP Corroded ( Internal Pressure ) External MAWP for Spherical Head

Note: MAWP calculations are not performed for the Flange/Backing Ring ! Flange Results Summary for : EX1CHLF1 Flange Type: Integral Weld Neck Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 200.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 46.250 id: 46.750 m: 3.760 od: 51.250 in. od: 47.750 in. y: 7600.000 psi 2.958 in.

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 49.625 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA MAWP Rigidity Index Operating 236.604 1.228 Seating 200.084 1.431

Note: The Flange passed, for the Internal Pressure. Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange -20.00 F 349.775 lb. 483.103 lb.

Flange Results Summary for : EX1CHLF2 Flange Type: Integral Weld Neck Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 200.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 46.250 id: 46.750 m: 3.760 od: 51.250 in. od: 47.750 in. y: 7600.000 psi 3.301 in.

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 49.625 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA Rigidity Index Operating 1.390 Seating 1.371

Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange

-20.00 F 386.837 lb. 520.165 lb.

466

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
Flange Results Summary for : EX1SHFLF1 Flange Type: Integral Weld Neck Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 200.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 46.250 id: 46.750 m: 3.760 od: 51.250 in. od: 47.750 in. y: 7600.000 psi 3.300 in.

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 49.625 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA Operating Seating Rigidity Index 1.390 1.371 Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange

-20.00 F 386.817 lb. 520.145 lb.

Flange Results Summary for : EX1SHFLF2 Flange Type: Integral Weld Neck Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 275.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 46.250 id: 51.625 m: 3.760 od: 55.500 in. od: 52.625 in. y: 7600.000 psi 4.502 in.

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 53.875 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA MAWP Rigidity Index Operating 275.013 1.068 Seating 1264.783 0.320

Note: The Flange passed, for the Internal Pressure. Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange 36.89 F 980.931 lb. 1255.653 lb.

Flange Results Summary for : EX1CVFL2 Flange Type: Integral Weld Neck Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 275.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 50.250 id: 51.625 m: 3.760 od: 55.500 in. od: 52.625 in. y: 7600.000 psi 3.206 in.

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 53.875 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA MAWP Rigidity Index Operating 275.033 1.331 Seating 587.714 0.845

CodeCalc User's Guide

467

Appendices
Note: The Flange passed, for the Internal Pressure. Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange -20.00 F 435.848 lb. 580.672 lb.

Flange Results Summary for : EX1CHCV Flange Type: TEMA Channel Cover Analyze Option: Partial, Thk Design Pressure Peq: 200.00 psig Flange Diameters Gasket Diameters Gasket Factors id: 0.000 id: 47.375 m: 3.760 od: 51.250 in. od: 48.375 in. y: 7600.000 psi

Flange has 92 Bolts 0.750 in. at BCD 49.625 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per ASME + CA 4.118 in. Min. Required Flange Thickness per TEMA + CA 2.753 in. TEMA Cover Deflection Actual: 0.0300 in. Allowed: 0.0300 in. Warning: TEMA Actual Deflection > Allowed Deflection ! MAWP Operating 199.999 Seating 1279.802

Warning: The Flange Failed, for Internal Pressure ! Flange MDMT The finished weight of the flange The unfinished weight of the flange Least MAWP and Overall Weight Results : The Least MAWP (N C) for EX1CHCYL was 364.81 psig . The Least MAWP (Cor) for EX1CHLF2 was 0.00 psig . The total sum of the Weights ( N C ) was 13595.08 lb. . The total sum of the Weights ( Cor ) was 11225.28 lb. . PVElite by COADE Engineering Software -55.00 F 2403.840 lb. 2403.840 lb.

471

Appendices

CodeCalc Version 5.1 Features (7/92)

A91 Updates New file manager, allows copy, delete etc. Tubesheet Program updated to TEMA A-91 addenda Basering and Skirt program added Thinwalled Expansion Joint program added Flanged and Flued Expansion joint program added Revised Summary program External Pressure Calcs. in the Nozzle Program AISC unity checks on angle iron sections New Material Database 1051 materials (in order) Increased problem size ( 50 items ) Return to Input option from output processor Batch run and Overwrite options from input On-line help in output processor Printer selection

CodeCalc Version 5.2 Features (7/93)

A-92 Code Updates, material list updated ASME Appendix AA-Tubesheet Program ASME Appendix EE-Halfpipe Jacket Program ASME Appendix 14 Large Opening Analysis Saddle Design added to HORIZVES Program WRC107 program modified for user control CTRL KO and CTRL KB options added to input Flange program modified for special use of CA.

CodeCalc Version 5.4 Features (6/95)

Nozzle program now performs internal, external, and hydrotest cases simultaneously. CodeCalc determines the governing case and continues the analysis with that case. Hillside nozzle angles can now be computed by the program. The user needs to know the offset distance of the nozzle, and the angle will be computed. The Code F correction factor for hillside nozzles is now automatically accounted for. MDMT for each pad, shell, and nozzle is now reported. Figure 6A has been added to the Rectangular Vessel program. External calculations for Figures 1A and 2A have been added to the Rectangular Vessel program. The Flange program can now perform a combined analyze/partial calculation. It performs the stress calculation on the original thickness and then reports what the required thickness is.

472

CodeCalc User's Guide

Appendices
The Shell program has been updated to properly select sizes for shapes other than angles. Material Database has been updated according to the 95 Code. Copper Casting Material CU62-836-CST has been added to the database. Single angle sizes 1 inch through 1.75 inches have been added to the AISC database. On-screen calculations are now performed from within the input. The on-screen calculations allow for quick design optimization without having to leave the input processor. Graphics are now available from within the input processor for the Shell program. The dimensioned drawings can be sent directly to the printer, or dumped out as either a .PCX file or a CodeCalc screen dump file. The remaining modules will have graphics in the near future.

CodeCalc Version 5.3 Features (7/94)

Winter A-93 Updates. Consistent Printout formats for All Modules. Expanded Horizontal Printout to show some intermediate Calculations for Saddle Checks. Revised Shear type allowable for nonpressure parts to use AISC Allowable of .4 * Yield. Added use of AISC Occasional Load Factor in Leg&Lug Module. Perform Additional Bending and Weld Stress Checks in the Lifting Lug Analysis. Wind and Earthquake Loads are automatically generated by Leg&Lug Module. Compute trapezoidal area of the weld cut by the limit of reinforcement in the Nozzle Program. Ability to set Area 1 or Area 2 to 0 as an input question in the Nozzle Program. Ability to turn off UG-45 calcs for manways. Modified Flohead program to use F even when P is 0.0 as a setup option. Consideration of the Stiffening Ring Material being different from the Shell material in Shell. Included the Option of Considering Liquid Hydrostatic Head Component in Shell. The Shell program can now choose a structural shape to satisfy external pressure requirements. Choice of Normalized material in Shell and Nozzle as an input option. Added Weld shear flow calculations in the Shell Program. Updated the Curves of K vs. D in the Halfpipe Jacket program. Reduced the Length/Format of External Pressure Printout for all modules as a setup file option. Updated the material database to A-93 and added UNS numbers. Ability to use ASME names in the input module. Made variable assignments closer to Code B31.3 convention in Pipe&Pad Module. Put Appendix S flange rigidity Calculations into the Flange program. Perform bolt circle/weld leg interference checks in the Flange Program. Added some stainless steel pipe specs to the Material Database. Install program updated to log network drives. Updated file manager to log network drives. CodeCalc contains a completely new setup program. A Program which displays unrecoverable fatal errors has been implemented (CCERROR). An entirely new scrolling input program has been implemented.

CodeCalc User's Guide

473

Appendices
The material database access was completely reworked. A complete new module to perform Rectangular Vessel Analysis per App. 14 has been added. A new program loader CC.EXE was written to replace CC.COM. Added Calculations for minimum weld sizes for welded tubes in heat exchangers per UW-20. Network support has been implemented. A pop-up calculator has been added.

CodeCalc Version 5.5 Features (6/96)

ASME Section VIII Div. 1, Addenda 1995 changes have been incorporated: Nozzle Module: The new Appendix 1-7 large nozzle membrane and bending stresses are now computed. The corresponding allowable stresses are also listed for comparison. Nozzle Module: Nozzle reinforcement related calculations are updated per UG-39 (opening in flat head) and UG-41 (weld loads and strength paths). ASME Tubesheet Module: U-tube tubesheet calculations have been updated per the new Appendix AA. Thin Joint Module: Life cycle equations for expansion joints are updated per the new Appendix CC. New Additions/Enhancements for Calculations: WRC107 Module: User can input in global coordinates with up to 3 different load cases (SUStained, EXPansion, OCCasional) and the program will also perform stress summation and check against stress intensity allowables. Conical Sections: Discontinuity stresses at Cone-to-Cylinder Junctures are calculated per Bednar's Pressure Vessel Design Handbook 2nd Ed. Flange Module: Minimum gasket width is calculated per Brownell & Young's Process Equipment Design. Also Gasket Seating MAWP can now be computed for virtually any geometry. TEMA Tubesheet & ASME Tubesheet Module: TEMA Changes of flanged extensions required thickness for Fixed Tubesheet or Floating Tubesheet are incorporated (RCB-7.1341). TEMA Tubesheet Module: The required flanged extension thickness for U-tube tubesheet is calculated by iteration per RCB-7.1342. Leg & Lug Module: The support lug now incorporates cap type (top plate) and continuous top support rings (girder rings) per Bednar's Pressure Vessel Design Handbook 2nd Ed. Shell Module: Added a new option for angle stiffeners "rolled the hard way". Graphics: Scaled and dimensioned plots are now available for each component in every module. By pressing P for Plot in the input spreadsheet, a dimensioned drawing according to the input will automatically come up on the screen. It can also be sent directly to the printer, or saved as a .PCX file which can be used in standard word processing program. Summary: The summary has been changed in the presentation of the Shell, Nozzle and WRC 107 data.

474

Tubesheet Module: Integrated tubesheet and Expansion joint data. Added a Flange Merge option. Added British Tubesheet rules for U-tube, floating tube, and fixed tubesheets. Improved the computation of the Required Thickness for fixed TEMA Tubesheets. Base Ring Module: Added an option to determine Fitness for Service API 579 Local Thinning and General Metal Loss Levels 1 and 2 evaluations. Nozzle Module: Added an option to verify if the nozzle is located outside the spherical portion of the head. Added an option to perform area calculations on small nozzles at each nozzle level. Weld Pass/Fail result now displays on the status bar. Added A-2002 changes. Added a WRC 107auto-calculation option for support lugs. Added on-screen prompts for the input errors in the Shell, Nozzle, and Flange modules. Added British material database information to the WRC 297/Annex G and Tubesheet Modules.

CodeCalc User's Guide

477

Appendices
Added enhancements to graphics for non-English units. Added automatic summary generation, when the complete file is analyzed. Added class/thickness data displays to the Material Selection window.

CodeCalc Version 2004 Features (1/2004)

ASME Code 2003 Addenda updates including updates to the material database. Added ASME Part UHX. Included evaluation of pitting flaws per section 6 for API 579. Increased the allowable number of data points to 256 in the API-579 module. Added new rules for checking large diameter thin heads per Appendix 1-4(f). Improvements to the Tube-Tubesheet joint calculations in Tubesheet modules. Improved the handling of full face gasket flange in the Flanges, Floating head and Tubesheet modules. Added option to specify alternate flange loads in the Floating head module. Enhanced the material database search feature by including an option to search by the UNS number. Added a quick start guide to the Help menu for new users. Updated and streamlined the Output Processor.

CodeCalc Version 2005 Features (1/2005)

Updated ASME Code 2005 Addenda. Updated VIII-1, VIII-2, and Yield Stress Databases. Incorporated Expansion Joint Analysis in ASME Tubesheet Module. Added TEMA Metric, British and South African Metric Bolt look p tables in Flange, Basering, Tubesheets, Floating Head and Leg-Lug modules. Enhanced user interface for the Flange module including 0n-screen display of results. Added inputs for the partition gasket and nubbin width. Previous versions of the software the gasket thickness and nubbin width of the main gasket was used for the partition gasket. Added an option to print the membrane stress at the nozzle edge in the Annex G module. Added modifications to the treatment of full strength tube-tubesheet joint in the Tubesheet module. Enhanced the program for network users. Implemented Appendix 9 Jackets in the Shell/Head module. These jackets could cover the shell completely or part of it) and/or the head. Added on-screen display of error messages, warnings and important results for the ASME UHX and TEMA Tubesheet modules. Added analysis of a vessel on 2 support lugs. Analysis for vessels supported on more than 2 lugs was previously available.

481

Index

F
Failure Path Calculations 107 FEA Options 317 Figure A1 Dialog Box 247 Figure A2 Dialog Box 247 Figure B3-B Dialog Box 254 File Tab 25 Finite Element Analysis (FEA) 323 Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger Dialog Box 176 Flange Data Tab 138 Flange Tab 376 Flange/Bolts Tab 120 Flanges 135 Floating Heads 117

K
Kettle Tubesheet Dialog Box 177

L
Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations 106 Large Openings 363 Leg Results 289 Legs and Lugs 265 Legs and Lugs Tab 267 Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, front end L1 173 Length of Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet, rear L1 173 Lifting Lug Dialog Box 278 Ligament Efficiency Calculations 261 Loads Tab 272, 306, 372 Long Side Tab 258 Longitudinal Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) 222

G
Gasket Data Tab 144 Gasket Tab 122, 380 Geometry Tab 91 Geometry Tab (Shell/Head) 58 Global Load and Direction Conventions 315 Groove Options 83

M
Material Database Dialog Box 385 Material Database Editor 34 Material Dialog Boxes 385 Material Properties 35 Material Properties Dialog Box 422 MAWP Calculations 263 Minimum Design Metal Temperature 107 Miscellaneous Tab 95, 128 Miscellaneous Tab (Base Rings) 336 Miscellaneous Tab (Configuration Dialog Box) 30 Miscellaneous Tab (Thick Joints) 353 Multiple Load Cases Dialog Box 198 Multiple Load Cases Dialog Box (TEMA Tubesheets) 173

H
Half Pipes 357 Head Tab 118 Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations 263 Home Tab 26 Horizontal Vessels 213 Hub/Bolts Tab 142 Hubs/Bolts Tab 378

I
Installation 16 Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head 133 Internal Pressure Results 115 Internal Pressure Results for the Head: 133 Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area, And UG-45 107

N
Nozzle / Attachment Tab 370 Nozzle Tab 88 Nozzles 87

O
Opening Tab (Large Openings) 365 Optional Data Tab 66 Outer Cylinder Dialog Box 171 Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint 171 Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance 171

J
Jacket Tab 69 Jacket Tab (Half Pipes) 359

482

CodeCalc User's Guide

Index
Outer Cylindrical Element Length (Lo) 171 Output 288, 300 Seismic Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) 223 Selection of Reinforcing Pad 106 Shell Band Corrosion Allowance 173 Shell Band Properties Dialog Box 172 Shell Tab 185 Shell Tab (Half Pipes) 358 Shell Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) 155 Shell Tab (Thick Joints) 352 Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet 173 Shell/Head Tab 101, 218 Shell/Nozzle Tab (Large Openings) 366 Shells and Heads 49 Shells/Heads Tab 55 Short Side Tab 256 Small Cylinder and Larger Cylinder Tabs 113 Soehren's Calculations: 134 Starting CodeCalc 17 Stiffening Ring Tab (Horizontal Vessels) 221 Stress Calculations 262 Supplemental Loads 67 Support Lug Dialog Box 281

P
Performing an Analysis 17 Pipes and Pads 291 Pipes and Pads Tab (Pipes and Pads) 291 Point Measurement Data Dialog Box 83 Printing or Saving Reports to a File 23 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis (Shells) 49 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 52, 183 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Flanges) 135 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (Nozzles) 87 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis (TubeSheets) 151

R
Rectangular Vessels (App. 13) 229 Reinforcement Calculations 262 Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure 116 Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure 116 Reinforcing Bar Options 260 Reinforcing Section Options 261 Required and Available Areas 106 Required Thickness Calculations 133 Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle 105 Results 85, 105, 115, 132, 226, 261 Results (ASME Tubesheets) 211 Results (Base Rings) 339 Results (Flanges) 148 Results (Thick Joints) 356 Results (Tubesheets) 177 Results (WRC 107/537/FEA) 318 Reviewing the Results - The Output Option 22

T
Tabs 25 Technical Support 16 TEMA Tubesheets 151 Thick Joints 349 Thin Joints 341 Tools Tab 28 Trunnion Results 289 Trunnion Tab 286 Tube to Tubesheet Joint Input Dialog Box 190 Tubes Tab 187 Tubes Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) 157 Tubesheet Exchanger Dialog Box 197 Tubesheet Extended as Flange Dialog (TEMA Tubesheets) 169 Tubesheet Extended As Flange Dialog Box 209 Tubesheet Gasket Dialog Box 173 Tubesheet Gasket/Bolting Input Dialog Box 199 Tubesheet Tab 192 Tubesheet Tab (TEMA Tubesheets) 161

S
Saddle Wear Plate Design 213 Saddle Webs and Base Plate Dialog Box 220 Saddle/Wear Tab 220 Section Options 64 Seismic Loads 276

CodeCalc User's Guide

483

Index

U
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness 106 Units File Dialog Box 33

V
Vessel Leg Tab 284 Vessel Tab 216, 239, 304, 369

W
Weld Size Calculations 107 Weld Strength Calculations 107 What Analysis Types are Available? 12 What Distinguishes CodeCalc From our Competitors? 12 What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc 9 Wind Loads 273 Wind Loads Tab (Horizontal Vessels) 224 WRC 107 Options 315 WRC 107 Stress Calculations 321 WRC 107 Stress Summations 318 WRC 107/537 FEA 301 WRC 107/537 Load Conventions 314 WRC 297 Tab 367 WRC 297/Annex G 367

484

CodeCalc User's Guide

STA Captain - S Log Solo RPG (TNG Cover) v1.41
100% (21)
STA Captain - S Log Solo RPG (TNG Cover) v1.41
336 pages
How To Root Any BLU Mobile Device Using Magisk (No TWRP Required)
67% (3)
How To Root Any BLU Mobile Device Using Magisk (No TWRP Required)
14 pages
Car Keys Manual Programming Book
90% (10)
Car Keys Manual Programming Book
12 pages
Harbor Freight Cen-Tech CAN OBD II Code Reader EOBD Scanner 98614
75% (8)
Harbor Freight Cen-Tech CAN OBD II Code Reader EOBD Scanner 98614
73 pages
Dodge 42RLE Service Manual
98% (40)
Dodge 42RLE Service Manual
186 pages
20 Effective ChatGPT Prompts
100% (6)
20 Effective ChatGPT Prompts
10 pages
OceanofPDF - Com How To Draw Cool Stuff Shading Textures - Catherine V Holmes
100% (5)
OceanofPDF - Com How To Draw Cool Stuff Shading Textures - Catherine V Holmes
294 pages
Ase Study Guide - Parts Specialist (P2)
No ratings yet
Ase Study Guide - Parts Specialist (P2)
23 pages
DPA Part 107 Cheat Sheet
100% (6)
DPA Part 107 Cheat Sheet
35 pages
Cycle Life Analysis Pressure Vessel
100% (1)
Cycle Life Analysis Pressure Vessel
29 pages
Bella Sloan Secret Credit Union List
100% (4)
Bella Sloan Secret Credit Union List
5 pages
BMW 7 Series 1988 1994 PDF
100% (4)
BMW 7 Series 1988 1994 PDF
987 pages
Asme Pvho-1
100% (1)
Asme Pvho-1
14 pages
PV Elite Training Presentation (2007)
83% (6)
PV Elite Training Presentation (2007)
52 pages
How To Review PV Elite Design Report
100% (2)
How To Review PV Elite Design Report
9 pages
Training Manual For PVelite (Basic Level)
100% (12)
Training Manual For PVelite (Basic Level)
42 pages
PVElite Design Guidelines
100% (2)
PVElite Design Guidelines
7 pages
Load Cases and How They Are Handled by PV Elite
67% (3)
Load Cases and How They Are Handled by PV Elite
7 pages
CADWorx Equipment User Guide
0% (1)
CADWorx Equipment User Guide
68 pages
4R70W Rebuild Checklist
88% (8)
4R70W Rebuild Checklist
26 pages
Specification For AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors
100% (3)
Specification For AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors
34 pages
47re To 48 Upgrade
100% (3)
47re To 48 Upgrade
1 page
How To Draw Fantasy Females
100% (9)
How To Draw Fantasy Females
129 pages
Collision Guide
100% (1)
Collision Guide
39 pages
Best Homemade Automotive Tools - EBOOK PDF
100% (5)
Best Homemade Automotive Tools - EBOOK PDF
104 pages
Appendix A 1
No ratings yet
Appendix A 1
40 pages
Astm b152 1997
No ratings yet
Astm b152 1997
12 pages
PV, Elite
No ratings yet
PV, Elite
2 pages
PV Elite Result
No ratings yet
PV Elite Result
18 pages
PV Elite
No ratings yet
PV Elite
680 pages
Basic PV Elite Training
100% (4)
Basic PV Elite Training
54 pages
PV Elite Webinar 001
100% (1)
PV Elite Webinar 001
23 pages
COMPRESS Quick Start Guide en
No ratings yet
COMPRESS Quick Start Guide en
10 pages
Pressure Vessel - Calculations, Issues in Design, Trouble Shooting-Part-1
No ratings yet
Pressure Vessel - Calculations, Issues in Design, Trouble Shooting-Part-1
38 pages
PV Elite
100% (1)
PV Elite
6 pages
PV Elite-CAUx 2018 - Flange Design in Detail
100% (1)
PV Elite-CAUx 2018 - Flange Design in Detail
59 pages
Tutorial of WRC 107 For Trunnion
No ratings yet
Tutorial of WRC 107 For Trunnion
9 pages
WRC, PV Elite, NozzlePro Sign Conventions
No ratings yet
WRC, PV Elite, NozzlePro Sign Conventions
13 pages
PV Elite Heat Exchanger Calculations
100% (2)
PV Elite Heat Exchanger Calculations
99 pages
Nozzle Loads
No ratings yet
Nozzle Loads
8 pages
PV Elite Training Supports
100% (6)
PV Elite Training Supports
52 pages
PV Elite 2011
No ratings yet
PV Elite 2011
21 pages
PV Elite Saddle Analysis
No ratings yet
PV Elite Saddle Analysis
4 pages
Mechanical Design of Tall Columns:Guide For Design
100% (1)
Mechanical Design of Tall Columns:Guide For Design
45 pages
Asme Viii Div.2
100% (1)
Asme Viii Div.2
16 pages
PV Elite Modeling Stacked Exchangers PDF
100% (2)
PV Elite Modeling Stacked Exchangers PDF
5 pages
PV Elite and CodeCalc
100% (3)
PV Elite and CodeCalc
102 pages
Fatigue Analysis in PV Elite
No ratings yet
Fatigue Analysis in PV Elite
3 pages
Pressure Vessel Design Training - Course Content
100% (1)
Pressure Vessel Design Training - Course Content
13 pages
Nozzle & Sadle Procedure
100% (1)
Nozzle & Sadle Procedure
25 pages
Thin Walled Pressure Vessel Design Calculation Tutorial
No ratings yet
Thin Walled Pressure Vessel Design Calculation Tutorial
9 pages
ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessel - Nozzle Load Application With Software Automation
No ratings yet
ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessel - Nozzle Load Application With Software Automation
4 pages
NozzlePRO PDF
No ratings yet
NozzlePRO PDF
185 pages
Code Case 2901 - Consideration of External Loads On ASME B16.5 Standard Flanges Under ASME Code Section VIII, Division 1 & 2
No ratings yet
Code Case 2901 - Consideration of External Loads On ASME B16.5 Standard Flanges Under ASME Code Section VIII, Division 1 & 2
2 pages
Load Case Explanation in PV Elite
No ratings yet
Load Case Explanation in PV Elite
2 pages
Stress Analysis of Reactor Nozzle To Head
100% (1)
Stress Analysis of Reactor Nozzle To Head
5 pages
Pressure Vessel Design PDF
86% (7)
Pressure Vessel Design PDF
26 pages
ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessel - Transportation Analysis
No ratings yet
ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessel - Transportation Analysis
4 pages
Sec. VIII Div 1 Apen 1
No ratings yet
Sec. VIII Div 1 Apen 1
16 pages
Pressure Vessel Design
100% (1)
Pressure Vessel Design
37 pages
PV Elite Intro
100% (1)
PV Elite Intro
52 pages
Design of Welded Pressure Equipment
No ratings yet
Design of Welded Pressure Equipment
67 pages
PV Elite Tips and Tricks
80% (5)
PV Elite Tips and Tricks
50 pages
Small Vertical Pressure Vessel Leg Support Design - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Engineering - Eng-Tips PDF
No ratings yet
Small Vertical Pressure Vessel Leg Support Design - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Engineering - Eng-Tips PDF
6 pages
PV Elite Training-Notes On PV Elite
No ratings yet
PV Elite Training-Notes On PV Elite
25 pages
Tolerances For Pressure Vessels
No ratings yet
Tolerances For Pressure Vessels
2 pages
DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSEL Full Report DE
100% (2)
DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSEL Full Report DE
48 pages
PV Elite
100% (1)
PV Elite
452 pages
PVElite 2013 Manual
100% (1)
PVElite 2013 Manual
517 pages
Qa Manual
No ratings yet
Qa Manual
89 pages
Inter Graph TANK Users
100% (2)
Inter Graph TANK Users
143 pages
PVElite 2013 PDF
100% (4)
PVElite 2013 PDF
517 pages
Caesar II
100% (1)
Caesar II
1,108 pages
Inter Graph TANK Users PDF
No ratings yet
Inter Graph TANK Users PDF
143 pages
Smart Plant Import Assistant
100% (1)
Smart Plant Import Assistant
94 pages
CADWorx Plant User Guide
100% (8)
CADWorx Plant User Guide
526 pages
CADWorx P&ID User Guide
No ratings yet
CADWorx P&ID User Guide
188 pages
SPLMInstall UserGuide
No ratings yet
SPLMInstall UserGuide
125 pages
Smartplant License Manager: Installation and User'S Guide
No ratings yet
Smartplant License Manager: Installation and User'S Guide
137 pages
CADWorx Tutorials
100% (1)
CADWorx Tutorials
77 pages
Practical Projects For Self-Sufficiency - DIY Projects To Get Your Self-Reliant Lifestyle Started PDF
88% (16)
Practical Projects For Self-Sufficiency - DIY Projects To Get Your Self-Reliant Lifestyle Started PDF
163 pages
Ecm Installation and Relearn
No ratings yet
Ecm Installation and Relearn
4 pages
Learn Balloon Twisting From Scratch
100% (2)
Learn Balloon Twisting From Scratch
79 pages
2001-2003 4L60-E Transmission Overhaul
75% (8)
2001-2003 4L60-E Transmission Overhaul
104 pages
Performance Catalog 010616 Re
100% (1)
Performance Catalog 010616 Re
17 pages
Deductive Puzzle- Mindworks Brain Training
100% (2)
Deductive Puzzle- Mindworks Brain Training
136 pages
700r4 Cable Adjustment Instructions
100% (2)
700r4 Cable Adjustment Instructions
3 pages
Body Repair Manual 1463KB
100% (2)
Body Repair Manual 1463KB
25 pages
Ford Edge 2012
100% (1)
Ford Edge 2012
5,640 pages
Siemens - PPCL (1) (Process Control Lang)
No ratings yet
Siemens - PPCL (1) (Process Control Lang)
300 pages
Quantum Energy Generator (QEG) - REVISED Manual Edition (March 2015)
100% (6)
Quantum Energy Generator (QEG) - REVISED Manual Edition (March 2015)
75 pages
Safety - Crane-Safety-Workshop-Iimp
No ratings yet
Safety - Crane-Safety-Workshop-Iimp
212 pages
Eaton Diagonstico de Fallas Trans U Shift TRTS0940EN
100% (1)
Eaton Diagonstico de Fallas Trans U Shift TRTS0940EN
616 pages
Model Question Paper
100% (1)
Model Question Paper
10 pages
Information For HIC Material PDF
No ratings yet
Information For HIC Material PDF
1 page
B432
No ratings yet
B432
6 pages
Long Intl The Importance of Proj Handover Docs PDF
No ratings yet
Long Intl The Importance of Proj Handover Docs PDF
22 pages
Electric Heaters For Safe Startup of
No ratings yet
Electric Heaters For Safe Startup of
9 pages
Maxim Tubes Harish
No ratings yet
Maxim Tubes Harish
19 pages
Dry Chemical Fixed Pipe Fire Suppression Systems PDF
No ratings yet
Dry Chemical Fixed Pipe Fire Suppression Systems PDF
4 pages
Analysis of Pressure Vessel: A Review
No ratings yet
Analysis of Pressure Vessel: A Review
5 pages
Stress Analysis of Rectangular Boxes Using Fem: D.G. Lokhande, Dr. D. V. Bhope
No ratings yet
Stress Analysis of Rectangular Boxes Using Fem: D.G. Lokhande, Dr. D. V. Bhope
9 pages
Knowledge Sharing Series
No ratings yet
Knowledge Sharing Series
12 pages
Astm A105
No ratings yet
Astm A105
5 pages
zc131 2 2 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM - HIGH PRESSURE WATER MIST SYSTEM Aquatech
No ratings yet
zc131 2 2 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM - HIGH PRESSURE WATER MIST SYSTEM Aquatech
6 pages
Munawar Mukada
No ratings yet
Munawar Mukada
3 pages
Senior Design Engineer For Static Equipment With 13 Years of Experience
No ratings yet
Senior Design Engineer For Static Equipment With 13 Years of Experience
7 pages
A Study On Welding Defects of Pressure Vessel
100% (1)
A Study On Welding Defects of Pressure Vessel
24 pages
0450e - Application For Certification As A Welding Inspector
No ratings yet
0450e - Application For Certification As A Welding Inspector
6 pages
Pressure Equipment Exemption Order: Safety Codes Act
No ratings yet
Pressure Equipment Exemption Order: Safety Codes Act
8 pages
GBT 151-2014 Heat Exchangers-104403
No ratings yet
GBT 151-2014 Heat Exchangers-104403
268 pages
Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessvessel Zick 03
0% (1)
Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessvessel Zick 03
12 pages
19-5601 Unfired Pressure Vessel
0% (1)
19-5601 Unfired Pressure Vessel
30 pages
CALCULOS 2 cHOMPI PDF
No ratings yet
CALCULOS 2 cHOMPI PDF
5 pages
Equipment Design Part 1
No ratings yet
Equipment Design Part 1
50 pages
Design and Materials Selection of Autoclaves and Auxiliary Equipment
No ratings yet
Design and Materials Selection of Autoclaves and Auxiliary Equipment
3 pages
State of California
No ratings yet
State of California
3 pages
Me 528 Eteeap 2021 2022
No ratings yet
Me 528 Eteeap 2021 2022
34 pages
A204A204M-12 Standard Specification For Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
No ratings yet
A204A204M-12 Standard Specification For Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
3 pages
NozzleQualification WRC537
No ratings yet
NozzleQualification WRC537
13 pages